S9165-Ae-Mma-010( Sonar Dome Rubber Window Sdrw-1 for Ddg-51 Class)

S9165-AE-MMA-010 0910-LP-104-3773 REVISION 2

TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR [SGML VERSION; SEE RECORD OF REVISIONS ] INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND PARTS LIST SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW SDRW-1 FOR DDG-51 CLASS;

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT B: DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO U.S. GOVERNMENT AGENCIES ONLY; THIS PUBLICATION IS REQUIRED FOR OFFICIAL USE OR FOR ADMINISTRATIVE OR OPERATIONAL PURPOSES; (15 JAN 2007). OTHER REQUESTS FOR THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE REFERRED TO THE NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COM- MAND (SEA-09T).

WARNING: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS TECHNICAL DATA WHOSE EXPORT IS RESTRICTED BY THE ARMS EXPORT CONTROL ACT (TITLE 22, U.S.C. SEC 2751, ET SEQ.) OR THE EXPORT ADMINISTRATION ACT OF 1979, AS AMENDED, TITLE 50, U.S.C., APP 2401 ET SEQ. VIOLATIONS OF THESE EXPORT LAWS ARE SUBJECT TO SEVERE CRIMINAL PENALTIES. DISSEMINATE IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROVISIONS OF DOD DIRECTIVE 5230.25(D).

DESTRUCTION NOTICE: DESTROY BY ANY METHOD THAT WILL PREVENT DISCLO- SURE OF CONTENTS OR RECONSTRUCTION OF THIS DOCUMENT.

SUPERSEDURE NOTICE: THIS PUBLICATION SUPERSEDES S9165-AE-MMA-010 DATED 1 FEB 1996, AND ALL CHANGES THERETO.

PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND 15 JAN 2007 TITLE-1 / (TITLE-2 Blank)@@FIpgtype@@TITLE@@!FIpgtype@@ @@FIpgtype@@TITLE@@!FIpgtype@@ TITLE-2 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

RECORD OF REVISIONS REVISION NO. DATE TITLE AND/OR BRIEF DESCRIPTION/PREPARING ACTIVITY 0 01 MAY 1990 STK NO. 0910-LP-421-4500 1 01 FEB 1996 STK NO. 0910-LP-813-9900 2 15 JAN 2007 REVISION 2 UPDATES THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL TO REFLECT THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION OF THE SDRW-1 CURRENTLY ONBOARD THE DDG 51 CLASS SHIPS. ALSO INCORPORATED THE FOLLOWING: SONAR ISOLATION BOX SUPPLY INFORMATION AS PER TMDER N65540-04-TC34. ADDED INFORMATION FOR ORDERING AND WIRING K2 IN THE E-PN-45 PANEL AS PER TMDER N65540-02-SC10. MODIFIED SONAR DOME ENTRY (DIVE) REPORT AS PER TMDER N65540-02-SC09. ADDED INFORMATION TO INCLUDE THE OPENING AND CLOSING OF PIPE CAP DOWN STREAM OF A-V-138 AS PER TMDER N65540- 02-SC46: THE FOLLOWING WAS CHANGED; PARAGRAPH(S) , 1-1.5, 1-3, 1.3.1, 2-3.1, 2-7.1, 3-8.5, 4-1, 4-1.1, 6.12, 6.13, 8-1.1, 8-7.2 AND 8-7.4 TABLE(S) 2-1., 2-4., 2-7., 2-8., 2-9., 6-2., 7-2., 7-3. AND 7-4. FIGURE(S) 2-3., 3-19., 8-61., FO-7., FO-8., FO-11., FO-12. AND FO-13. NOTE THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL (TM) HAS BEEN DEVELOPED FROM AN INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC SOURCE KNOWN AS STANDARD GENERALIZED MARKUP LANGUAGE (SGML). THERE IS NO LOEP. ALL CHANGES, IF APPLICABLE, ARE INCLUDED. THE PAGINATION IN THIS TM WILL NOT MATCH THE PAGINATION OF THE ORIGINAL PAPER TM; HOWEVER, THE CONTENT IS EXACTLY THE SAME. ANY CHANGES RECEIVED AFTER RECEIPT OF THIS TM WILL ONLY FIT IN THIS PAGINATED VERSION.

Record Of Revisions-1 / (Record Of Revisions-2 Blank) Record Of Revisions-2 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

FOREWORD

The Sonar Dome Rubber Window SDRW-1 Technical Manual has been prepared to provide guidance to both Naval and commercial activities which install, repair, groom, or maintain sonar domes and their associated pressurization systems. This information will be of value to the ﬂeet because the performance of sonar domes has an important inﬂuence on operations at sea.

The use of the Sonar Dome Rubber Window (SDRW) has signiﬁcantly improved the performance of the Sonar Set by:

a. Reducing machinery and hull vibration coupled to the sonar. b. Reducing water ﬂow noise created by corrosion, pitting, and marine growth. c. Increasing signal transmission and receive capabilities by improved acoustic impedance matching.

The proper use of this manual will reduce dome maintenance, and increase dome and pressurization reli- ability. The Sonar Dome Rubber Window SDRW-1 Technical Manual presently consists of one volume, NAVSEA S9165-AE-MMA-010/SDRW-1, dated 15 January 2007. The practices and procedures promulgated in the Sonar Dome Rubber Window SDRW-1 Technical Manual shall be considered NAVSEA approved unless waived by subsequent NAVSEA action. Requests for resolution of conﬂicting guidelines should be submitted to NAVSEA Code IWS5B3C.

This manual consists of eight chapters and one appendix as follows:

Chapter 1 - General Information and Safety Precautions Chapter 2 - Operation Chapter 3 - Functional Description Chapter 4 - Scheduled Maintenance Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting Chapter 6 - Corrective Maintenance Chapter 7 - Parts List Chapter 8 - Removal and Installation Appendix A- Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator

Ships, training activities, supply points, depots, Naval Shipyards and Supervisors of Shipbuilding are requested to arrange for the maximum practical use and evaluation of NAVSEA technical manuals. All errors, omissions, discrepancies and suggestions for improvement to NAVSEA technical manuals shall be forwarded to: COMMANDER, CODE 310 TMDER, BLDG 1388 NAVSURFWARCENDIV NSDSA 4363 MISSILE WAY PORT HUENEME CA 93043-4307 on NAVSEA/SPAWAR Technical Manual Deﬁciency/Evaluation Report (TMDER), NAVSEA form 4160/1. All feedback comments shall be thoroughly investigated and originators will be advised of action resulting therefrom. One copy of NAVSEA form 4160/1 is at the end of each separately bound technical manual 8-1/2 x 11 inches

FOREWORD-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

FOREWORD - Continued or larger. Copies of NAVSEA form 4160/1 may be requisitioned from the Naval Systems Data Support Activity Code 310 at the above address. Users are encouraged to transmit deﬁciency submittals via the Naval Systems Data Support Activity web site located at

https://nsdsa2.phdnswc.navy.mil/tmder/tmder-generate.asp?lvl=1

Individual electronic TMs do not contain NAVSEA form 4160/1 but are linked to an electronic version on the resident CD-ROM. Therefore, we encourage the user to transmit deﬁciency submittals via the Naval Systems Data Support Activity web site located above.

FOREWORD-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter/Paragraph Page

1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...... 1-1

1-1 SAFETY INFORMATION...... 1-1 1-1.1 SAFETY NOTICES...... 1-1 1-1.2 SAFETY DEVICES...... 1-1 1-1.3 ELECTRICAL SAFETY...... 1-1 1-1.4 SONAR DOME ENTRY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...... 1-2 1-1.5 MEDICAL ASPECTS OF HYPERBARIC SAFETY...... 1-3

1-2 INTRODUCTION...... 1-6 1-2.1 ARRANGEMENT OF MANUAL...... 1-6

1-3 BRIEF SONAR DOME PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...... 1-7 1.3.1 CONFIGURATIONS OF SDRW...... 1-8 1.3.2 LP AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM...... 1-8 1.3.3 WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM...... 1-8 1.3.4 ELECTRICAL/ALARM SUBSYSTEM...... 1-9 1.3.5 SONAR DOME ACCESS SUBSYSTEM...... 1-9 1.3.6 COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM...... 1-9

1-5 TERMINOLOGY...... 1-12 1-5.1 REFERENCE DESIGNATORS...... 1-12 1-5.2 ABBREVIATIONS...... 1-12 1-5.3 COMMONLY USED TERMS...... 1-13

2 OPERATION ...... 2-1

2-1 INTRODUCTION...... 2-1 2-1.1 SCOPE OF DESCRIPTION...... 2-1 2-1.2 PROCEDURES...... 2-1

2-2 DESCRIPTION OF SDPS CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND ALARMS...... 2-1 2-2.1 LOCATIONS OF CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND ALARMS...... 2-1 2-2.2 DOME CONTROL STATION...... 2-2 2-2.3 SONAR CONTROL ROOM...... 2-2 2-2.4 AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY, AND AIRLOCK...... 2-2 2-2.5 SONAR ADMINISTRATION OFFICE...... 2-2 2-2.6 FORECASTLE...... 2-2

2-3 OPERATION PROCEDURES...... 2-3 2-3.1 INITIAL VALVE SETTINGS AND ALARM PANEL INDICATIONS. . . . 2-3 2-3.2 OPERATION PROCEDURE...... 2-4 2-3.3 NORMAL SDPS OPERATING PROCEDURES...... 2-4 2-3.4 ALARM STATUS...... 2-4 2-3.5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES...... 2-4 2-3.6 USE OF OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES TABLES...... 2-5

i S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

2-3.7 PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS...... 2-5

2-4 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES...... 2-46

2-5 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR APPARENT SONAR DOME RUPTURE. . . 2-53 2-5.1 INITIAL ACTIONS...... 2-53 2-5.2 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT PROCEDURE...... 2-53

2-6 OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR SHIPS WITH RUPTURED SONAR DOMES...... 2-54

2-7 OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DRYDOCK/ROH PERIODS...... 2-60 2-7.1 PRE-OVERHAUL REQUIREMENTS...... 2-60 2-7.2 DRYDOCK ENTRY AND DOCKING PROCEDURES...... 2-60 2-7.3 DRYDOCK LAY-UP REQUIREMENTS FOR SDPS...... 2-61 2-7.4 DRYDOCK LAY-UP REQUIREMENTS FOR SONAR DOME...... 2-61 2-7.5 DRYDOCK DEPARTURE AND UNDOCKING PROCEDURES...... 2-62

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...... 3-1

3-1 INTRODUCTION...... 3-1 3-1.1 PURPOSE...... 3-1 3-1.2 BRIEF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...... 3-1

3-2 RUBBER WINDOW AND ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY...... 3-2 3-2.1 FUNCTION...... 3-2 3-2.2 CONFIGURATION...... 3-2 3-2.3 WINDOW ATTACHMENT...... 3-2 3-2.4 BOW DOME STEEL STRUCTURE...... 3-2 3-2.5 BOW DOME SHELL FAIRING...... 3-2

3-3 AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM...... 3-3 3-3.1 DOME AIR ENTRY...... 3-3 3-3.2 DOME AIR EXHAUST...... 3-3 3-3.3 DOME AIR PRESSURE REGULATION...... 3-4 3-3.4 SPECIAL AIR PRESSURIZATION COMPONENTS...... 3-5

3-4 WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM...... 3-9 3-4.1 DOME WATER FILL/PRESSURIZATION...... 3-9 3-4.2 DOME WATER REMOVAL...... 3-11 3-4.3 DOME/AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY/AIRLOCK WATER SWEEP...... 3-12 3-4.4 SPECIAL WATER PRESSURIZATION COMPONENTS...... 3-12

3-5 ELECTRICAL CONTROL/ALARMS SUBSYSTEM...... 3-17 3-5.1 AUDIBLE ALARMS...... 3-18 3-5.2 VISUAL ALARMS...... 3-20 3-5.3 EDUCTOR SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT...... 3-20 ii S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

3-5.4 CONTROL/ALARMS INTERCONNECTION CABLING...... 3-20 3-5.5 SPECIAL CONTROL ALARMS COMPONENTS...... 3-20

3-6 DOME ACCESS SUBSYSTEM...... 3-25 3-6.1 AIRLOCK PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY PRESSURE...... 3-26 3-6.2 DOME PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PRESSURE...... 3-26 3-6.3 AIRLOCK PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY PRESSURE...... 3-26

3-7 COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM...... 3-27

3-8 GENERAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS...... 3-27 3-8.1 CUTOUT VALVES...... 3-27 3-8.2 CHECK VALVES...... 3-32 3-8.3 RELIEF VALVES W-V-31 AND A-V-122...... 3-34 3-8.4 REDUCER VALVES W-V-7 AND W-V-16...... 3-35 3-8.5 PRESSURE GAGES...... 3-36

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ...... 4-1

4-1 INTRODUCTION...... 4-1

4-2 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT CARDS...... 4-1

4-3 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST...... 4-1

4-4 DOME EXTERIOR INSPECTION...... 4-1 4-4.1 SDRW GRID MARKINGS...... 4-1 4-4.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES...... 4-4 4-4.3 INSPECTION ANALYSIS...... 4-4 4-4.4 SDRW REPAIR PROCEDURES...... 4-5

4-5 SYSTEM OVERHAUL REQUIREMENTS...... 4-5

4-6 DRYDOCK BLOCKING INSTRUCTIONS...... 4-5

4-7 DEPRESSURIZING A DOME IN DRYDOCK...... 4-5

4-8 PROTECTING A DOME IN DRYDOCK...... 4-5

4-9 CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR RUBBER WINDOW...... 4-6

5 TROUBLESHOOTING ...... 5-1

5-1 INTRODUCTION...... 5-1

5-2 TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX...... 5-1

iii S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

5-3 FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS...... 5-1

6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ...... 6-1

SECTION I ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS ...... 6-1

6.1 INTRODUCTION...... 6-1

6.2 LP AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES...... 6-1 6.2.1 PRESSURE REDUCER A-V-119...... 6-1 6.2.2 RELIEF VALVE A-V-122...... 6-3 6.2.3 BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE A-V-134...... 6-5 6.2.4 AIR FAILURE SWITCH E-F-175...... 6-7 6.2.5 L.P. AIR ALARM SWITCH E-F-32...... 6-8

6.3 WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES...... 6-10 6.3.1 PRESSURE REDUCER W-V-7...... 6-10 6.3.2 PRESSURE REDUCER W-V-16...... 6-11 6.3.3 RELIEF VALVE W-V-31...... 6-13 6.3.4 LOW AND HIGH WATER-PRESSURE SWITCHES W-GA-10...... 6-15 6.3.5 BARTON GAGE W-GA-10 CALIBRATION POLICY...... 6-16 6.3.6 PROCEDURES FOR ENTERABLE AND NON-ENTERABLE SONAR DOMES...... 6-17

SECTION II REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY SDPS COMPONENTS ...... 6-21

6.4 INTRODUCTION...... 6-21

6.5 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS...... 6-21 6.5.1 BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE A-V-134...... 6-21 6.5.2 AIR FILTER A-F-114...... 6-22

6.6 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS...... 6-23 6.6.1 REDUCER VALVES W-V-7 AND W-V-16...... 6-23 6.6.2 RELIEF VALVE W-V-31...... 6-24 6.6.3 FLOW SWITCH E-F-29...... 6-26

6.7 REPAIR STATEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL/ALARM SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS...... 6-27

6.8 REPAIR OF REMOTELY OPERATED VALVE ACTUATORS (RMVA’S)...... 6-27 6.8.1 RIGID ROD RMVA SYSTEMS...... 6-27 6.8.2 SEALED HELICAL CABLE RMVA SYSTEMS...... 6-27 iv S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

6.9 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR TRUNK TO AIRLOCK AND AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCHES...... 6-28 6.9.1 PRELIMINARY...... 6-28

SECTION III REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR SDPS COMPONENTS ...... 6-28

6.10 INTRODUCTION...... 6-28

6.11 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS. . . 6-29

6.12 LP AIR DEPRESSURIZATION PROCEDURES...... 6-32

6.13 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF AIR CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES. . . . 6-36

6.14 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES...... 6-37

7 PARTS LIST ...... 7-1

7-1 INTRODUCTION...... 7-1

7-2 PARTS LISTS AND REFERENCES...... 7-1

8 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 8-1

8-1 INTRODUCTION...... 8-1 8-1.1 GENERAL...... 8-1 8-1.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE SDRW AND SDPS SYSTEMS. . . 8-1

8-2 REMOVAL OF RUBBER WINDOW...... 8-1 8-2.1 REMOVAL OF SDRW FAIRING CLOSURE PLATES AND ANGLES. . . 8-1 8-2.2 PLACEMENT OF SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIXTURE...... 8-3 8-2.3 REMOVAL OF BEAD CLAMPS AND BOLTS...... 8-4 8-2.4 REMOVAL OF SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW...... 8-4 8-2.5 STRUCTURE CLEANING REQUIREMENTS...... 8-5 8-2.6 RECOMMENDED SDRW REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITHOUT A SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIXTURE...... 8-5

8-3 CUTTING SDRW SAMPLES...... 8-7 8-3.1 PARTS REQUIRED...... 8-7 8-3.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...... 8-8 8-3.3 EMERGENCY AND FIRST-AID PROCEDURES...... 8-8 8-3.4 CUTTING PROCEDURES...... 8-9

8-4 SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW DISPOSAL...... 8-9

8-5 MEASUREMENT BEAD SEAT OFFSETS: METHOD 1...... 8-11 8-5.1 BEAD SEAT HARDWARE MEASUREMENT...... 8-11

v S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

8-5.2 SHELTER & ENVIRONMENT...... 8-11 8.5.3 MEASURING THE STATIONS, CHORDS, AND ANGLES...... 8-12 8-5.4 PERIMETER CHECK...... 8-13 8-5.5 OFFSET MEASUREMENT TOLERANCES...... 8-14 8-5.6 REPORTING/RECORDING THE DATA...... 8-17 8-5.7 TARGET INSTALLATION...... 8-18 8-5.8 SHOOTING THE STATION TARGETS...... 8-18 8-5.9 CHECKING THE HARDWARE WITH THE STATION TARGET...... 8-18 8-5.10 CHECKING CHORDS...... 8-20

8-6 BEAD SEAT OFFSET MEASUREMENTS: METHOD 2...... 8-21 8-6.1 INSTALLATION MATERIALS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS...... 8-22 8-6.2 GENERAL...... 8-24 8-6.3 PRELIMINARY SETUP...... 8-24 8-6.4 REFERENCE PLANE TEMPLATE BRACKETS...... 8-29 8-6.5 TEMPLATE INSTALLATION...... 8-29 8-6.6 INSTALL BEAD SEAT CASTINGS...... 8-29 8-6.7 OBTAIN AND RECORD BEAD SEAT CASTING OFFSET DATA. .... 8-29

8-7 BEAD SEAT CASTING INSTALLATION...... 8-30 8-7.1 SCOPE...... 8-30 8-7.2 GENERAL...... 8-30 8-7.3 BEAD SEAT INSTALLATION: METHOD 1...... 8-31 8-7.4 BEAD SEAT CASTING INSTALLATION: METHOD 2...... 8-35 8-7.5 WELDING OF BEAD SEAT CASTINGS...... 8-40

8-8 SONAR DOME INSTALLATION...... 8-41 8-8.1 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT...... 8-41 8-8.2 IMPORTANCE OF PROPER INSTALLATION...... 8-44 8-8.3 INSTALLATION WITH A SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIXTURE (BFG 7S1020)...... 8-44 8-8.4 RIGGING OF THE S/I FIXTURE...... 8-46 8-8.5 MOVING THE FIXTURE INTO POSITION...... 8-47 8-8.6 INSTALLING THE BEAD AT UPPER CENTERLINE...... 8-49 8-8.7 INSTALLING THE LOWER BEAD AT CENTERLINE...... 8-51 8-8.8 INSTALLING THE BEAD IN THE TAIL SECTIONS...... 8-52 8-8.9 REMOVING AND TRANSPORTING THE S/I FIXTURE...... 8-52 8-8.10 INSTALLING AND TORQUING THE BEAD CLAMP BOLTS...... 8-57 8-8.11 LEAKS DURING THE SOAP & AIR TEST...... 8-59 8-8.12 LEAKS OR RUBBER REPAIRS AT THE SDRW BEAD COUPLINGS. . . 8-60 8-8.13 EXTERNAL SURFACE WAVINESS TEST...... 8-64 8-8.14 SDRW HYDROTEST...... 8-64

8-9 FAIRING ANGLE AND CLOSURE PLATE INSTALLATION...... 8-65 8-9.1 PREPARATION...... 8-65 8-9.2 INSTALL FAIRING ANGLE SECTIONS...... 8-65 8-9.3 INSTALLATION OF FAIRING ANGLE SUPPORT TABS...... 8-70 vi S9165-AE-MMA-010

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Chapter/Paragraph Page

8-9.4 INSTALLATION OF CLOSURE PLATE SUPPORT...... 8-71 8-9.5 INSTALLATION OF FAIRING CLOSURE PLATES...... 8-72

8-10 SDRW RUBBER FAIRING FINAL FINISH...... 8-75 8-10.1 SURFACE FAIRING...... 8-75 8-10.2 WORK AREA PREPARATION...... 8-76 8-10.3 RUBBER APPLICATION...... 8-78 8-10.4 EXTERNAL DOME FAIRNESS INSPECTION...... 8-81 8-10.5 FOAMING FAIRING CLOSURE PLATE VOID...... 8-90

8-11 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED SDRW IN DRYDOCK...... 8-91 8-11.1 PROTECTION FROM OVERSTRESSING...... 8-91 8-11.2 PROTECTION FROM SUNLIGHT AND HEAT...... 8-92

8-12 DEPRESSURIZATION AND SUPPORT OF COMPLETED WINDOW...... 8-92 8-12.1 DEPRESSURIZING WINDOW...... 8-92 8-12.2 SUPPORT FOR DEPRESSURIZED WINDOW...... 8-92

8-13 DOCKING AND UNDOCKING...... 8-94 8-13.1 DRYDOCK FACILITIES...... 8-94 8-13.2 DRYDOCKING/UNDOCKING PROCEDURES...... 8-94 8-13.3 DRYDOCKING...... 8-95 8-13.4 UNDOCKING...... 8-96

A DIGITAL ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATOR ...... A-1

vii S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF TABLES

Table Title Page

1-1. Supporting Technical Publications ...... 1-10

1-2. Functional Characteristics of the SDPS ...... 1-10

1-3. Operational Tolerance Values ...... 1-11

1-4. Stenciling Guidance ...... 1-11

2-1. SDPS Valve Positions For Unpressurized Sonar Dome In Unﬂooded Drydock. . . . 2-6

2-2. SDPS Valve Positions For Air Pressurized Sonar Dome; Prior to Air Circulating Through Sonar Dome ...... 2-7

2-3. SDPS Valve Positions For Water Filled/Pressurized Sonar Dome ...... 2-8

2-4. Air Pressurization Procedure, Unﬂooded Drydock ...... 2-10

2-5. Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure ...... 2-12

2-6. Make Ready for Sea Procedure ...... 2-15

2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure ...... 2-17

2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure ...... 2-23

2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure ...... 2-38

2-10. Electrical/Alarm Panel Indications for a Given Condition ...... 2-45

2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and Pressurized . . . 2-46

2-12. Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry ...... 2-50

5-1. Troubleshooting Index ...... 5-1

6-1. Barton Gage W-GA-10 Diagnostic Index ...... 6-17

6-2. SDPS Component Replacement Index ...... 6-29

7-1. List of Major Components ...... 7-2

7-2. Parts List ...... 7-2

7-3. List of Common Items ...... 7-14

7-4. List of Manufacturers ...... 7-15

7-5. Shipping/Installation Fixture Parts List for SDRW-1 ...... 7-17

8-1. Offsets for SDRW-1 and -1A Bead Seats ...... 8-14

8-2. Symmetric-to-Loft SDRW-1 and Spliceless SDRW-1A Port Offsets ...... 8-15 viii S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF TABLES - Continued

Table Title Page

8-3. Symmetric-to-Loft SDRW-1 and Spliceless SDRW-1A Stbd. Offsets ...... 8-16

8-4. SDRW Summary List, Installation Material ...... 8-22

8-5. Tools/Equipment Requirement List ...... 8-23

8-6. Installation of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets ...... 8-39

8-7. Data List - SDRW-1 ...... 8-42

8-8. Drawing List - SDRW-1 and SDRW-1A ...... 8-43

8-9. Tools/Equipment Requirements List ...... 8-43

8-10. Facility Requirements List ...... 8-44

8-11. S/I Fixture Inventory ...... 8-53

8-12. Degree Tile Material Requirements ...... 8-81

8-13. External Dome Fairness Inspection ...... 8-82

8-14. Resin Mixture Table ...... 8-90

ix S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

1-1. Transducer Compartment Structural Arrangement ...... 1-8

1-2. Functional Relationship of SDPS Subsystems ...... 1-9

2-1. Sonar Dome Entry Checkoff List (Sheet 1) ...... 2-33

2-1. Sonar Dome Entry Checkoff List (Sheet 2) ...... 2-34

2-2. Sonar Dome Interior Inspection Items Checklist (Sheet 1) ...... 2-35

2-2. Sonar Dome Interior Inspection Items Checklist (Sheet 2) ...... 2-36

2-3. Sonar Dome Entry (Dive) Report ...... 2-37

2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 1) . . . 2-55

2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 2) . . . 2-56

2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 3) . . . 2-57

2-5. Operational Guidelines for DDG 51 Class Ships With Ruptured Sonar Dome Rubber Window (Page 1 of 2) ...... 2-58

2-5. Operational Guidelines for DDG 51 Class Ships With Ruptured Sonar Dome Rubber Window (Page 2 of 2) ...... 2-59

3-1. Typical Backpressure Regulating Valve (A-V-134) 1-1/2″ IPS, Type 50M ...... 3-5

3-2. 3/8″ CRL5M Pressure Relief Valve Assembly Control Pilot Valve (A-V-134) .... 3-6

3-3. 1-1/2″ IPS, 100 M-1 Hytrol Assembly (A-V-134) ...... 3-7

3-4. Air Filter A-F-114 ...... 3-8

3-5. Low-Pressure Valve A-V-119 ...... 3-9

3-6. Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) W-GA-10 ...... 3-13

3-7. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10 ...... 3-14

3-8. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10 Pressure Switches ...... 3-15

3-9. Eductor Solenoid Valve E-V-21 ...... 3-16

3-10. Eductor W-F-13 ...... 3-17

3-11. Simpliﬁed Schematic of SDRW Eductor Solenoid Valve Control Circuit ...... 3-18

3-12. Dome Status Panel E-PN-45 Audible Alarm ...... 3-19

3-13. Water Flow Switch E-F-29 ...... 3-21

3-14. Water-Level Switches E-F-42 and E-F-14 ...... 3-22 x S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

3-15. Air Pressure Switches E-F-32 and E-F-175 ...... 3-23

3-16. Air Flow Meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 3810A14A1RAA1A1 ...... 3-24

3-17. Air Flow Meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 1320-03B1C ...... 3-24

3-18. Solid-State Alarm Panel Switches ...... 3-25

3-19. SDRW Dome Access Subsystem ...... 3-26

3-20. Gate Valve (Non-Rising Stem-type) ...... 3-28

3-21. Gate Valve (Rising Stem-type) ...... 3-28

3-22. Quick-Acting Gate Valve W-V-48 ...... 3-29

3-23. Angle Globe Valve ...... 3-29

3-24. Angle Hose Valve W-V-6 ...... 3-30

3-25. Needle Valve A-V-144 ...... 3-31

3-26. Gage Valve With Test Point ...... 3-32

3-27. Swing Check Valve ...... 3-32

3-28. Ball Float Check Valves A-V-126 and A-V-130 ...... 3-33

3-29. Ball Float Liquid Drain Valve A-V-115 ...... 3-34

3-30. Relief Valves W-V-31 and A-V-122 ...... 3-35

3-31. Reducer Valves W-V-7 and W-V-16 ...... 3-36

3-32. Simplex Bourdon Tube Gage ...... 3-37

3-33. Compound Bourdon Tube Gage W-GA-40 ...... 3-37

3-34. Differential Bourdon Tube Gage A-GA-139 ...... 3-38

3-35. Differential Pressure Gage A-GA-117 ...... 3-39

4-1. Starboard Proﬁle Looking Inboard ...... 4-2

4-2. Bow On View Looking Aft ...... 4-3

6-1. Pressure Reducer Valve A-V-119 ...... 6-2

6-2. Backpressure Regulating Valve (A-V-134) 1-1/2” IPS ...... 6-6

6-3. L P Air Switches E-F-32 and E-F-175 ...... 6-8

xi S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

6-4. Pressure Reducer W-V-7 ...... 6-10

6-5. Relief Valve W-V-31 ...... 6-13

6-6. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10 (Barton) ...... 6-15

7-1. SDRW Family Tree ...... 7-1

8-1. Removing the Fairing Plates ...... 8-2

8-2. Bolt Head Critical Areas ...... 8-2

8-3. Lock Wire Removal ...... 8-3

8-4. Removal of Sonar Dome Rubber Window ...... 8-5

8-5. SDRW Removal Without a Shipping/Installation Fixture ...... 8-7

8-6. Sample Form DD 1348-1 ...... 8-10

8-7. Measurement of the Bead Seat Hardware for SDRW-1 ...... 8-11

8-8. Dome Module Shelter ...... 8-12

8-9. Bead Seat Centerline Target Disk ...... 8-13

8-10. Bead Lip Perimeter Measurement ...... 8-14

8-11. 24 Station Map ...... 8-17

8-12. Station Targets ...... 8-19

8-13. Cord Calipers ...... 8-21

8-14. Reference Plane Template (Starboard Shown) ...... 8-23

8-15. Theodolite Platform Location ...... 8-25

8-16. Establishing Baseline Flat Reference Plane ...... 8-26

8-17. Instrument Stand ...... 8-28

8-18. Template Brackets ...... 8-30

8-19. SDRW-1 & -1A Hardware Map ...... 8-32

8-20. Bead Seat Fitting Tool ...... 8-33

8-21. Fitting Tool Installation ...... 8-35

8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 1 of 3) ...... 8-36 xii S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 2 of 3) ...... 8-37

8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 3 of 3) ...... 8-38

8-23. Rubber Window Shown in Shipping Fixture ...... 8-42

8-24. Installation with a Shipping/Installation Fixture (BFG 7S1020) ...... 8-45

8-25. SDRW Fixture Opened to 17’6″ ...... 8-46

8-26. Rigging the S/I Fixture ...... 8-47

8-27. Moving the Fixture into Position ...... 8-48

8-28. Clamping Sequence ...... 8-50

8-29. Incorrect Method of Applying Force ...... 8-51

8-30. Correct Method of Applying Force ...... 8-51

8-31. Removing Shipping Fixture from a Ship ...... 8-55

8-32. Removing Shipping Fixture from a Ship ...... 8-56

8-33. Load Instructions for Returning S/I Fixture Halves ...... 8-57

8-34. Torque Pattern ...... 8-59

8-35. Leaks During the Soap & Air Test ...... 8-60

8-36. Stopping Leak Around Bead ...... 8-60

8-37. Coupling Area ...... 8-62

8-38. Jacking the Bead out of the Bead Seat ...... 8-63

8-39. Fairing Angle Assembly ...... 8-66

8-40. SDRW-1 & -1A Fairing Angle Map ...... 8-67

8-41. Positioning the Fairing Angle ...... 8-68

8-42. Installing Shim Strip at each Butt Joint ...... 8-69

8-43. Fairing Angle Support Tabs ...... 8-71

8-44. Tee Bar Closure Plate Supports ...... 8-72

8-45. Installation of Fairing Closure Plates ...... 8-73

8-46. Closure Plate Foam Fill and Vent Holes ...... 8-74

xiii S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

8-47. Closure Plate Support ...... 8-75

8-48. Rubber Fairing Shelter ...... 8-77

8-49. Staging and Lighting ...... 8-78

8-50. Rubber Repair and Fairing Map ...... 8-80

8-51. Degree Tile Location ...... 8-81

8-52. Batten Hollow Test ...... 8-83

8-53. SDRW Dome Inspection Grid ...... 8-84

8-54. Form C-1. SDRW Dome Inspection Form ...... 8-85

8-55. Form C-2. SDRW Dome Inspection Form ...... 8-86

8-56. Form C-3. SDRW Dome Inspection Form ...... 8-87

8-57. Form C-4. SDRW Dome Inspection Form ...... 8-88

8-58. Form C-5. Example of Filled-out SDRW Dome Inspection Form ...... 8-89

8-59. Support Cradles for Depressurized Window ...... 8-93

8-60. Drydock Facilities ...... 8-95

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 1 of 13) ...... 8-97

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 2 of 13) ...... 8-99

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 3 of 13) ...... 8-101

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 4 of 13) ...... 8-103

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 5 of 13) ...... 8-105

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 6 of 13) ...... 8-107

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 7 of 13) ...... 8-109

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 8 of 13) ...... 8-111

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 9 of 13) ...... 8-113

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 10 of 13) ...... 8-115

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 11 of 13) ...... 8-117

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 12 of 13) ...... 8-119

xiv S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 13 of 13) ...... 8-121

FO-1. Ship Locations of System Controls ...... 8-123

FO-2. Dome Control Station Air Valve Board ...... 8-125

FO-3. Dome Control Station Water Valve Board ...... 8-127

FO-4. Dome Control Station Gage Panel ...... 8-129

FO-5. Dome Control Panel E-PN-44 ...... 8-131

FO-6. Dome Status Panel E-PN-45 ...... 8-133

FO-7. Airlock Passageway/Airlock Components ...... 8-135

FO-8. SDRW Water/Air Pressurization and Dome Access Subsystems ...... 8-137

FO-9. SDRW Rubber Window and Attachment Hardware ...... 8-139

FO-10. SDRW Sonar Bow Dome Structure ...... 8-141

FO-11. SDRW Air Pressurization Subsystem ...... 8-143

FO-12. SDRW Dome Water Fill/Pressurization ...... 8-145

FO-13. SDRW Dome Water Sweep ...... 8-147

FO-14. SDRW Audible Alarms Simpliﬁed Schematic ...... 8-149

FO-15. SDRW Visual Alarms Simpliﬁed Schematic ...... 8-151

FO-16. SDRW Electrical Control/Alarm Subsystem Cable Interconnection Diagram ..... 8-153

FO-17. SDRW Sound-Powered Phone X25J Simpliﬁed Schematic ...... 8-155

FO-18. SDRW E-Call Bell System Simpliﬁed Schematic ...... 8-157

FO-19. SDRW Audible Alarms Functional Schematic ...... 8-159

FO-20. SDRW Visual Alarms Functional Schematic ...... 8-161

FO-21. SDRW Eductor Solenoid Valve Control Functional Schematic ...... 8-163

FO-22. SDRW Sonar Dome Portable Communications Panel E-PN-179 ...... 8-165

FO-23. SDRW Connection Panel E-PN-50 (Terminal Box) Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) . 8-167

FO-23. SDRW ConnecTion Panel E-PN-50 (Terminal Box) Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) . 8-169

FO-24. SDRW Dome Control Panel, E-PN-44, Wiring Diagram ...... 8-171

xv S9165-AE-MMA-010

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued

Figure Title Page

FO-25. SDRW Dome Status Panel, E-PN-45. Wiring Diagram ...... 8-173

FO-26. Dome Water Pressure Below Limit Fault Logic Diagram ...... 8-175

FO-27. Dome Air Pressure/Flow Below Limit Fault Logic Diagram ...... 8-177

FO-28. Dome Water Pressure Excessive Fault Logic Diagram ...... 8-179

FO-29. Pressure Reducers W-V-7 & W-V-16 ...... 8-181

FO-30. Relief Valve W-V-31 ...... 8-183

FO-31. Relief Valve A-V-122 ...... 8-185

FO-32. Pressure Reducer A-V-119 ...... 8-187

FO-33. 3/8″ CRL5M Pressure Relief Control With Union Ends (A-V-134) ...... 8-189

xvi S9165-AE-MMA-010

SAFETY SUMMARY

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES

The following general safety notices supplement the speciﬁc warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this manual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment covered herein. Should situations arise that are not covered in the general or spe- ciﬁc safety precautions, the commanding officer or other authority will issue orders as deemed necessary to cover the situation. No work shall be undertaken on energized equipment or circuits until approval of the commanding officer is obtained, and then only in accordance with Naval Ships’ Technical Manual (NSTM) S9086-KC-STM- 010/Chapter 300.

DO NOT REPAIR OR ADJUST ALONE

Under no circumstances shall repair or adjustment of energized equipment be attempted alone. The immediate presence of someone capable of rendering ﬁrst aid is required. Before making adjustments, be sure to protect against grounding. If possible, adjustments should be made with one hand, with the other hand free and clear of equipment. Even when power has been removed from equipment circuits, dangerous potentials may still exist due to retention of charges by capacitors. Circuits must be grounded and all capacitors discharged prior to attempting repairs. Equipment should be deenergized and properly tagged out according to the ship’s Standard Operating Procedures.

TEST EQUIPMENT

Make certain test equipment is in good condition. If a metal-cased test meter must be held, ground the case of the meter before starting measurement. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment while holding a test meter. Do not ground any measuring devices; these devices should not be held when taking measurements.

INTERLOCKS

Interlocks are provided for safety of personnel and equipment and should be used only for the purpose intended. They should not be battle shorted or otherwise modiﬁed except by authorized maintenance personnel. Do not depend solely upon interlocks for protection. Whenever possible, disconnect power at the power distribution source.

MOVING EQUIPMENT

Personnel shall remain clear of moving equipment. If equipment requires adjustment while in motion, a safety watch shall be posted. The safety watch shall be qualiﬁed to administer CPR, have a full view of the operations being performed, and have immediate access to controls capable of stopping equipment motion.

FIRST AID

An injury, no matter how slight, shall never go unattended. Always obtain ﬁrst aid or medical attention immediately, and ﬁle an injury report in accordance with OPNAVINST 5102.1 series, subj: Mishap Investigation and Reporting.

xvii S9165-AE-MMA-010

SAFETY SUMMARY - Continued

RESUSCITATION

Personnel working with or near high voltage shall be familiar with approved methods of resuscitation. Should someone be injured and stop breathing, begin resuscitation immediately. A delay could cost the victim’s life. Resuscitation procedures shall be posted in all electrically hazardous areas.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

The following general precautions are to be observed at all times.

1. Install and ground all electrical components associated with this system/ equipment in accordance with applicable Navy regulations and approved shipboard practices. 2. Ensure that all maintenance operations comply with Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Program Manual for Forces Aﬂoat, OPNAVINST 5100.19 series. 3. Observe precautions set forth in NSTM S9086-KC-STM-010/Chapter 300 with respect to electrical equipment and circuits. 4. Ensure that protective guards and shutdown devices are properly installed and maintained around rotating parts of machinery and high voltage sources. 5. Do not wear loose clothing while working around rotating parts of machinery. 6. Ensure that special precautionary measures are employed to prevent applying power to the system/ equipment any time maintenance work is in progress. 7. Do not make any unauthorized alterations to equipment or components. 8. Before working on electrical system/equipment, use the correct tag out procedure and check with voltmeter to ensure that system is not energized. 9. Consider all circuits not known to be ″dead,″″live″ and dangerous at all times. 10. When working near electricity, do not use metal rules, ﬂashlights, metallic pencils, or any other objects having exposed conducting material. 11. Deenergize all equipment before connecting or disconnecting meters or test leads. 12. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use range higher than expected voltage. 13. Before operating equipment or performing any tests or measurements, ensure area is dry of water or other liquid conductive material and that frames of all motors and starter panels are securely grounded. 14. Ensure that area is well-ventilated when using cleaning compound or solvent. Avoid prolonged breathing of fumes and compound or solvent contact with skin or eyes.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Speciﬁc warnings and cautions applying to the system/equipment covered by this manual are summarized below. These warnings and cautions appear elsewhere in the manual following paragraph headings and immediately preceding the text to which they apply. They are repeated here for emphasis. xviii S9165-AE-MMA-010

SAFETY SUMMARY - Continued

WARNING

DO NOT USE 115-VOLT POWER UNLESS THE SONAR DOME IS COM- PLETELY DRY. (Page 1-2)

WARNING

PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM OPERATOR WATCHSTATION MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES WHEN PERSONNEL ARE IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME. (Page 1-3)

WARNING

OPERATORS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL NOR- MAL AND EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES TO ENSURE SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE OF THE SDRW SYSTEM. (Page 2-1)

WARNING

ENSURE THAT ALL NONESSENTIAL USE OF LP AIR IS SECURED WHEN PRESSURIZING THE DOME WITH LPAIR. (Page 2-10, page 2-10)

WARNING

IN ACCORDANCE WITH COMNAVSEASYSCOM MESSAGES P192003Z APRIL 1984, AND P030205Z AUGUST 1984, TO PREVENT THE REMOTE POSSIBILITY OF A SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW COLLAPSE DURING DOME ENTRY, THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE TO BE TAKEN PRIOR TO DOME ENTRY WHILE SHIPS ARE WATERBORNE:

DIVERS WILL CONDUCT AN UNDERWATER INSPECTION OF THE SDRW EXTERIOR WHILE THE DOME IS PRESSURIZED WITH WATER TO 39.5 (+ 2, -0) PSIG. CHECK FOR UNUSUAL CHANGES IN THE SDRW CONTOUR INCLUDING BULGES, DEPRESSIONS, AND VERTICAL CRACKS IN THE SPLICE REGION.

xix S9165-AE-MMA-010

IF THE FOREGOING UNDERWATER INSPECTION IS SATISFAC- TORY, PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM WATER-TO-AIR INTER- CHANGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL OR TEST PROCEDURES. PRESSURIZE SONAR DOME TO 22 PSIG WITH AIR, THEN DIVERS REINSPECT THE DOME EXTE- RIOR AND REPORT DEPRESSIONS, BULGES, AIR BUBBLES, OR VERTICAL CRACKS.

IF UNDERWATER INSPECTIONS ABOVE SHOW NO DISCREPAN- CIES, PERSONNEL ARE AUTHORIZED TO PROCEED WITH THE DOME ENTRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE MRC’S OR TEST PROCEDURES.

IF EITHER UNDERWATER INSPECTION ABOVE IDENTIFIES ANY DISCREPANCIES, THE DOME ENTRY SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED. NOTIFY NAVSEA IMMEDIATELY. UNDERWATER SDRW INSPECTION FOR DOME ENTRY SHALL COVER, AS A MINI- MUM, TWELVE FEET EACH SIDE OF THE SDRW CENTERLINE FROM UPPER TO LOWER STEEL AND RUBBER INTERFACE.

WATERBORNE DOME ENTRY IN SHIPS WITH KNOWN SPLICE DAMAGE FOR PURPOSES OTHER THAN PIERSIDE RADIOGRAPHY SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED WITHOUT NAVSEA CONCURRENCE AND A NAVSEA TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE PRESENT.

ALL APPLICABLE MANDATORY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN ANY TYPE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED ON A PRESSURIZED SYSTEM. THE SUPERVISOR SHALL MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL ASSIGNED TO WORK AT CONTROL VALVES, GAGES AND SOUND POWER PHONES ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND THE APPROPRIATE MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN VARIOUS TYPES OF EMERGENCIES.

USE BYPASS VALVES WITH CARE AND DISCRETION. (Page 2-17)

WARNING

W-V-49 MUST BE MANNED DURING TEST OF E-F-32. SHUT VALVE W-V-49 IF DOME PRESSURE AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10 DROPS BELOW 11 PSIG. (Page 2-19, page 2-40)

WARNING

ENSURE AIR BEING SUPPLIED TO SONAR DOME IS NOT CONTAMI- NATED BY OUTSIDE INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITIES, SHIPBOARD PAINT- ING, OR ACCIDENTAL RELEASE OR SPILL OF SOLVENTS, ETC. (Page 2-22) xx S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

ENSURE AIRLOCK (5-28-0-T) COMPARTMENT MUST BE CERTIFIED AS GAS FREE BEFORE ENTERING THIS SPACE. (Page 2-22)

WARNING

ENSURE THAT ALL NON-ESSENTIAL USE OF LP AIR IS SECURED WHILE MEN ARE WORKING IN THE SONAR DOME. AIRLOCK MUST BE GAS FREE BEFORE ENTERING, AND ADEQUATE VENTI- LATION MUST BE PROVIDED WHILE MEN ARE WORKING INSIDE. ENSURE AIR HAS BEEN CIRCULATING IN DOME AT LEAST 4 HOURS PRIOR TO DOME ENTRY. OPERATOR MUST BE PRESENT DURING INTERCHANGE. (Page 2-23)

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEP WILL INITIATE PRES- SURIZATION OF THE AIRLOCK. TO MINIMIZE RISK OF PERSON- NEL INJURY, RATE OF PRESSURE INCREASE SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 PSIG PER MINUTE DURING THE PRESSURIZATION PROCESS. IF ANY DISCOMFORT IS EXPERIENCED AS A RESULT OF THE RATE OF PRESSURIZATION, THROTTLE VALVE A-V-138 AS NECESSARY TO ESTABLISH A RATE OF PRESSURIZATION AT WHICH PERSON- NEL CAN COMFORTABLY EQUALIZE PRESSURE IN INTERNAL BODY CAVITIES. (Page 2-26)

WARNING

ENSURE SWITCH E-F-182 IS OFF. (Page 2-27)

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF FOLLOWING STEP WILL INITIATE DEPRES- SURIZATION OF AIRLOCK. TO MINIMIZE RISK OF PERSONNEL INJURY, RATE OF PRESSURE DECREASE SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 PSIG PER MINUTE DURING THE DEPRESSURIZATION PROCE- DURE. IF ANY DISCOMFORT IS EXPERIENCED AS RESULT OF THE RATE OF DEPRESSURIZATION, THROTTLE VALVE A-V-157 AS NEC-

xxi S9165-AE-MMA-010

ESSARY TO ESTABLISH A RATE OF DEPRESSURIZATION AT WHICH PERSONNEL CAN COMFORTABLY EQUALIZE PRESSURE IN INTER- NAL BODY CAVITIES. WHILE PRESSURE IS DECREASING, PERSON- NEL IN AIRLOCK SHALL BE WARNED TO BREATH NORMALLY. DO NOT HOLD BREATH WHILE PRESSURE IS DECREASING. (Page 2-31)

WARNING

LP AIR PIPING IS CHARGED WITH PRESSURIZED AIR DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAU- TIONS. (Page 6-1)

WARNING

ENSURE SONAR DOME REMAINS PRESSURIZED AT REQUIRED LEVELS AT ALL TIMES DURING THE PERFORMANCE OF THESE PROCEDURES. ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN CORRECT SONAR DOME PRESSURE SHALL HAVE PRI- ORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE. (Page 6-10)

WARNING

REPAIR OF THE FOLLOWING LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS REQUIRES COMPLETE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE LP AIR SUB- SYSTEM PRIOR TO REMOVAL OR DISASSEMBLY OF AIR CONTROL DEVICE. (Page 6-21)

WARNING

ENSURE AIR FILTER A-F-114 IS COMPLETELY DEPRESSURIZED PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY. VERIFY GAGES A-GA-109, A-GA-106, AND A-GA-117 INDICATE ″0″ PSIG BEFORE PROCEEDING. (Page 6-22)

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES ISOLATION OF THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. THE SONAR DOME SHALL BE WATER FILLED AND PRES- xxii S9165-AE-MMA-010

SURIZED AT 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. INITIAL SDPS VALVE ALIGNMENT SHALL BE IAW TABLE 2-3 OF THIS TECHNI- CAL MANUAL. THE SONAR DOME PRESSURE SHALL BE MAIN- TAINED ABOVE 25.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. ADDITIONALLY, LP AIR SHALL BE AVAILABLE AS AN ALTERNATE MEANS OF APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE SONAR DOME AT ALL TIMES DUR- ING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. (Page 6-23, page 6-25, page 6-26)

WARNING

ENSURE SPRING TENSION IS RELEASED PRIOR TO VALVE DISAS- SEMBLY. FAILURE TO RELEASE SPRING TENSION MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. (Page 6-24, page 6-25)

WARNING

THE USE OF ANY FLAME PRODUCING MATERIAL WITHIN THE PRESSURIZED ENVIRONMENT OF THE SONAR DOME OR AIR- LOCK IS PROHIBITED. (Page 6-28)

WARNING

MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL SHALL READ AND UNDERSTAND ENTIRE PROCEDURE PRIOR TO INITIATING COMPONENT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. ALL WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS SHALL BE OBSERVED AND FOLLOWED. (Page 6-29)

WARNING

WARNING IF E-F-32 IS TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUG P8 FROM TERMINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J8) PRIOR TO REMOVAL. (Page 6-33)

WARNING

PRESSURIZED WATER OR AIR IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (Page 6-33)

xxiii S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

WATER PRESSURIZED AT 150 PSIG IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (Page 6-34, page 6-36)

WARNING

IF E-F-14 AND/OR E-F-42 ARE TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUGS P9 AND P10 FROM TERMINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J9 AND J10) PRIOR TO REMOVAL. (Page 6-34)

WARNING

IF E-F-29 IS TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUG P11 FROM TER- MINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J11) PRIOR TO REMOVAL. (Page 6-35)

WARNING

115 VAC, 60 HZ ELECTRICAL POWER IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (Page 6-37)

WARNING

WHEN ARC-GOUGING, AN EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF SMOKE AND GASES WILL DEVELOP FROM THE VOID FILL FOAM. ALL CRAFT WORKERS SHOULD USE APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE MASKS. (Page 8-1)

WARNING

DUE TO SMALL PIECES OF WIRE BEING THROWN OFF DURING CUTTING, AND THE NEED TO AVOID CONTACT WITH NOFOUL, PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES. (Page 8-8) xxiv S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE IN AN ISOLATED AREA ONLY. THOR- OUGH CLEANUP OF NOFOUL DUST IS REQUIRED. (Page 8-9)

WARNING

TO PRECLUDE INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE SDRW, THE APPLICATION OF INTERNAL PRESSURE TO THE SDRW WITHOUT ALL BEAD CLAMPS IN PLACE IS PROHIBITED. (Page 8-58)

WARNING

M.E.K. PEROXIDE CATALYST IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE AND POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE. DO NOT STORE MORE THAN 100 LBS. IN ONE LOCATION. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME, SPARKS, AND WELDING. KEEP OUT OF DIRECT SUNLIGHT. (Page 8-90)

CAUTION

SDPS OPERATORS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES TO ENSURE SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE OF THE SDPS. (Page 2-3)

CAUTION

WHEN IN DRYDOCK, DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED WITH AIR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE WINDOW.

WHEN DOCKSIDE, MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME TEST PRESSURE SHALL BE 11 PSIG. DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED AT ALL TIMES WHEN SHIP IS AFLOAT.

UNDERWAY AT SHIP’S SPEED GREATER THAN 5 KNOTS, OR A SEA STATE GREATER THAN 2, MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME PRES- SURE SHALL BE 25 PSIG.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME TEST HYDROPRESSURE SHALL BE 52 PSIG DURING INITIAL INSTALLATION. SUBSEQUENT DRYDOCK TEST PRESSURE SHALL NOT EXCEED 43 PSIG. (REFER TO CHAP- TER 8.)

xxv S9165-AE-MMA-010

FOR SEAWATER PRESSURIZATION, VALVES W-V-1 AND W-V-5 MUST BE OPEN, AND W-V-6 AND W-V-61 MUST BE CLOSED.

FOR FRESHWATER PRESSURIZATION, W-V-1 AND W-V-5 MUST BE CLOSED, AND W-V-6 AND W-V-61 OPEN.

PRESSURE SHALL BE MONITORED AT ALL TIMES WHEN THE SHIP IS WATERBORNE AND THE DOME IS PRESSURIZED WITH AIR. (Page 2-3)

CAUTION

SDPS OPERATORS SHALL READ ENTIRE PROCEDURE BEFORE BEGINNING THE OPERATION. SDPS OPERATORS SHALL BECOME AWARE IN ADVANCE OF EXPECTED INSTRUMENT AND ALARM INDICATIONS AND THEIR MEANINGS. SDPS OPERATORS SHALL BE AWARE OF ALTERNATE ACTIONS THAT MAY BE REQUIRED IN RESPONSE TO INDICATIONS.

SDPS OPERATORS SHALL DOUBLE CHECK COMPONENT LABEL PLATE DESIGNATOR BEFORE OPERATING COMPONENT. SDPS OPERATORS SHALL OBSERVE CORRECT GAGE OR COMPONENT INDICATIONS BEFORE CHANGING THE POSITION OF ANY SDPS VALVE HANDWHEEL OR COMPONENT.

NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE IS 39.5 PSIG.

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO NUT PLATE AND ASSOCIATED SONAR DOME MOUNTING HARDWARE, SONAR DOME PRESSURE MUST NOT BE ALLOWED TO DROP BELOW 11.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 WHEN SHIP IS WATERBORNE.

WATER BYPASS VALVES W-V-3 AND W-V-17 AND AIR BYPASS VALVES A-V-107, A-V-131 AND A-V-147 ARE LOCKED CLOSED DUR- ING ALL PHASES OF SDPS OPERATION. ADDITIONALLY EDUCTOR VALVES W-V-22 AND W-V-49 ARE LOCKED CLOSED AND DC-V-95, DC-V-96, DC-101 AND DC-V102 ARE LOCKED OPENED. THESE VALVES ARE USED ONLY WHEN PROCEDURES DICTATE OR WHEN AUTOMATIC CONTROLS WITHIN THE SDPS MALFUNCTION. IMPROPER USE OF BYPASS VALVES COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE SONAR DOME. (Page 2-5)

CAUTION

DOUBLE CHECK VALVE LABEL PLATE DESIGNATION AGAINST NEXT PROCEDURAL STEP BEFORE MOVING HANDWHEEL TO xxvi S9165-AE-MMA-010

ENSURE CORRECT VALVE OPERATION. OBSERVE CORRECT GAGE OR INDICATOR FOR REQUIRED INDICATION BEFORE MOVING VALVE HANDWHEEL. (Page 2-10)

CAUTION

SONAR DOME SUPPORT SLINGS, IF INSTALLED, MUST BE SLACKED OFF PRIOR TO PRESSURIZING SONAR DOME. DAMAGE TO SONAR DOME WILL RESULT IF SUPPORT SLINGS ARE NOT SLACKED OFF. (Page 2-11)

CAUTION

DOME CONTROL STATION TO BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES. (Page 2-12, page 2-17, page 2-38)

CAUTION

THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES ARE NECESSARY TO ENSURE AUTOMATIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF DOME PRES- SURE WITH FIREMAIN AFTER FRESHWATER FILL. (Page 2-15)

CAUTION

IF AT SEA, SHIP’S SPEED MUST BE LESS THAN FIVE KNOTS AND SEA STATE 2 OR LESS. (Page 2-18, page 2-39)

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRESSURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10. (Page 2-18, page 2-39)

xxvii S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRESSURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. (Page 2-20, page 2-41)

CAUTION

WHEN THE SONAR DOME IS DEWATERED AND PRESSURIZED ON AIR, GAGE W-GA-10 IS THE PRIMARY INDICATOR OF INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE. INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE ALSO IS INDICATED ON GAGES A-GA-167, A-GA-136 AND A-GA-133. WHEN THE SONAR DOME IS PRESSURIZED BY AIR, THE INDICA- TIONS OF ALL FOUR GAGES SHOULD BE IDENTICAL AT ALL TIMES (+/- 1 PSIG). IF THE INDICATION OF ANY ONE OF THE FOUR GAGES DOES NOT AGREE WITH THE REMAINING GAGE INDICA- TIONS, THE PARTICULAR GAGE MUST BE CONSIDERED SUSPECT AND IS TO BE DISREGARDED. THE REMAINING GAGES THEN BECOME THE PRIMARY INDICATORS OF INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE. (Page 2-24)

CAUTION

IF AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY-TO-AIRLOCK HATCH IS FOUND DEFEC- TIVE DURING INSPECTION, DO NOT PROCEED FURTHER WITH DOME ENTRY UNTIL NECESSARY REPAIRS HAVE BEEN ACCOM- PLISHED. (Page 2-25) xxviii S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

IF AIRLOCK-TO-DOME HATCH IS FOUND DEFECTIVE DURING INSPECTION, DO NOT PROCEED FURTHER WITH DOME ENTRY UNTIL NECESSARY REPAIRS HAVE BEEN ACCOMPLISHED (Page 2-27)

CAUTION

THE SONAR DOME SHALL NORMALLY BE FILLED WITH FRESH- WATER. FRESHWATER IS USED TO MINIMIZE THE CORROSIVE EFFECTS OF SALTWATER ON SDPS COMPONENTS AND EQUIP- MENTS INSTALLED WITHIN THE SONAR DOME. THE USE OF FRESHWATER SHALL BE WAIVED WHEN SHIP IS OPERATING IN EXTREMELY COLD CLIMATES. SALTWATER SHALL BE USED IN LIEU OF FRESHWATER TO PREVENT FREEZING. (Page 2-38)

CAUTION

IF FRESHWATER-TO-SEAWATER INTERCHANGE MUST BE PER- FORMED AT SEA, SHIP’S SPEED MUST BE FIVE KNOTS OR LESS AND SEA STATE 2 OR LESS. (Page 2-38)

CAUTION

TABLES 2-10 AND 2-11 CONTAIN PROCEDURES FOR ALL PREDICT- ABLE SDPS ALARM CONDITIONS AND COMPONENT MALFUNC- TIONS. IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT ANY ALARM CONDITION OR COMPONENT MALFUNCTION MUST BE THOROUGHLY INVESTI- GATED BEFORE ANY CORRECTIVE ACTION IS UNDERTAKEN. ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO ARE KNOWLEDGEABLE OF ALL ASPECTS OF THE OPERATION AND FUNCTION OF THE SDPS SHALL TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS DURING AN ALARM SITUA- TION.

ALL PROCEDURES ARE TO BE PERFORMED PROMPTLY UPON ACTIVATION OF VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS. APPRAISAL OF ALARMS SHALL BE MADE BY CONDUCTING COORDINATED GAGE READINGS AT THE DOME CONTROL STATION (DCS).

SIMULTANEOUS ALARMS ARE RECEIVED AT THE DOME CON- TROL STATION (DCS), SONAR CONTROL AND DMS. (Page 2-46)

xxix S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

SDRW MUST BE PRESSURIZED WITH AIR WHILE SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 FOR PROCEDURES. (Page 4-3)

CAUTION

DIVERS MUST EXERCISE CARE WHEN TOUCHING A DOME WITH STEEL WIRES EXPOSED. (Page 4-4)

CAUTION

DOME PRESSURIZATION MUST BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES WHEN THE SHIP IS AFLOAT. IF AN EMERGENCY CONDITION EXISTS, REFER TO EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES OF CHAPTER 2. (Page 5-1)

CAUTION

ENSURE SONAR DOME REMAINS WATER FILLED AND PRESSUR- IZED AT REQUIRED LEVELS AT ALL TIMES DURING THE PERFOR- MANCE OF THESE PROCEDURES. (Page 6-1)

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE. (Page 6-2, page 6-13)

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE, HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE. (Page 6-3, page 6-5, page 6-7, page 6-10, page 6-12)

CAUTION

OPENING BYPASS VALVE A-V-147 CAUSES PRESSURE AT RELIEF VALVE A-V-122 TO INCREASE RAPIDLY. DO NOT ALLOW A-GA-123 INDICATION TO EXCEED 29 PSIG. (Page 6-4) xxx S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

STEPS OF THIS PROCEDURE REQUIRE THAT DOME PRESSURE BE LOWERED TO 12 PSIG. ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITIONS DUE TO EMERGENCY OPERATION HAS PRIORITY. (Page 6-9)

CAUTION

OPENING W-V-17 INCREASES DOME PRESSURE RAPIDLY. DO NOT ALLOW DOME PRESSURE, AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10, TO EXCEED 48 PSIG. (Page 6-16)

CAUTION

xxxi S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE THE BOLT HEADS THAT HOLD DOWN THE BEAD SEAT CLAMPS AND THE SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS THAT HOLD THE FAIRING ANGLE TO THE RUBBER WINDOW NUT PLATES. (SEE FIGURE 8-2.) (Page 8-2)

CAUTION

ENSURE CASTING HAS AN ADEQUATE GROUND BEFORE WELD- ING TO AVOID DAMAGE TO CHAINFALLS, AND SO FORTH. (Page 8-33)

CAUTION

DO NOT COMPLETE WELDING WITH BRACES IN PLACE. RESIDUAL STRESSES MAY CAUSE THE BEAD SEAT TO WARP OUT OF SHAPE AND OUT OF TOLERANCE. USE CONTROLLED WELD- ING PROCEDURES. PREVENT CONCENTRATED (LOCAL) WELD- ING. CHECK MEASUREMENTS PERIODICALLY TO ENSURE THAT BEAD SEAT ASSEMBLY IS CORRECTLY POSITIONED AND IS NOT MIGRATING OUT OF TOLERANCE. (Page 8-40)

CAUTION

DO NOT REMOVE ANY S/I FIXTURE HINGE PINS PRIOR TO INSTAL- LATION. THE SDRW AND S/I FIXTURE WILL OPEN TO THE DESIRED 17 FEET 6 INCHES (PER FIGURE 8-25) WITH ALL HINGE PINS IN PLACE. SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE FIXTURE AND SDRW CAN OCCUR IF THE PINS ARE REMOVED. (Page 8-46)

CAUTION

DO NOT ATTACH A CLEVIS, CABLES, OR CHAINFALLS TO THE AFT FRAME MOUNTING HOLES. THE HOLES ARE DESIGNED FOR MOUNTING THE AFT SHIPPING BRACKETS. (Page 8-47)

CAUTION

DO NOT HIT THE TRANSDUCER ELEMENTS OR THE BAFFLE WHILE POSITIONING THE WINDOW. (Page 8-48) xxxii S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

THE S/I FIXTURE TAIL SECTIONS WILL MOVE INBOARD; DO NOT HIT THE BAFFLE PLATE. (Page 8-48)

CAUTION

DO NOT PERMIT THE LOWER BEAD TO RIDE ON TOP OF THE CASTINGS. WOODEN WEDGES CAN BE USED TO ASSIST IN PRE- VENTING THIS. IF IT DOES OCCUR, THE BEAD MUST BE FORCED DOWN AROUND THE SEAT BY USE OF HYDRAULIC ″JAWS″ OR JACKS, OR, WITH CAUTION, USE OF A PRYING DEVICE. USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE RUBBER BEAD. (Page 8-49)

CAUTION

WHILE INSTALLING CLAMPS, REMOVAL OF FAIRING ADAPTOR PLATES IS ESSENTIAL. USING THIS PROCEDURE WILL PREVENT DANGEROUSLY HIGH LOCAL STRESSES. EXCESSIVE STRESSES APPLIED TO THE WINDOW VIA THE FAIRING ADAPTOR PLATES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE RUBBER. SEE FIGURES 8-29 AND 8-30 FOR EXAMPLES OF INCORRECT AND CORRECT APPLICATION OF FORCE. (Page 8-49)

CAUTION

BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN THAT ALL CLAMPS ARE PROPERLY IN PLACE BEFORE PRESSURIZING, OR WHILE THE SDRW IS PRES- SURIZED. IT IS POSSIBLE TO INFLICT CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE TO THE SDRW IF THE CLAMPS ARE NOT INSTALLED. (Page 8-61)

CAUTION

THE DOME MUST NEVER BE DEPRESSURIZED WHEN FILLED WITH WATER IN DRYDOCK. (Page 8-64)

CAUTION

AIR PRESSURE OF 14 (+/-1) PSIG MUST BE SUPPLIED TO THE DOME AS WATER IS BEING REMOVED. (Page 8-65)

xxxiii S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILDUP OR ALLOW WELD SPATTER TO STRIKE THE RUBBER. (Page 8-70)

CAUTION

DO NOT FOUL THE SOCKET HEADS OF THE BOLTS WITH WELD. (Page 8-70)

CAUTION

AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE CLOSURE PLATES, IF THE DOME MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR ANY REASON, SUPPORT STRAPS SHALL BE INSTALLED IF IT IS ESTIMATED THE DOME WILL BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR MORE THAN 72 HOURS. (Page 8-75)

CAUTION

COVER UPPER HALF OF WINDOW PERIPHERY WITH POLYETHYL- ENE FILM, HEAVY PAPER, OR OTHER PROTECTIVE MATERIAL TO PROTECT RUBBER DURING FOAMING. FOAMING CHEMICALS MAY DAMAGE RUBBER. (Page 8-90)

CAUTION

THE SUPPORT CRADLES ARE DESIGNED TO FIT AGAINST AN SDRW PRESSURIZED WITH 15 PSIG AIR, AND SUPPORT AN UNPRESSURIZED DOME. WHEN PRESSURIZING THE SDRW WITH WATER, BE SURE TO SLACK OFF THE SUPPORT CRADLES AWAY FROM DOME SURFACE. (Page 8-94)

xxxiv S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1-1. SAFETY INFORMATION. All safety precautions necessary for the protection of personnel and the ship are presented in a summary ahead of the general introduction to the technical system.

1-1.1 SAFETY NOTICES. Speciﬁc safety notices are strategically located throughout the technical manual where required. Safety notices consist of WARNING notices, CAUTION notices and NOTES as deﬁned below: a. A WARNING statement is used to call particular attention to a step in a procedure which, if not strictly followed, could result in serious injury or death of personnel. b. A CAUTION statement is used to call particular attention to a step in a procedure which, if not strictly followed, could result in damage to, or destruction of equipment. c. WARNING and CAUTION statements immediately precede the text of those procedural steps where failure to strictly follow the particular step of a procedure would be likely to result in personal injury or death or damage to or destruction of equipment. d. NOTES are intended to highlight information which is applicable to a particular procedure but may not be apparent in the material presented.

1-1.2 SAFETY DEVICES. Safety Devices are intended to prevent injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The following safety devices are required to be installed in the Sonar Dome Pressurization System (SDPS). a. Protective Caps: Protective Caps cover the adjustment mechanisms of all pressure regulating devices and relief valves. They are intended to prevent any inadvertent adjustment being made to the component. Protective Caps are installed on pressure reducers W-V-7 and W-V-16, relief valve W-V-31 and backpressure regulator valve A-V-134. b. Locking Devices: Locking Devices disable the handwheel on various valves. This is done to prevent accidental opening or closing of the valve. Locking Devices are required on the following valves; W-V-3, W-V-17, W-V-22, W-V-49, DC-V-95, DC-V-96, DC-V-101, DC-V-102, A-V-107, A-V-131, A-V-146 and A-V-147. c. Warning Placards: Warning Placards alert maintenance personnel to a potentially hazardous condition which may exist. In most instances, they are mounted directly on the component which may present a hazard when proper operational procedures are not followed.

1-1.3 ELECTRICAL SAFETY. All electrical safety precautions must be observed. The electrical/alarm subsystem of the SDPS utilizes voltages which are dangerous and may be fatal if contacted by maintenance personnel. While every practical precaution has been incorporated in the SDPS electrical/alarm subsystem, the following guidance must be observed. a. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS: Operating personnel must at all times observe all safety regulations. Do not change components or make adjustments on equipments with the voltage supply ON. Under certain

1-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

conditions dangerous potentials may exist in circuits with power controls in the OFF position due to charges retained by capacitors. To avoid casualties, always remove power, tag out power source and discharge and ground circuits prior to touching them. b. DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE: Under no circumstances should any person reach within or enter electrical panels for the purpose of servicing or adjusting without immediate presence or assistance of another person capable of rendering aid. c. DO NOT TAMPER WITH INTERLOCKS: Do not depend upon panel door switches or interlocks for protection; always deenergize equipment. Under no circumstances should any protective cover or safety interlock switch be removed, short circuited, or tampered with in any way, by anyone other than authorized personnel. d. MORE THAN ONE SOURCE of 115 VAC electrical power is present in the SDPS electrical/Alarm subsystem. See Figure FO-16 for power source locations. e. In general, USE ONLY ONE HAND when servicing energized equipment. f. High Voltages MAY BE PRESENT across terminals that are normally low voltage, due to equipment failure. g. Do not use test equipment known to be in poor condition. h. RESUSCITATION: An approved PLACARD illustrating the procedures for resuscitation by mouth-to-mouth method shall be prominently displayed in each space with electrical enclosures.

1-1.4 SONAR DOME ENTRY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. When any type of work is to be performed in the hyperbaric environment (elevated pressure) of the Sonar Dome, the procedures and safety precautions in NAV- SHIPSYSCOM letter Serial 47-PMS387-G of 23 June 1972 on ″Safety Requirements For Work Associated With The Pressurized AN/SQS-26 Sonar Dome Rubber Window″, as amended by NAVSEASYSCOM letter Serial 63/070 of 5 May 1989, shall be followed. Additionally, the medical aspects of hyperbaric safety are highlighted in the Naval Experimental Diving Unit (NEDU) letter 5100, Serial 229 of 18 April 1972, as amended. The following is an itemized summary of these letters. a. The Supervisor shall ensure that all personnel who are assigned to work in the pressurized environment, as well as those on watch at control valves, gages, and phones, are thoroughly familiar with the operating instructions and the appropriate measures to be taken in various types of emergencies (Chapter 2).

WARNING

DO NOT USE 115-VOLT POWER UNLESS THE SONAR DOME IS COM- PLETELY DRY. b. Battery powered portable lighting shall be made available and used at all times in the pressurized sonar dome. When using 115 Volt power, only approved, inspected and waterproof equipment shall be used. c. The maximum number of personnel to be admitted into the pressurized sonar dome, and normally only three are necessary, shall not exceed the number of personnel who can enter or exit through the airlock at any one time. This includes the person who will remain in the airlock to maintain communication with personnel in the sonar dome. Upon completion of work within the pressurized sonar dome, the last two persons shall leave together on the last exit from the sonar dome. d. In case of any malfunction with the electrical and/or the LP air pressurization subsystems, personnel shall exit the sonar dome via the airlock in an orderly manner and remain outside the sonar dome until normal operating conditions have been restored.

1-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010 e. Supervisor shall ensure that the sonar transmitter power supply and underwater telephone are deenergized and tagged prior to entering the dome. f. Supervisor shall ensure that all support equipment (LP air compressors, electrical supply system, etc.) are properly tagged to preclude accidental interference. g. A qualified forecastle watch shall be established prior to personnel entering the pressurized sonar dome. The forecastle watch shall take appropriate action(s) to keep all moving ships and floating objects away from the bow area while personnel are in the sonar dome. The forecastle watch shall be in continuous communication with the pressurization system operator in sonar dome control, sonar dome, sonar dome passageway and airlock utilizing sound power circuit designated as X25J. h. During sonar dome entry the diving flag (alpha) shall be displayed by the ship performing the entry. i. The adjacent ships in a berth shall be prohibited from active sonar transmission. j. Smoking or the use of open flame in the pressurized environment of the sonar dome is strictly prohibited. k. The use of any flammable material within the pressurized sonar dome is strictly prohibited.

WARNING

PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM OPERATOR WATCHSTATION MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES WHEN PERSONNEL ARE IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME. l. At least one of the personnel assigned to work in the pressurized sonar dome shall be in constant communication with the pressurization system operator at all times. The pressurization system operator watchstation shall be manned at all times when personnel are in the pressurized sonar dome. m. The Supervisor shall check the source of the input air to LP compressors prior to personnel entering the pressurized sonar dome. Supervisor shall ensure that the air being supplied to the sonar dome is not contaminated by outside industrial activities, shipboard painting, or accidental spill or release of solvents, fuels, etc.

1-1.5 MEDICAL ASPECTS OF HYPERBARIC SAFETY. When entering the Sonar Dome Rubber Window (SDRW) the internal pressure is maintained at two atmospheres (14 psig). Because the internal pressure is higher than normal atmospheric pressure (1 atmosphere = 0 psig), the inside of the Sonar Dome is considered a ″Hyper- baric Environment″. The internal pressure of the SDRW is equivalent to the pressure experienced when submerged in 33 feet of water. The U.S. Navy Diving Manual NAVSEA SS521-AG-PRO-010 provides important information regarding the effects of increased pressure on the human body and the causes, symptoms and prevention of decompression sickness.

NOTE

The U.S. Navy Diving Manual, NAVSEA SS521-AG-PRO-010, Provides Spe- ciﬁc Information on the Causes, Symptoms and Prevention of Decompression Sickness.

a. General. Numerous hazards are inherent when working in a hyperbaric environment. Personnel with colds

1-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

or respiratory diseases, or those having a history of ear trouble, shall not be assigned to work in the hyperbaric environment even though previously approved from a physical standpoint. b. Effects of Pressure Applied Equally to All Parts of the Body. The body is capable of withstanding very large pressures because it is entirely (with the exception of its air spaces) made up of fluids and solids which are essentially incompressible and therefore freely transmit pressure. c. Effects of Pressure Applied Unequally. If, for any reason, one or more of the rigid air spaces in the body is prevented from equalizing with the outside pressure, damage may result. A pressure as small as one pound per square inch can begin to alter the normal shape of tissues by causing congestion, swelling, and bleeding of the tissues. If the pressure difference is allowed to continue and increase, then actual destruction of the tissues, as well as pain and shock, could result. d. Indirect Effects of Pressure (physiological). As you increase the pressure of air, the partial pressure of each component gas is increased. The increase in the partial pressures will have two types of effects. The first effect will be that the total amount of gas in solution in the body will increase. This will cause problems as the pressure is decreased. The excess gas in solution may leave the solution as bubbles. These bubbles of gases cause decompression sickness. The second type of effect comes on with gases (such as oxygen, nitrogen, and car- bon dioxide) which not only go into solution, but have specific actions on the body. These actions are not noticeable under ordinary conditions; however, they will increase (sometimes causing nitrogen narcosis and oxygen poisoning) when the pressure is sufficiently increased. e. Effects of Pressure During Descent. (Increase in pressure.) (1) Middle Ear Squeeze. The eardrum is located between the external ear canal and the middle ear space. The eardrum completely isolates these two areas from each other. As pressure is applied to the body, the outer eardrum surface is subjected to this same pressure. To counterbalance this increase in pressure, air must pass through a narrow tube (the eustachian) between the middle ear space and throat. Should this tube become blocked by mucus or an overgrowth, the equalization cannot take place and severe pain will result. If pressure continues to increase, actual rupture of the eardrum will occur. Also, since the blood vessels will transmit the full external pressure and the internal pressure of the middle ear is lower, hem- orrhage of the middle ear may occur before the eardrum ruptures. Returning to normal pressure will bring immediate relief. Very often, a slight blockage of the eustachian tube can be overcome by holding the nose and lips tightly and exerting inside pressure by forced expiration (Valsalva Maneuver). Yawning, swallow- ing, and movement of the jaw may also be helpful in opening the eustachian tubes. (2) Sinus Squeeze. All sinuses are located within hollow spaces in the skullbone. These cavities are lined with a mucous membrane continuous with that of the nasal cavity. If any of the sinuses are blocked by mucous or tissue growths, pain will soon be experienced in the obstructed area when pressure is applied. The situation will become very much like that described for the middle ear. Unless damage has already occurred, the return to normal pressure will bring about relief. (3) Tooth Squeeze. Tooth squeeze results when a small pocket of trapped gas has been generated by decay or is lodged under a poorly-fitted or cracked filling. If this pocket of gas is completely isolated, the pulp of the tooth or the tissues in the tooth socket can be sucked into the space causing pain. If additional gas enters the tooth during descent and does not vent during ascent, the tooth may explode. f. Effects of Pressure During Ascent. (Decrease in pressure.) (1) Air Embolism. This problem is a result of the expansion of the air inside the lungs. The immediate cause is holding the breath during ascent. For example, if an individual ascends to the surface from 33 feet (15 psig), the air within the lungs will expand to two times its original volume. If this expanding air fills the lungs completely and is not allowed to escape, a pressure is built up within the lungs which is greater than the pressure surrounding the chest. This pressure overexpands the lung and ruptures its air sacs and blood vessels. IT IS AN ABSOLUTE RULE TO BREATHE NORMALLY AND CONTINU- ALLY DURING ASCENT.

1-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(2) Overexpansion of the Stomach and Intestine. While a person is under two atmospheres of pressure, gas formation may take place in their intestines, or air may be swallowed and trapped in their stomach. Dur- ing ascent, this trapped gas expands and occasionally causes discomfort. This may cause them to stop the ascent until it can be expelled. Continued ascent in spite of marked discomfort may result in actual harm. Chewing of gum can cause air to be swallowed and will not be allowed. g. Symptoms of Decompression Sickness. (1) Symptoms of decompression sickness (DCS) may occur any time from 0 to 24 hours after hyperbaric exposure (or longer if exposed to altitude). It is vital that all personnel working in pressurized sonar domes be familiar with symptoms of DCS and if a sonar dome is suspected of having decompression sickness, the person should receive immediate medical evaluation and treatment including oxygen. A diving medical officer or other physician with training and experience in diving conditions should be consulted. The only acceptable treatment for suspected decompression sickness is recompression in a treatment chamber. Oxygen should be continued during transfer, and should be given at the highest available concentration, preferably 100 per cent. (2) In the event of a medical emergency and the local Diving Supervisor or Diving Medical Officer are not available, the following Commands may be contacted for diving related medical assistance:

Primary:

Navy Experimental Diving Unit 321 Bullﬁnch Road Panama City, FL 32407-7015 Commercial (850)230-3100 or (850)235-1668 DSN 436-4351

Secondary:

Navy Diving Salvage Training Center (NDSTC) 350 South Craig Road Panama City, FL 32407-7015 Commercial (850) 234-4651, DSN 436-4651 h. Training. The safety superintendent will conduct mandatory training lectures concerning the aspects of working under two atmospheres of pressure. These lectures will, as a minimum, include all the information contained in this article of the Safety Manual. Department heads and office heads will ensure that all personnel have completed this mandatory training prior to working in a pressurized dome. i. Physical Examinations. Those personnel who will be working in the pressurized sonar domes must have a physical examination (for persons working under pressure) every one to three years, depending on age. This examination will be conducted in accordance with Article 15-36 of the Manual of the Medical Department. Individuals are encouraged to report any symptoms or condition which might interfere with or prevent them from entering the pressurized dome. An individual who, for any reason, seriously desires not to enter the pressurized dome will not be required to do so. The medical officer must ensure that an individual is ﬁt to enter the pressurized dome. Therefore, the individual’s immediate supervisor must, just prior to entry, determine by inquiry of the individual, if any of the following conditions exist: (1) The individual feels unﬁt. (2) The individual has any degree of alcoholic intoxication or evidence of its after-effects. (3) The individual has any respiratory or middle ear diseases.

1-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(4) The individual has any external ear infection. (5) The individual is pregnant, or believes that she may be pregnant. j. Time Limitations. One-Time Entries. According to the U.S. Navy Diving Manual, a person may be subjected to pressures of up to 15.58 psig for up to 310 minutes without having to undergo any decompression stops on the way back to 0 psig. In order to ensure that there is no reason for decompression stops, PERSONNEL WILL BE LIMITED TO 240 MINUTES UNDER 14 PSIG OF PRESSURE IN THE SONAR DOME. (1) Repetitive Entries. The maximum elapsed time allowed in the dome under pressure is 240 MINUTES REGARDLESS OF ANY SURFACE INTERVALS . Elapsed time is defined as a continuous 240 minute period which commences with pressurization. Personnel may enter or leave the pressurized dome as many times as required during this 240 minute period. A minimum of 12 hours of surface time must elapse after completion of a 240 minute period before any additional dome entry is allowed. (2) Further Exposure to Decompression. Experience in long duration pressure exposure such as a 240 minute period has revealed a potential for decompression sickness, especially if followed by further decompression from sea level to altitude. Therefore, to avoid the risk of precipitating decompression sickness, personnel must wait 24 hours after any pressure exposure before flying. (3) Over pressurization. If over pressurization (greater that 15 psig) occurs at any time during sonar dome entry, then the dive shall be terminated and personnel should report to the Medical Department. The local Diving Supervisor should be contacted if time limits are exceeded or any symptoms of decompression sickness occur. (4) The local Diving Supervisor and the recompression chamber watch should be contacted prior to attempting any pressurized sonar dome entry. The supervisors should be appraised that ship’s force will be working in a pressurized sonar dome (hyperbaric environment) and the availability of a recompression chamber should be confirmed. k. Recording Sonar Dome Entries. A permanent record (diving log) shall be maintained for all sonar dome entries. The form SONAR DOME ENTRY (DIVE) REPORT (Figure 2-3), provides a format for the general diving log. Personnel shall make copies of this form directly from the technical manual. A form shall be completed, and forwarded to NSWCCD-SSES (Code 924) for each individual completing a sonar dome entry. Individuals entering the sonar dome should retain a personal copy of this report. (1) Sonar Dome Entry mishaps shall be reported in accordance with OPNAVINST 5102.1C.

1-2. INTRODUCTION. This technical manual contains the minimum safety precautions and information necessary for the proper operation, maintenance and logistic support of the Sonar Dome Pressurization System (SDPS). This technical manual is applicable to DDG 51 class ship.

1-2.1 ARRANGEMENT OF MANUAL. This technical manual consists of eight chapters and one appendix as follows: a. Chapter 1 This chapter provides general information which includes the minimum safety precautions required to operate and maintain the Sonar Dome Pressurization System (SDPS). Additionally, a brief description of the SDPS is provided. Reference information is provided in order to supply additional technical guidance and support. b. Chapter 2 This chapter is a series of step-by-step, concise operating procedures for technicians speciﬁcally trained to operate the SDPS. c. Chapter 3 This chapter provides a detailed functional description of the SDPS. This chapter also provides a

1-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

physical description of each of the major components of the various subsystems. Technical speciﬁcations of speciﬁc components are included where appropriate. The SDPS consists of the following subsystems: LP Air pressurization, Water pressurization, Secondary Drainage, Electrical/Alarms, Sonar Dome Access and Com- munications. d. Chapter 4 This chapter provides guidance to aid in the performance of established preventative maintenance procedures (PMS) for the SDPS. e. Chapter 5 This chapter provides maintenance personnel with a series of logic diagrams which assist in iden- tifying and isolating SDPS subsystem faults and component malfunctions. f. Chapter 6 This chapter provides technical guidance which will enable maintenance personnel to replace, inspect and repair SDPS components as required. Alignment and adjustment procedures are also provided to ensure the proper operation of major subsystem components. g. Chapter 7 This chapter provides the parts listing, nomenclature and ordering information for SDPS components. h. Chapter 8 Sonar Dome Rubber Window (SDRW) Installation and Repair Procedures. i. Appendix A Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) Service Manual.

1-3. BRIEF SONAR DOME PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.

The following paragraphs provide a brief description of the Sonar Dome Rubber Window (SDRW) and the Sonar Dome Pressurization System (SDPS). The sonar dome rubber window and its associated hardware are presented in full in Chapter 8 of this technical manual. A generalized layout of the transducer compartment and associated structural components are illustrated in Figure 1-1. Detailed data and illustrations of the SDPS components are presented in Chapter 3 of this technical manual. The functional relationships of the various subsystems is illustrated in Figure 1-2.

1-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 1-1. Transducer Compartment Structural Arrangement

1.3.1 CONFIGURATIONS OF SDRW. The SDRW-1 rubber window conﬁguration is used on ship classes DDG 51 and CG 47.

1.3.2 LP AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM. This subsystem regulates the ship’s low pressure (LP) air supply to pressurize and circulate air within the sonar dome. This subsystem is used for: (1) Initial drydock sonar dome pressurization (2) Sonar dome water removal (3) Maintaining a positive internal sonar dome pressure once water has been removed and (4) Providing a source of breathing air for maintenance personnel during sonar dome entry.

1.3.3 WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM. This subsystem regulates either the ship’s ﬁremain or dockside fresh water supply to maintain the required static internal sonar dome pressure. This subsystem is also used to reﬁll the air pressurized sonar dome. During underway periods, this subsystem will automatically regulate and maintain internal sonar dome water pressure at required levels.

1-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 1-2. Functional Relationship of SDPS Subsystems 1.3.4 ELECTRICAL/ALARM SUBSYSTEM. This subsystem comprises the necessary electrical controls and alarms to: (1) Provide visual and audible alarm indications when High or Low sonar dome pressure conditions exist, (2) Provide control of the solenoid valve during sonar dome water removal, (3) Provide visual and audible indications when low pressure conditions exist when the sonar dome is air pressurized, deenergizing the solenoid valve in this event, (4) Provide visual sonar dome water full and dome empty indications and (5) Provide visual alarm indications when water ﬂow within the SDPS exceeds predetermined levels.

1.3.5 SONAR DOME ACCESS SUBSYSTEM. This subsystem provides the necessary controls and visual indicators which enable maintenance personnel to safely enter and depart the air pressurized sonar dome through the airlock compartment.

1.3.6 COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM. This subsystem provides a sound powered phone network (X25J ) between the sonar dome, airlock, sonar dome passageway, dome control station and forecastle for exclusive use during sonar dome operations.

1-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1-4. REFERENCE INFORMATION.

Tables 1-1 through 1-3 provide ampliﬁed technical information for the SDPS. Table 1-1 lists supporting technical publications for the primary components of the SDPS. Table 1-2 lists the functional characteristics and requirements of the SDPS. Table 1-3 provides operational tolerance values for the SDPS under normal operating conditions.

Table 1-1. Supporting Technical Publications Component Technical Publication A-V-134 NAVSEA 0948-LP-051-7010; Type 1, Technical Manual, Valve, Regulating, JP5 Fuel System. W-V-31 NAVSEA 0948-LP-097-6010; Technical Manual for Water Relief Valves. W-V-7, W-V-16 NAVSEA 0948-LP-101-6010; Technical Manual for Water Pressure Reducer Valves. E-V-21 NAVSEA 0948-LP-097-9010; Technical Manual for Valve, Solenoid Operated, 2 Way, Rotary Shaft Type, 4 inch IPS. RMVA Systems NAVSEA S6435-QJ-MMC-010; Dual Linear Remote Mechanical Valve Actuator; Description, Selection, Installation, Operation and Maintenance. Barton W-GA-10 Technical Manual, Installation and Operation, Differential Pressure Indicating Switches, Models 288A, 289A, 290A and 291A; ITT Barton Inc. Digital W-GA-10 Volumetrics, Inc. Document No. 99890176; Operation Manual of the Sonar Dome Remote Electronic Pressure Sensor. Digital W-GA-10 Prime, Inc. Model 9213 User Manual; Operation Manual of the Sonar Dome Remote Electronic Pressure Sensor.

Table 1-2. Functional Characteristics of the SDPS A. SDPS Supply Requirements 1. Firemain Supply 150 psig (nominal) at 220 GPM max ﬂow 2. Fresh Water (Dockside) 40 psig (min) at 220 GPM max ﬂow 3. LP Air service 100 psig at 50 SCFM

B. Sonar Dome Rubber Window Interior Pressure Supply Requirements 1. Seawater pressurization 39.5 psig static pressure for AN/SQS-53C sonar systems NOTE Sonar Dome Pressure May Vary, Depending on Ship’s Speed and Sea State. 2. Freshwater Pressurization 39.5 psig static pressure for AN/SQS-53C sonar systems 3. LP Air Input 22 psig at no ﬂow (lockup). 4. LP Air Exhaust 14 psig (with air circulating). C. Electrical/Alarm Supply Requirements 1. Dome Control Panel E-PN-44 115 VAC, 60 Hz., 690 Watts max 2. Dome Status Panel E-PN-45 115 VAC, 60 Hz., 330 Watts max 3. Terminal Panel E-PN-50 115 VAC, 60 Hz., 15 AMP max 4. Relay E-K-142 115 VAC, 60 Hz. 5. Solenoid E-V-21 115 VAC, 60 Hz., 46 AMP (inrush) 5 AMP holding

1-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 1-3. Operational Tolerance Values Component Function Tolerance W-GA-40 EDUCTOR SUCTION 20-30 INCHES OF HG. (VACUUM) W-GA-38 EDUCTOR SUPPLY PRESSURE 150.0 (+25,-25) PSIG A-GA-133 SONAR DOME (AIR) EXHAUST PRESSURE 14.0 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-140 AIRLOCK PRESSURE 14.0 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-167 DOME PRESSURE 14.0 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-136 DOME/AIRLOCK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 14.0 (+1,-1) PSIG W-GA-38 FIREMAIN SUPPLY PRESSURE 150.0 (+25,-25) PSIG W-GA-39 FRESHWATER SUPPLY PRESSURE 40.0 (MINIMUM) PSIG W-GA-39 1st STAGE REDUCTION 50.0 (+5,-5) PSIG W-GA-41 2nd STAGE REDUCTION 19.5 (+2,-2) PSIG W-GA-41 HIGH PRESS ALARM SETPOINT 24.5 (+1,-1) PSIG W-GA-41 LOW PRESS ALARM SETPOINT/WATER 5.5 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-123 LP AIR REDUCTION (NO FLOW) 22.0 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-106 LP FILTERED AIR PRESSURE 120.0 (+10,-10) PSIG A-GA-109 LP AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE 120.0 (+10,-10) PSIG W-GA-10 NORMAL DOME PRESSURE/WATER 39.5 (+2,-0) PSIG W-GA-10 HIGH PRESS ALARM SETPOINT 44.0 (+1,-1) PSIG W-GA-10 LOW PRESS ALARM SETPOINT/WATER 25.0 (+1,-1) PSIG A-GA-106 A-F-114 OUTLET PRESSURE 120.0 (+10,-10) PSIG A-GA-117 A-F-114 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE LESS THAN 6 PSID A-GA-167 SONAR DOME PRESSURE (AIR) 13.0-22.0 PSIG E-F-175 LOW LP AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE 85.0 (+1,-1) PSIG @ A-GA-109 E-F-32 LOW SONAR DOME AIR PRESSURE 12.0 (+1,-1) PSIG @ A-GA-167 A-V-134 BACK PRESSURE REGULATION 14.0 (+1,-1) PSIG @ A-GA-133 A-V-122 LP AIR RELIEF SETPOINT 25.0 (+1,-1) PSIG @ A-GA-123 A-F-124 AIR FLOWMETER 45.0 (+5,-5) SCFM W-V-31 WATER SAFETY RELIEF SETPOINT 47.0 (+1,-1) PSIG @ W-GA-10 E-F-29 WATER FLOW SWITCH 2.5 (+.5,-.5) GPM Tolerance values establish normal SDPS operational requirements. Listed values assume component or gage is within calibration and is the correct (authorized) type. Operational tolerance values are not to be confused with calibration tolerance values. Calibration of a particular component or gage is a separate procedure which must be accomplished IAW established METCAL procedures.

Table 1-4. Stenciling Guidance Dome Control Station (0.5-28-0-Q)

Location Stencil Firemain Supply, Downstream of Check Valve W-V-53 ″150 PSIG″ 1st Stage Reduction, Downstream of Reducer W-V-7 ″50 PSIG″ 2nd Stage Reduction, Downstream of Reducer W-V-16 ″39.5 PSIG″ Water Fill Line, Upstream of valve W-V-24 ″39.5 PSIG″ Fresh Water Fill, Downstream of Check Valve W-V-55 ″60 PSIG″ Water Vent Line, Upstream of valve W-V-27 ″39.5 PSIG″ Eductor Supply, Downstream of valve W-V-12 ″150 PSIG″ LP Air Supply, Downstream of valve A-V-110 ″120 PSIG″ 1st Stage Reduction, Downstream of Reducer A-V-119 ″22 PSIG″ Dome Air Supply, Dowstream of valve A-V-127 ″22 PSIG″

1-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 1-4. Stenciling Guidance - Continued

Dome Air Exhaust Vent, Upstream of valve A-V-129 ″14 PSIG″ Dome Air Exhaust Vent, Downstream of valve A-V-130 ″14 PSIG″ Air Filter Drain Lines, Downstream of valves (3) A-V-178 ″120 PSIG″

Airlock Passageway (4-22-0-L)

Location Stencil Water Fill Line, Downstream of valve W-V-24 ″39.5 PSIG″ Eductor Supply, Upstream of Eductor W-F-13 ″150 PSIG″ Water Vent Line, Upstream of valve W-V-27 ″39.5 PSIG″ Water Eduction, Downstream of valve W-V-22 ″-15 PSIG VACUUM″ Dome Air Supply, Downstream of valve A-V-127 ″22 PSIG″ Dome Air Exhaust Vent, Upstream of valve A-V-129 ″14 PSIG″ NOTE All valve bodies are NOT to be painted.

1-5. TERMINOLOGY.

1-5.1 REFERENCE DESIGNATORS. Symbol Deﬁnition DC Damage Control W-H-XX Water Hose E-F-XX Pressure Switch, Flow Switch E Electrical PN Panel F Filter or Fitting GA-XXX Water, Air Gage A Air (Low Pressure) W Water (Firemain/Freshwater) V Valve

1-5.2 ABBREVIATIONS. BLF Baseline Flat BBF Below Baseline Flat CL Centerline CCS Central Control Station DIW Dead In the Water DPDT Double Pole Double ThrowPanel DPST Double Pole Single ThrowPanel DPU Differential Pressure (Sensing) Unit ECP Engineering Change Proposal GPM Gallons Per Minute HP High Pressure HPAC High Pressure Air Compressor IAW In Accordance With IVCS Interior Voice Communications System

1-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

LPAC Low Pressure Air Compressor LD Load LP Low Pressure MRC Maintenance Requirement Card NO Normally Open NC Normally Closed P Port PMS Planned Maintenance System PRESS Pressure PSI Pounds (of pressure) per Square Inch PSIA Pounds (of pressure) per Square Inch Absolute PSID Pounds (of pressure) per Square Inch Differential PSIG Pounds (of pressure) per Square Inch Gage S Starboard SCFM Standard Cubic Feet per Minute SDPS Sonar Dome Pressurization System SDRW Sonar Dome Rubber Window SPDT Single Pole Double Throw SW Switch WL Waterline

1-5.3 COMMONLY USED TERMS. The following terms and their deﬁnitions are provided in order to clarify their precise meaning as they apply to the SDPS.

Airlock An intermediate chamber between the unpressurized sonar passageway and the pressurized sonar dome. Used for personnel passage between the sonar trunk and the sonar dome. Barton Differential Pressure Gage A true reading pressure gage (W-GA-10) which is preset to compensate for the effects of head pressure. Indicates true sonar dome pressure. Baseline Flat (BLF) The lowest point of a ship’s hull (in the bow area) under which the sonar dome is installed. The baseline ﬂat is the overhead of the sonar dome interior. It is used as a reference plane for calculating head pressure and installation measurements. Eductor A piping device that utilizes water ﬂow to create a vacuum at the suction opening. Head Pressure Static pressure created by the weight of the water in the vertical piping of the SDPS, between reducer W-V-16 at the dome control station and the opened end of the sensor line in the sonar dome. Head pressure is observed as the difference of indicated pressures of gages GA-24 and W-GA-10. Head pressure may be calculated by multiplying the height of vertical piping between W-V-16 at the dome control station and the opened end of the sensor line in the sonar dome by 0.445 lb./in for salt water, or by 0.43 lb/in for fresh water. Head pressure is determined for each SDPS at installation and is scribed on the operating instruction placard at the dome control station. Load-Pac A solid state electronic switch with two sets of terminals: the LD (load) terminals and the SW (switch) terminals. The LD terminals function similar to relay contacts (input/output) and the SW terminals function is similar to a relay solenoid (control). Nominal Approximate

1-13 / (1-14 Blank) 1-14 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 2

OPERATION

2-1. INTRODUCTION.

2-1.1 SCOPE OF DESCRIPTION. Illustrated descriptions of sonar dome rubber window (SDRW) system controls and indicators identify their shipboard locations, operating functions, capabilities and limitations. Caution and warning notes are provided to prevent damage to equipment or injury to personnel as a result of misuse of controls or lack of attention to indications.

2-1.2 PROCEDURES.

WARNING

OPERATORS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL NOR- MAL AND EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES TO ENSURE SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE OF THE SDRW SYSTEM. Step-by-step tabulated procedures are provided for normal and emergency operations. Normal dome procedures include: a. Dome pressurization with air in drydock. b. Air-to-freshwater interchange. c. Make ready for sea. d. Water-to-air interchange. e. Personnel access to air-pressurized dome. Emergency procedures, identiﬁed in Tables 2-11 and 2-12 at the end of the chapter, identify foreseeable emergencies or malfunctions, and provide instructions for avoiding personnel injury or equipment damage.

2-2. DESCRIPTION OF SDPS CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND ALARMS.

2-2.1 LOCATIONS OF CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND ALARMS. Figure FO-1 illustrates shipboard locations of system components and air, water, and electrical sources. Panel designators (e.g., E-PN-45 in Sonar Con- trol) identify the installation sites for controls, indicators, and alarms. Component locations, grouped into classes, are as follows: a. Pressurization Components. Dome equipment room, sonar administration office, airlock passageway, airlock, dome, and forecastle. b. Alarm Panels . Dome equipment room, damage control central, and sonar control room. c. Sound-Powered Phone and Call-Bell Terminals. Interconnecting dome control station, airlock, airlock passageway, dome, and forecastle.

2-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

2-2.2 DOME CONTROL STATION. The dome control station is located in the dome equipment room. The air valve board, the water valve board, the gage panel, and the dome control panel comprising this station are described in the following paragraphs. a. Air Valve Board. (Figure FO-2) Contains components to regulate and filter ship’s low-pressure air supply to 22 psig; also regulates and monitors air supply to the SDRW pressurization system at 14 psig at a flow rate of 50 scfm. b. Water Valve Board. (Figure FO-3) Contains components to regulate ship’s firemain and dockside freshwater supplies at 39.5 (+ 2, -0) psig, minus head pressure, to fill the dome and control sweep operations. c. Gage Panel. (Figure FO-4) Provides gages for monitoring all air and water pressurization operations. All gages except W-GA-10 (Barton) have a cutout valve with integral test connection. W-GA-10 (DEPI) cutout valve and test connections are located within the airlock . d. Dome Control Panel E-PN-44. (Figure FO-5) Provides indicator lights to signal high/low water-pressure conditions; indicator lights indicating full/empty conditions; a switch controlling the eductor solenoid valve; and a bell to signal high/low water-pressure and low dome air-pressure conditions.

2-2.3 SONAR CONTROL ROOM. Dome status panel E-PN-45 (Figure FO-6) is located in the sonar control room and provides: a. Indicator Lights. Indicate high/low dome water-pressure conditions and water ﬂow into the dome. b. Alarm Bell. Indicates high/low dome water-pressure and low dome air-pressure conditions. c. Alarm Silence Pushbutton. Permits manual silencing of bell after situation appraisal.

2-2.4 AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY, AND AIRLOCK. (Figure FO-7) These controls and indicators are required for local use by personnel during dome entry. They are located strategically for personnel safety in the airlock passageway and airlock. The functions provided are as follows: a. Dome pressure. b. Personnel dome entry. c. Dome sweep operations.

2-2.5 SONAR ADMINISTRATION OFFICE. Piping within this space contains overboard discharge equipment (water extraction) that provides valves to control overboard ﬂow of water out of the dome. These include the following: a. Overboard discharge check valve W-V-54. b. Overboard discharge cutout valve W-V-11.

2-2.6 FORECASTLE. Freshwater hose cutout valve W-V-6 is installed in the forecastle to control inlet freshwater from the dockside freshwater source to the dome freshwater pressurization piping.

2-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

2-3. OPERATION PROCEDURES.

CAUTION

SDPS OPERATORS MUST BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL NORMAL AND EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES TO ENSURE SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE OF THE SDPS.

2-3.1 INITIAL VALVE SETTINGS AND ALARM PANEL INDICATIONS. SDRW system valves must be set to positions that are correct for the initial dome pressurization conditions before beginning any operation procedure. Select Table 2-1, 2-2, or 2-3 according to dome status and ensure that each valve is set as required. Ensure that alarm panel indications are in accordance with corresponding dome pressurization condition. a. SDPS Valve Positions For Unpressurized Sonar Dome In Unﬂooded Drydock. (Table 2-1.) b. SDPS Valve Positions For Air Pressurized Sonar Dome; Prior to Air Circulating Through Sonar Dome. (Table 2-2.) c. SDPS Valve Positions For Water Filled/Pressurized Sonar Dome. (Table 2-3.) d. Electrical/Alarm Panel Indications for a Given Condition. (Table 2-10.)

CAUTION

WHEN IN DRYDOCK, DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED WITH AIR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE WINDOW.

WHEN DOCKSIDE, MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME TEST PRESSURE SHALL BE 11 PSIG. DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED AT ALL TIMES WHEN SHIP IS AFLOAT.

UNDERWAY AT SHIP’S SPEED GREATER THAN 5 KNOTS, OR A SEA STATE GREATER THAN 2, MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME PRES- SURE SHALL BE 25 PSIG.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DOME TEST HYDROPRESSURE SHALL BE 52 PSIG DURING INITIAL INSTALLATION. SUBSEQUENT DRYDOCK TEST PRESSURE SHALL NOT EXCEED 43 PSIG. (REFER TO CHAP- TER 8.)

FOR SEAWATER PRESSURIZATION, VALVES W-V-1 AND W-V-5 MUST BE OPEN, AND W-V-6 AND W-V-61 MUST BE CLOSED.

FOR FRESHWATER PRESSURIZATION, W-V-1 AND W-V-5 MUST BE CLOSED, AND W-V-6 AND W-V-61 OPEN.

PRESSURE SHALL BE MONITORED AT ALL TIMES WHEN THE SHIP IS WATERBORNE AND THE DOME IS PRESSURIZED WITH AIR.

2-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

2-3.2 OPERATION PROCEDURE. (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-3.) Present SDPS valve alignment requirements for specific conditions. Specific conditions include: a. Table 2-1: SDPS Valve Positions For Unpressurized Sonar Dome In Unflooded Drydock. b. Table 2-2: SDPS Valve Positions For Air Pressurized Sonar Dome; Prior to Air Circulating Through Sonar Dome. c. Table 2-3: SDPS Valve Positions For Water Filled/Pressurized Sonar Dome.

2-3.3 NORMAL SDPS OPERATING PROCEDURES. (Refer to Tables 2-4 through 2-9.) Provide step-by-step procedures for conducting SDPS operations under normal conditions. Normal SDPS operating procedures include: a. Table 2-4: Air Pressurization Procedure: Ship In Unﬂooded Drydock. b. Table 2-5: Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure. c. Table 2-6: Make Ready For Sea Procedure. d. Table 2-7: Water-To-Air Interchange Procedure. e. Table 2-8: Sonar Dome Entry Procedure. f. Table 2-9: Freshwater to Saltwater Interchange Procedure.

2-3.4 ALARM STATUS. (Refer to Table 2-10.) Provides the status for all visual and audible alarms for each alarm panel in a given condition.

2-3.5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES. Identify foreseeable emergencies or component failures and provide instructions to avoid injury to personnel or equipment damage. Emergency operating procedures include:

Emergency Procedures - Dome Pressurized with Water Table 2-11: 1. High Pressure Alarm. 2. Low Pressure Alarm. 3. Low Pressure Alarm With Water Flow On. 4. Loss Of Firemain Supply Pressure. 5. Reducer W-V-7 Failure. 6. Reducer W-V-16 Failure. 7. Relief Valve W-V-31 Failure.

Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry Table 2-12:

1. Loss of LP Air Supply. 2. Loss of Electrical Power.

2-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3. Regulator A-V-119 Failure. 4. Backpressure Regulator A-V-134 Failure.

Operational procedures for apparent sonar dome rupture and operational guidelines for ships with a ruptured sonar dome are included within the emergency procedures tables.

2-3.6 USE OF OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES TABLES. SDPS valves must be set to positions which are correct for the initial sonar dome pressurization conditions before beginning any operational procedure. Select from Table 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 according to sonar dome status and ensure that each SDPS valve is set as required. Ensure alarm panel indications are in accordance with corresponding sonar dome condition as shown on Table 2-10.

NOTE

REQUIRED OPERATIONAL TOLERANCE VALUES FOR ALL SDPS COM- PONENTS ARE PRESENTED IN TABLE 1-3 OF THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL.

2-3.7 PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS. The following series of CAUTION statements are general in nature and are provided as general guidance for SDPS operators.

CAUTION

NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE IS 39.5 PSIG.

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO NUT PLATE AND ASSOCIATED SONAR DOME MOUNTING HARDWARE, SONAR DOME PRESSURE MUST NOT BE ALLOWED TO DROP BELOW 11.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 WHEN SHIP IS WATERBORNE.

2-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Caution - precedes DC-V-96, DC-101 AND DC-V102 ARE LOCKED OPENED. THESE VALVES ARE USED ONLY WHEN PROCEDURES DICTATE OR WHEN AUTOMATIC CONTROLS WITHIN THE SDPS MALFUNCTION. IMPROPER USE OF BYPASS VALVES COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE SONAR DOME.

Table 2-1. SDPS Valve Positions For Unpressurized Sonar Dome In Unﬂooded Drydock. Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position Forecastle W-V-6 See Note1 Sonar Dome A-V-156 Closed Control A-V-164 Open Sonar Dome W-V-1 Closed A-V-165 Open Control W-V-2 Closed A-V-166 Closed W-V-3 Closed A-V-176 Open W-V-4 Open A-V-178 (3 See Note2 each) W-V-5 Closed A-V-183 Open W-V-8 Open A-V-184 Open W-V-9 Open A-V-185 Open W-V-12 Closed W-V-15 Open Administration W-V-11 Closed Office W-V-17 Closed W-V-18 Open W-V-19 Open Passageway W-V-22 Closed W-V-20 Open W-V-25 Closed E-V-21 Closed W-V-49 Closed W-V-24 Closed W-V-67 Open W-V-27 Open W-V(4-41-2) Closed W-V-58 Open A-V-100 Open W-V-59 Open A-V-141 Closed W-V-61 Closed A-V-146 Closed W-V-62 Closed A-V-159 Open W-V-64 Open A-V-160 Open W-V-65 Open A-V-162 Open W-V-66 Open A-V-171 Open W-V-97 Open A-V-177 Open A-V-103 Open A-V-104 Open Airlock W-V-46 Open A-V-105 Open W-V-57 Open A-V-107 Closed DC-V-95 Open A-V-108 Open DC-V-96 Open A-V-110 Closed DC-V-101 Open A-V-112 Open DC-V-102 Open A-V-116 Open A-V-137 Open A-V-118 Open A-V-138 Open A-V-121 Open A-V-157 Closed

2-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-1. SDPS Valve Positions For Unpressurized Sonar Dome In

Unﬂooded Drydock. - Continued

Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position A-V-125 Open A-V-161 Open A-V-127 Closed A-V-163 Open A-V-129 Open A-V-170 Open A-V-131 Open A-V-132 Open Sonar W-V-23 Closed A-V-144 Closed Dome W-V-48 See Note3 A-V-145 Open A-V-158 Closed A-V-147 Closed A-V-148 Open A-V-150 Closed A-V-155 Closed

1W-V-6: stored in Sonar Dome Control, installed on Forecastle for freshwater connection.

2A-V-178 (3): 1st stage drain open; 2nd and 3rd stage drains closed.

3W-V-48: stored with dome sweep hose W-H-52 in Airlock Passageway.

Table 2-2. SDPS Valve Positions For Air Pressurized Sonar Dome; Prior to Air Circulating Through Sonar Dome Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position Forecastle W-V-6 See Note1 Sonar Dome A-V-155 Open Control A-V-156 Open Sonar Dome W-V-1 Closed A-V-164 Open Control W-V-2 Closed A-V-165 Open W-V-3 Closed A-V-166 Closed W-V-4 Open A-V-176 Open W-V-5 Closed A-V-178 (3 See Note2 each) W-V-8 Open A-V-183 Open W-V-9 Open A-V-184 Open W-V-12 Closed A-V-185 Open W-V-15 Open W-V-17 Closed Admin Office W-V-11 Closed W-V-18 Open W-V-19 Open Passageway W-V-22 Closed W-V-20 Open W-V-25 Closed E-V-21 Closed W-V-49 Closed W-V-24 Closed W-V-67 Open W-V-27 Closed W-V(4-41-2) Closed W-V-58 Open A-V-100 Open W-V-59 Open A-V-141 Closed

2-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-2. SDPS Valve Positions For Air Pressurized Sonar Dome; Prior to

Air Circulating Through Sonar Dome - Continued

Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position W-V-61 Closed A-V-146 Closed W-V-62 Closed A-V-159 Open W-V-64 Open A-V-160 Open W-V-65 Open A-V-162 Open W-V-66 Open A-V-171 Open W-V-97 Open A-V-177 Open A-V-103 Open A-V-104 Open Airlock W-V-46 Open A-V-105 Open W-V-57 Open A-V-107 Closed DC-V-95 Open A-V-108 Open DC-V-96 Closed A-V-110 Open DC-V-101 Closed4 A-V-112 Open DC-V-102 Closed4 A-V-116 Open A-V-137 Open A-V-118 Open A-V-138 Closed A-V-121 Open A-V-157 Closed A-V-125 Closed A-V-161 Open A-V-127 Closed4 A-V-163 Open A-V-129 Closed4 A-V-170 Open A-V-131 Closed A-V-132 Open Sonar W-V-23 Closed A-V-144 Closed Dome W-V-48 See Note3 A-V-145 Open A-V-158 Closed A-V-147 Closed A-V-148 Open A-V-150 Closed

1W-V-6: stored in Sonar Dome Control, installed on Forecastle for freshwater connection.

2A-V-178 (3): 1st stage drain open; 2nd and 3rd stage drains closed.

3W-V-48: stored with dome sweep hose W-H-52 in Airlock Passageway.

4Close valves A-V-127, A-V-129, DC-V-101 and DC-V-102 to keep sonar dome statically air pressurized.

Table 2-3. SDPS Valve Positions For Water Filled/Pressurized Sonar Dome Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position Forecastle W-V-6 See Notes145 Sonar Dome A-V-156 Open Control A-V-164 Open Sonar Dome W-V-1 See Notes45 A-V-165 Open Control W-V-2 Closed A-V-166 Closed W-V-3 Closed A-V-176 Open

2-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-3. SDPS Valve Positions For Water Filled/Pressurized Sonar Dome -

Continued

Valve Designa- Location Valve Designator Valve Position Location tor Valve Position W-V-4 Open A-V-178 (3 See Note2 each) W-V-5 See Notes45 A-V-183 Open W-V-8 See Notes45 A-V-184 Open W-V-9 Open A-V-185 Open W-V-12 Closed W-V-15 Open W-V-17 Closed Admin Office W-V-11 Closed W-V-18 Open W-V-19 Open W-V-20 Open Passageway W-V-22 Closed E-V-21 Closed W-V-25 Closed W-V-24 Open W-V-49 Closed W-V-27 Closed W-V-67 Open W-V-58 Open W-V(4-41-2) Closed W-V-59 Open A-V-100 Open W-V-61 See Notes45 A-V-141 Closed W-V-62 Closed A-V-146 Closed W-V-64 Open A-V-159 Open W-V-65 Open A-V-160 Open W-V-66 Open A-V-162 Open W-V-97 Open A-V-171 Open A-V-103 Open A-V-177 Open A-V-104 Open A-V-105 Open Airlock W-V-46 Open A-V-107 Closed W-V-57 Open A-V-108 Open DC-V-95 Open A-V-110 Closed DC-V-96 Open A-V-112 Open DC-V-101 Closed A-V-116 Open DC-V-102 Closed A-V-118 Open A-V-137 Open A-V-121 Open A-V-138 Closed A-V-125 Closed A-V-157 Closed A-V-127 Closed A-V-161 Open A-V-129 Closed A-V-163 Open A-V-131 Closed A-V-170 Open A-V-132 Open A-V-144 Closed Sonar W-V-23 Closed A-V-145 Open Dome W-V-48 See Note3 A-V-147 Closed A-V-158 Closed A-V-148 Open A-V-150 Closed A-V-155 Open

2-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1W-V-6: stored in Sonar Dome Control, installed on Forecastle for freshwater connection.

4When freshwater is supplied to the SDPS: W-V-6, W-V-61 are Open. W-V-1, W-V-5 and W-V-8 are closed.

5When Firemain is utilized to provide pressure to the SDPS: W-V-1, W-V-5 and W-V-8 are Open. W-V-6 and W-V-61 are closed. W-V-6 is removed from the Forecastle and stored in Sonar Dome Control.

2A-V-178 (3): 1st stage drain open; 2nd and 3rd stage drains closed.

3W-V-48: stored with dome sweep hose W-H-52 in Airlock Passageway.

Table 2-4. Air Pressurization Procedure, Unﬂooded Drydock Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

DOUBLE CHECK VALVE LABEL PLATE DESIGNATION AGAINST NEXT PROCEDURAL STEP BEFORE MOVING HANDWHEEL TO ENSURE CORRECT VALVE OPERATION. OBSERVE CORRECT GAGE OR INDICATOR FOR REQUIRED INDICATION BEFORE MOVING VALVE HANDWHEEL. NOTE ALWAYS READ THROUGH A PROCEDURE TABLE BEFORE BEGINNING THE OPERATION. BECOME AWARE IN ADVANCE OF INDICATIONS TO EXPECT AND ALTERNATE ACTIONS THAT MAY BE REQUIRED IN RESPONSE TO INDICATIONS. 1. Use Table 2-1 as a baseline for valve alignment prior to pressurizing dome with air in a unﬂooded drydock: 2. System requirements: a. Establish Dome Control Station watch with sound power X25J phone.

WARNING

ENSURE THAT ALL NONESSENTIAL USE OF LP AIR IS SECURED WHEN PRESSURIZING THE DOME WITH LP AIR. b. Ensure that E-PN-44 and LOW PRESS and DOME EMPTY indica- Ship’s supply 115 VAC, 60 Hz. E-PN-45 are energized. tors on E-PN-44 are lit. DS-7 alarm bell is activated. WTR V OFF and LOW PRESS indicators on E-PN-45 are lit. DS-7 alarm buzzer is activated.

WARNING

ENSURE THAT ALL NONESSENTIAL USE OF LP AIR IS SECURED WHEN PRESSURIZING THE DOME WITH LP AIR.

2-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-4. Air Pressurization Procedure, Unﬂooded Drydock - Continued

Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

SONAR DOME SUPPORT SLINGS, IF INSTALLED, MUST BE SLACKED OFF PRIOR TO PRESSURIZING SONAR DOME. DAMAGE TO SONAR DOME WILL RESULT IF SUPPORT SLINGS ARE NOT SLACKED OFF. c. Open A-V-110. A-GA-109: 100 psig. Ensure that ship’s LP air supply is 100 psig (nominal). LOW PRESS AIR FAILURE indicator extinguishes when LP air >85 (± 1 psi.) 3. Prepare dome for air pressurization: a. Inspect dome and airlock inte- Dome clear of debris, E-Call and S.P. (See Figure FO-7) Fill hose cap secure rior. phone connectors capped, ﬁll hose cap in Airlock. stowed in airlock, sweep hose stowed in In passageway (4-22-0-L), ensure airlock-passageway. switches E-F-181 and E-F-182 are off. b. Close A-V-138. Ensure W-V-23 cap and A-V-138 pipe vent cap (if installed) are secure. Verify W-V-23, A-V-158, and A-V-157 are closed. c. Ensure that all personnel exit the sonar dome.

4. Secure airlock-to-dome hatch: 5. Personnel proceed to dome control station: 6. Verify 115 VAC power to Alarm panels are lit in accordance with electrical control/alarms sub- (IAW) Table 2-10. system: 7. Pressurize dome with air by Valves positioned IAW Table 2-2. operation of the following valves: a. Open A-V-125 slightly. A-GA-123: 22 (+ 1, -5) psig. Adjust A-V-119 as required. b. Close A-V-155 and A-V-156. c. Open DC-V-101 and DC-V- 102. d. Open A-V-127 and A-V-129. A-F-124 shows airﬂow. Dome pressure should gradually increase and stabilize at 14 (±1) psig in 1-2 hours. When dome air pressure exceeds 12.5 to Verify that electrical control indications 13.5 psig verify that all audible alarms on are IAW Table 2-10 (Pressurized Air). E-PN-44 and E-PN-45 are silenced. e. Verify dome air circulation. A-GA-133 and W-GA-10 indicate 14 (±1) Adjust A-V-134 as required. psig. A-F-124: 40-50 scfm. Throttle A-V-148 as required. f. Close A-V-129. W-GA-10 will increase and stabilize at 22 (+ 1, -5) psig.

2-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-4. Air Pressurization Procedure, Unﬂooded Drydock - Continued

Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments Dome is now ready for Air-to-Freshwater Interchange Procedure (Table 2-5.)

NOTE Procedural Note 1: Digital Gage W-GA-10 assembly includes a sensing tube through which internal sonar dome pressure is transmitted to transducer P-X-26. The sensing tube is ﬁtted with a double loop seal. Normal operation of Digital Gage W-GA-10 depends upon the trapping action of the double loop seal and the vacuum effect on the column of water at the closed top end (Transducer end) of the sensing tube. The ring-surface tension force plus the vacuum force on the column of water overcome the gravity force on the column of water. The double loop seal helps maintain the vacuum force by eliminating any air bubbles that may enter the open bottom end of the sensing tube. During extended lay-up periods some, or all, of the entrapped water within the sensing tube may evaporate. In this instance, Digital Gage W-GA-10 will indicate a positive offset pressure of approximately 2.23 psig when Digital Gage W-GA-10 is initially energized. If during initial sonar dome air pressurization, Digital Gage W-GA-10 indicates a positive pressure prior to the application of air to the sonar dome, maintenance personnel shall refer to gage A-GA- 133 as the primary indicator of internal sonar dome pressure. Gage A-GA-133 shall be the primary gage during the performance of Table 2-5 procedures. If Digital Gage W-GA-10 indicates 0.0 psig when initially energized, the gage is functioning normally (no loss of entrapped water from sensing tube) and may be used to verify gage A-GA-133 indication; gage A-GA-133 shall remain the primary gage during the performance of Table 2-5 procedures. Perfor- mance of Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure IAW Table 2-5 will reﬁll capillary sensing tube and thereby restore normal Digital Gage W-GA-10 operation.

Table 2-5. Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

DOME CONTROL STATION TO BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES. NOTE FOR PRELIMINARY WATER TEST IN UNFLOODED DRYDOCK, REFER TO CHAPTER 8. BEFORE ATTEMPTING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE, VERIFY THAT DOCKSIDE FRESHWATER PRES- SURE IS AT LEAST 40 PSIG AND NOT IN EXCESS OF 60 PSIG. THE SONAR DOME SHALL NORMALLY BE FILLED WITH FRESHWATER. THIS REQUIREMENT IS WAIVED WHEN OPERATING IN EXTREMELY COLD CLIMATES WHERE THERE IS DANGER OF FREEZ- ING. WHEN OPERATING IN EXTREMELY COLD CLIMATES, THE SONAR DOME SHALL BE FILLED DIRECTLY FROM THE FIREMAIN. UPON RETURN FROM EXTREMELY COLD CLIMATES, SEAWATER TO FRESHWATER INTERCHANGE SHOULD BE CONDUCTED. ENSURE ALL COMMAND SANITATION REQUIREMENTS REGARDING POTABLE WATER CONNEC- TIONS ARE ADHERED TO. 1. System requirements: a. Establish Dome Control Station watch with sound-powered X25J phone communications with all applicable stations. b. Ensure that dockside freshwater Dockside freshwater pressure gage (exter- If <40 psig, keep dome on air pressure. is >40 psig. nal to SDPS system).

2-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-5. Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments c. Ensure that ship’s LP air supply A-GA-109: 100 psig. LP air compressor is energized. is at 100 psig (nominal). d. Ensure that E-PN-44 and Alarm panel indicators are lit IAW Table Ship’s supply, 115 VAC, 60 Hz. E-PN-45 alarm panels are ener- 2-10. gized. 2. Verify that valves are IAW Table 2-2. Air Circulating : a. Open A-V-125, A-V-127, DC-V-101 and DC-V-102. b. Close A-V-155 and A-V-156. c. Open A-V-129. W-V-10 decreases and stabilizes at 14 Adjust A-V-134 as required. (+/-1) psig. d. Connect hose to W-V-6 cutout Connection located on forecastle. Valve stored at dome control station. valve. 3. Pressurize dome (freshwater). a. Open W-V-6 on forecastle. b. Open W-V-61. W-GA-39, > 40 psig; W-GA-41, 20 (+1, Adjust W-V-16 as required -1) psig. c. Close A-V-129. d. Close A-V-125. e. Open A-V-166. A-GA-133 and W-GA-10 decrease to 14 (±1) psig. f. Open DC-V-96. g. Open W-V-24. WTR V ON lights on E-PN-45 (Figure FO-6). Ensure W-GA-10 indication is held at 14-20 psig. h. Shut W-V-15 and W-V-18. i. Throttle W-V-17. Do not let W-GA-10 exceed 20 psig. Use By-Pass valves with care and discretion. Dome empty indicator on control panel E-PN-44 will extinguish after approximately 10 minutes. Dome freshwater ﬁll will continue for 2.5 to 3 hours. NOTE DOME CONTROL STATION MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES DURING THIS PROCEDURE. ENSURE GAGE W-GA-10 INDICATION DOES NOT DROP BELOW 13 PSIG. IF GAGE W-GA-10 INDICATION DROPS BELOW 13 PSIG, SHUT VALVE A-V-166 IMMEDIATELY AND OPEN VALVE A-V-125; WHEN SONAR DOME PRESSURE INCREASES TO 17 PSIG, RESUME FRESHWATER FILLING PROCEDURE BY SHUT- TING VALVE A-V-125 AND OPENING VALVE A-V-166. PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEP WILL ACTIVATE AUDIBLE LOW PRESSURE ALARMS. INFORM SONAR CONTROL AND COMBAT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE CENTER WATCHSTANDERS TO DISREGARD SONAR DOME LOW-PRESSURE ALARMS. 4. Verify dome is ﬁlled. DOME FULL and LOW PRESSURE E-PN-44 bell cannot be silenced. indicator lighted on E-PN-44. Alarm bell sounds.

2-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-5. Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments a. When Dome Full indicator illu- Observe gage W-GA-10 indication minates and alarm bell sounds, increase; audible alarms silence when Close A-V-127, A-V-166, and gage W-GA-10 indication is greater than A-V-145. 25 psig. b. When gage W-GA-10 indica- Allow trapped air in dome to vent. Throttle valve W-V-27 as necessary to tion is greater than 25 psig, open ensure Sonar Dome pressure remains W-V-27; observe air/water mix- above 25 psig as indicated on gage ture venting through valve W-V- W-GA-10. 27. Throttle valve W-V-17 as necessary to maintain W-GA-10 indication below 39.5 psig. c. Close W-V-27 when a steady Throttle valve W-V-17 as necessary to stream of water is observed vent- increase W-GA-10 indication to 39.5 ing through valve W-V-27. psig. d. Shut W-V-17 when gage W-GA-10 indicates 39.5 psig. e. Open valves W-V-15 and W-V- 18. f. Shut valve W-V-24. 5. Secure freshwater fill piping. a. Shut valve W-V-61. b. Shut freshwater pier connection valve. c. Open valve W-V-62. Freshwater fill piping drains. d. Disconnect freshwater fill hose from valve W-V-6. e. Shut valves W-V-6 and W-V- 62. 6. Pressurize Sonar Dome from Firemain: a. Open valve W-V-5. Observe gage W-GA-39 indication of 50 psig. b. Open W-V-24. 7. Purge Digital Gage W-GA-10 If Digital Gage W-GA-10 is installed. Sensing Line. NOTE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL ACTIVATE THE AUDIBLE LOW-PRESSURE ALARMS. CONTACT SONAR CONTROL AND COMBAT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE CENTER WATCH- STANDERS AND INFORM TO DISREGARD SONAR DOME LOW PRESSURE ALARMS. a. Remove cap from W-V-46 test point connection. b. Allow water to vent through Ensure W-GA-10 is indicating normal valve W-V-46 for 2 minutes operating pressure (39.5 psig). (minimum) until a steady stream of water is observed. Use a bucket to contain water. Recap test point connection of valve W-V-46.

2-14 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-5. Air-To-Freshwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Steps to Perform Observe Checks and Adjustments 8. Depressurize LP Air Piping: a. Shut valve A-V-110. b. Open drain valve A-V-155 and bypass valve A-V-166. c. Open valve A-V-125. Vent air pressure until gage A-GA-109, A-GA-106 and A-GA-123 indicate 0 psig. 9. Remove tags from underwater telephone, sonar set AN/SQS-53C transmitter power supply, alarm panels main power switch, air compressors and passageway to airlock sounding tube: NOTE THE SONAR DOME WILL DEVELOP AIR POCKETS UP TO 72 HOURS AFTER AIR TO WATER INTER- CHANGE HAS BEEN COMPLETED. a. Open W-V-27 valve slightly Allow trapped air in dome to vent. every 4 to 6 hours, or as necessary, to vent air pockets from Sonar Dome. b. Close W-V-27 when only water W-GA-10 increases and stabilizes at 39.5 Adjust W-V-16 if required. Repeat for is exhausting. (+ 2, -0) psig. the next 72 hours to completely purge all air trapped in dome. Alarm panels indicate pressurized water (IAW Table 2-10.) c. Notify Sonar Control and Com- bat Systems Maintenance Center to regard all further Sonar Dome alarms. d. Notify Command Duty Officer of completion of maintenance; Inform CDO Sonar Dome is water ﬁlled and pressurized at normal operating pressure. Dome pressurization system is now ready for next procedure, Make Ready for Sea Procedure Table 2-6.

Table 2-6. Make Ready for Sea Procedure Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES ARE NECESSARY TO ENSURE AUTOMATIC OPERATION AND MAIN- TENANCE OF DOME PRESSURE WITH FIREMAIN AFTER FRESHWATER FILL. 1. Pressurize dome from Ensure availability of ﬁremain seawa- ﬁremain seawater supply. ter and 115 VAC supplies.

2-15 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-6. Make Ready for Sea Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments a. Set valves IAW Table 2-3. Panels indicate pressurized water (IAW Table pressurized freshwater. 2-10.) b. Close W-V-24. c. Close W-V-61 and freshwater cutout on dock. d. Open W-V-62 to drain freshwater line. e. Disconnect freshwater hose from W-V-6. f. Close W-V-6 and W-V-62. g. Open W-V-1 and W-V-5. W-GA-38 indicates 150 (±25) psig W-GA-39 Bleed air from W-GA-38, W-GA-39 indicates 50 (±5) psig W-GA-10 indicates 39.5 and W-GA-41. Adjust W-V-7 and (+ 2, -0) psig. W-V-16 as required. h. Open W-V-24. W-GA-10 indicates 39.5 (+ 2, -0) psig. Compare W-GA-10 (minus Head Pressure) to W-GA-41. Verify that all valves are E-PN-44, DOME FULL lit E-PN-45, WTR V Position all valves IAW Table 2-3. positioned IAW Table 2-3. OFF lit. i. Open W-V-27 to vent any Steady stream of water. Repeat for ﬁrst 72 hours of underway. remaining trapped air in dome. j. Remove W-V-6 from forecastle and store in dome control station.

2-16 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

NOTE Conduct an operational risk management (ORM) brief. Brief shall be conducted prior to performing a water to air interchange for any reason. Attendees shall include the Commanding Officer, Executive Officer, Combat Systems Officer, Weapons Officer, Anti-Submarine Officer, and all STG’s and cover the following topics. 1. Current status of the SDRW. I.E. is it in a ROUTINE, MONITOR, or NO WATERBORNE ENTRY status? The current status is promulgated at the MUWINFO desk at HTTPS://PEOIWS.NAVY.MIL. Follow the link to sonar domes. 2. Date of last radiographic inspection. 3. Normal and emergent procedures. 4. Safety. 5. Communications plan.

WARNING

IN ACCORDANCE WITH COMNAVSEASYSCOM MESSAGES P192003Z APRIL 1984, AND P030205Z AUGUST 1984, TO PREVENT THE REMOTE POSSIBILITY OF A SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW COL- LAPSE DURING DOME ENTRY, THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE TO BE TAKEN PRIOR TO DOME ENTRY WHILE SHIPS ARE WATERBORNE: DIVERS WILL CONDUCT AN UNDERWATER INSPECTION OF THE SDRW EXTERIOR WHILE THE DOME IS PRESSURIZED WITH WATER TO 39.5 (+ 2, -0) PSIG. CHECK FOR UNUSUAL CHANGES IN THE SDRW CONTOUR INCLUDING BULGES, DEPRESSIONS, AND VERTICAL CRACKS IN THE SPLICE REGION. IF THE FOREGOING UNDERWATER INSPECTION IS SATISFACTORY, PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM WATER-TO-AIR INTERCHANGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL OR TEST PROCEDURES. PRESSURIZE SONAR DOME TO 22 PSIG WITH AIR, THEN DIVERS REINSPECT THE DOME EXTERIOR AND REPORT DEPRESSIONS, BULGES, AIR BUBBLES, OR VERTICAL CRACKS. IF UNDERWATER INSPECTIONS ABOVE SHOW NO DISCREPANCIES, PERSONNEL ARE AUTHORIZED TO PROCEED WITH THE DOME ENTRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE MRC’S OR TEST PROCE- DURES. IF EITHER UNDERWATER INSPECTION ABOVE IDENTIFIES ANY DISCREPANCIES, THE DOME ENTRY SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED. NOTIFY NAVSEA IMMEDIATELY. UNDERWATER SDRW INSPECTION FOR DOME ENTRY SHALL COVER, AS A MINIMUM, TWELVE FEET EACH SIDE OF THE SDRW CEN- TERLINE FROM UPPER TO LOWER STEEL AND RUBBER INTERFACE. WATERBORNE DOME ENTRY IN SHIPS WITH KNOWN SPLICE DAMAGE FOR PURPOSES OTHER THAN PIERSIDE RADIOGRAPHY SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED WITHOUT NAVSEA CONCURRENCE AND A NAVSEA TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE PRESENT. ALL APPLICABLE MANDATORY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN ANY TYPE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED ON A PRESSURIZED SYSTEM. THE SUPERVISOR SHALL MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL ASSIGNED TO WORK AT CONTROL VALVES, GAGES AND SOUND POWER PHONES ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND THE APPROPRI- ATE MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN VARIOUS TYPES OF EMERGENCIES. USE BYPASS VALVES WITH CARE AND DISCRETION. CAUTION

DOME CONTROL STATION TO BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES.

2-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

NOTE THE NORMAL OPERATION TO REMOVE WATER FROM THE SONAR DOME IS BY SHIP’S SERVICE LP AIR FORCING THE DOME WATER THROUGH THE EDUCTOR AND DISCHARGING IT OVERBOARD. 1. System requirements: a. Establish Dome Control Sta- tion watch with sound powered X25J phone. b. Tag main power switch and Ensure availability of LP air and 115 air compressors to prevent VAC during entire evolution. deenergization: DO NOT DEENERGIZE. c. Tag sonar transmitter power Ensure sonar transmitter power supply supply and AN/UQN or and AN/UQN or AN/WQC are AN/WQC. deenergized. d. Verify position of valves IAW W-GA-41 reads 39.5 psig minus Head Table 2-3. Pressure. e. Verify that alarm panel indications are IAW Table 2-10. CAUTION

LIMIT THE USE OF EDUCTOR W-F-13 TO SWEEPING RESIDUAL WATER FROM SONAR DOME WHILE PRESSURIZED WITH AIR. ANY OTHER OPERATION OF EDUCTOR SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED DUE TO RISK OF COLLAPSING THE SONAR DOME. c. Open A-V-110. A-GA-109 and A-GA-106 indicates 125 (100 to 155) psig. d. Throttle open A-V-148. A-GA-123 indicates 22 (+1, -5) psig. Adjust A-V-119 as required. e. Close A-V-155. f. Open A-V-166. g. Close A-V-156. when only air drains. h. Verify air circulation in air A-GA-133 indicates 14 (±1) psig A-F-124 Adjust A-V-134 as required. Throttle A-V- panel. indicates 40-50 SCFM. 148 as required. i. Close A-V-166. CAUTION

2-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments j. Open W-V-27 until gage Observe water venting through valve If alarm does not sound at 25 (±1) psig, W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig. W-V-27 into funnel F-92. adjust low-pressure microswitch in Observe decreasing Sonar Dome pressure W-GA-10 using applicable MRC. as indicated on gage W-GA-10. Low water-pressure alarm sounds at 25 (±1) psig. LOW PRESSURE light is lit. W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig. k. Close W-V-27. Station personnel by E-V-21 to verify valve position. l. Open W-V-11, W-V-(4-41-2), W-V-49, DC-V-96, A-V-127, A-V-125 and DC-V-101. m. At control panel E-PN-44, Observe LOW PRESSURE light remains set Solenoid Valve E-V-21 lit. switch to Open position. Observe that indicator E-F-33 illuminates; this veriﬁes that Solenoid Valve E-V-21 is in the OPEN position. Observe gage W-GA-10 indication decrease to approximately 17 to 19 psig, and then stabilize at approximately 18 psig as air pressure is applied. Observe Flowmeter A-F-124; verify air ﬂow rate of 15 to 20 SCFM. Observe Sonar Dome overboard discharge port; verify that water is being discharged.

WARNING

W-V-49 MUST BE MANNED DURING TEST OF E-F-32. SHUT VALVE W-V-49 IF DOME PRESSURE AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10 DROPS BELOW 11 PSIG. NOTE AS SONAR DOME IS DEWATERED, A PARTIAL VACUUM IN GAGE A-GA-167 GAGE LINE MAY DEVELOP. THIS MAY RESULT IN INADVERTENT CLOSURE OF SOLENOID VALVE E-V-21 BY ACTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH E-F-32. OBSERVE THAT VALVE E-V-21 POSITION INDICATOR E-F-33 REMAINS ILLUMINATED TO ENSURE SOLENOID VALVE E-V-21 REMAINS IN THE OPEN POSITION DURING DEWATERING PROCEDURE. n. At control panel E-PN-44, Alarm bell silences and Dome Full indica- verify that the following. tor extinguishes in approximately 10 minutes. LOW PRESS indicator remains lit. o. After DOME FULL indicator extinguishes and Low-Pressure audible alarms cease, shut valves W-V-49 and DC-V-96. p. At control panel E-PN-44, shut solenoid E-V-21.

2-19 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments q. At Airlock Passageway, W-GA-167 may now be used to monitor remove caps from Test Point sonar dome pressure. Connection valves A-V-160 and A-V-100; allow all water to vent from gage lines; then recap Test Point Connection valves A-V- 160 and A-V-100. r. At Dome Control Station, Shut valve A-V-127. CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRES- SURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. s. Open valve W-V-27; continue Observe air venting through valve W-V- to vent air until gages W-GA-10 27. and A-GA-167 (located in Audible Low Air pressure alarms should Airlock passageway) indicate activate on control panel E-PN-44 and 13.0 (12 to 13) psig; then shut alarm panel E-PN-45. valve W-V-27. t. If alarms do not activate, perform the following. (1) With gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicating 13.0 psig, slowly turn Pressure Switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise until audible alarm activates on control panel E-PN-44. (2) Open valve A-V-127; apply air pressure to Sonar Dome until gage W-GA-10 indication exceeds 13.0 psig and audible alarms silence, then shut valve A-V-127. (3) Open valve W-V-27; vent air through valve W-V-27 until gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig. (4) Slowly turn pressure switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise or counterclockwise, as necessary, to activate audible alarm on control panel E-PN-44 when gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig.

2-20 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments u. Open valve A-V-127. Observe pressure increase on gage W-GA- 10. Observe Low Air pressure audible alarms cease when gage W-GA-10 indication is greater than 13.0 psig. v. Open valve DC-V-96. w. When gage W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig, open valve W-V- 49. x. At control panel E-PN-44, set solenoid valve E-V-21 switch to Open position. CAUTION

WATER AND AIR BOARDS AT DOME CONTROL STATION (0.5-28-0-Q) MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES DURING PERFORMANCE OF THIS PROCEDURE. GAGE W-GA-10 MUST BE MONITORED CONTINU- OUSLY DURING WATER TO AIR INTERCHANGE PROCEDURE. NOTE APPROXIMATELY 3.5 HOURS WILL ELAPSE TO COMPLETE WATER TO AIR INTERCHANGE PROCE- DURE. OBSERVE INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE OF 22 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10. OBSERVE AIR FLOW RATE OF 15 TO 20 SCFM AS INDICATED ON FLOWMETER A-F-124. Observe that DOME EMPTY indicator As water backﬂushes into crawl space illuminates on control panel E-PN-44. under the transducer array due to E-V-21 Solenoid Valve E-V-21 shuts automati- closure, the DOME EMPTY indicator on cally. control panel E-PN-44 may extinguish. y. At control panel E-PN-44, return solenoid valve E-V-21 toggle switch to CLOSED position. z. At Airlock Passageway, shut valve W-V-49. aa. Shut W-V-11 and W-V-(4- 41-2). 2. Circulate Air through Sonar Dome. a. Vent air system exhaust piping and exhaust hose A-H-120. (1) Shut valve A-V-127. (2) Open valve W-V-27 and W-GA-10 indicates 14 (±1) psig. vent air until gage W-GA-10 indicates 14 psig. (3) When gage W-GA-10 indi- Alarm panels indicate pressurized air cates 14 psig, shut valve W-V- (IAW Table 2-10.) 27. (4) Shut valve A-V-145.

2-21 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

NOTE OPENING VALVE A-V-129 TOO RAPIDLY IN THE NEXT STEP MAY ALLOW ACCUMULATED WATER IN AIR EXHAUST PIPING AND HOSE A-H-120 TO PASS THROUGH FLOAT CHECK VALVE A-V-130 INTO AIR SYSTEM EXHAUST. IF WATER RISES IN FLOAT CHECK VALVE A-V-130 SIGHT GLASS, SHUT VALVE A-V-129 UNTIL WATER LEVEL RECEDES. (5) Open valves A-V-166, DC-V-102 and A-V-129 for approximately 3 minutes; allow water to vent from exhaust hose A-H-120. (6) Shut valves A-V-166 and A-V-129. (7) Open valves A-V-127 and A-V-156. (8) Partially crack open valve Observe water venting through drain valve If water level rises in sight glass A-V-130, A-V-129. A-V-156. throttle A-V-129. Continue until all water drains through A-V-156. (9) When all water has drained, shut valve A-V-156. 3. Commence Air Circulation Through Sonar Dome.

WARNING

ENSURE AIR BEING SUPPLIED TO SONAR DOME IS NOT CONTAMINATED BY OUTSIDE INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITIES, SHIPBOARD PAINTING, OR ACCIDENTAL RELEASE OR SPILL OF SOLVENTS, ETC. a. Open valve A-V-129 fully. b. Slowly open A-V-145. Observe sonar dome exhaust air passing If valve A-V-134 should start to chatter, through Backpressure Regulator valve crack open bypass valve A-V-131 and A-V-134. resume ﬂow through Backpressure Regu- lator valve A-V-134. Observe A-GA-133 indicates 14 (±1) psig. If not, adjust Backpressure Regulator A-V-134 as required. (1) Lower pressure indication by adjusting Backpressure Regulator valve A-V-134 adjustment screw counterclockwise. (2) Raise pressure indication by adjusting Backpressure Regulator valve A-V-134 adjusting screw clockwise. Observe that Flowmeter A-F-124 indicates Throttle valve A-V-148 as necessary to 40 to 50 SCFM. obtain required airﬂow rate.

WARNING

ENSURE AIRLOCK (5-28-0-T) COMPARTMENT MUST BE CERTIFIED AS GAS FREE BEFORE ENTERING THIS SPACE.

2-22 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-7. Water-to-Air Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments c. Verify valve alignment at Airlock. (1) A-V-137 Open (2) A-V-138 Shut (3) A-V-157 Shut (4) A-V-161 Open (5) A-V-163 Open (6) A-V-170 Open

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

DOME CONTROL STATION TO BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES. SONAR DOME ENTRY SHALL BE PERFORMED IAW NAVY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR FORCES AFLOAT PER OPNAVINST 5100 SERIES. COMPLIANCE WITH ADDITIONAL PROCEDURAL AND ADMIN- ISTRATIVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AS DOCUMENTED IN FIGURE 2-1 AND TABLE 2-8 IS MANDATORY. NOTE THE DIVISION OFFICER SHALL ASSIGN A SUPERVISOR. THE DESIGNATED SUPERVISOR (E-7 OR ABOVE) SHALL OVERSEE ALL PHASES OF THIS PROCEDURE AND ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH ALL ADMINISTRATIVE, PROCEDURAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. SUPERVISOR SHALL CONDUCT A SAFETY BRIEFING WITH ALL PERSONNEL WHO ARE ASSIGNED TO ENTER THE PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME PRIOR TO CONDUCTING ENTRY. SAFETY BRIEFING SHALL INCLUDE MEDICAL ASPECTS OF HYPERBARIC SAFETY AS PRESENTED IN CHAPTER 1 OF THIS TECH- NICAL MANUAL. 1. Preliminary Requirements. Dome control station watch supervises dome entry, ensures compliance with NAVSEA Safety Instructions, and monitors dome pressure and air ﬂow (14 (±1) psig, 40-50 scfm). Forecastle watch takes action to keep ﬂoating objects from dome area. a. Perform water-to-air interchange, IAW Table 2-6. b. Establish dome control station watch with X25J communications to airlock passageway and forecastle.

WARNING

ENSURE THAT ALL NON-ESSENTIAL USE OF LP AIR IS SECURED WHILE MEN ARE WORKING IN THE SONAR DOME. AIRLOCK MUST BE GAS FREE BEFORE ENTERING, AND ADEQUATE VENTILATION MUST BE PROVIDED WHILE MEN ARE WORKING INSIDE. ENSURE AIR HAS BEEN CIRCULATING IN DOME AT LEAST 4 HOURS PRIOR TO DOME ENTRY. OPERATOR MUST BE PRESENT DURING INTERCHANGE.

2-23 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

WHEN THE SONAR DOME IS DEWATERED AND PRESSURIZED ON AIR, GAGE W-GA-10 IS THE PRI- MARY INDICATOR OF INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE. INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE ALSO IS INDICATED ON GAGES A-GA-167, A-GA-136 AND A-GA-133. WHEN THE SONAR DOME IS PRESSURIZED BY AIR, THE INDICATIONS OF ALL FOUR GAGES SHOULD BE IDENTICAL AT ALL TIMES (+/- 1 PSIG). IF THE INDICATION OF ANY ONE OF THE FOUR GAGES DOES NOT AGREE WITH THE REMAINING GAGE INDICATIONS, THE PARTICULAR GAGE MUST BE CONSIDERED SUSPECT AND IS TO BE DISREGARDED. THE REMAINING GAGES THEN BECOME THE PRIMARY INDICATORS OF INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE. NOTE THIS TASK PROVIDES PROCEDURE FOR DOME ENTRY AND INSPECTION. c. Check of gages and Make ﬁnal check of gages and Flowmeter Flowmeter indications. indications. Do not proceed with Sonar Dome entry until all gage indications are within the following operational requirements. (1) Gage A-GA-123:14 (13 to 16) psig (2) Gage W-GA-10:14 (13 to 16) psig (3) Gage A-GA-133:14 (13 to 16) psig (4) Gage A-GA-167:14 (13 to 16) psig (5) Flowmeter A-F-124: 45 (40-50) SCFM

2-24 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments d. Stow all required materials, tools, and equipment in Airlock. (1) Two battle lanterns (2) Two sound-powered phones (3) Sweep hose W-H-36 (4) Portable Emergency (E-call) Communications panel E-PN- 179 (5) 18 inch pipe wrench (6) 12 inch ruler (7) Screwdriver set (8) Wrench set (9) Silicone Compound (10) Rags, Chalk (11) Wire brush (12) Replacement gasket material; ensure replacement access scuttle gasket is of the required size and is in satisfactory condition. (13) Provide copy of MRC R-3. Ensure all materials, tools and equipment necessary to conduct access scuttle maintenance are provided and are in proper working order. e. Open A-V-141. A-GA-140 indicates 0 psig. CAUTION

IF AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY-TO-AIRLOCK HATCH IS FOUND DEFECTIVE DURING INSPECTION, DO NOT PROCEED FURTHER WITH DOME ENTRY UNTIL NECESSARY REPAIRS HAVE BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. f. Close A-V-141. g. Open airlock passageway-to- airlock hatch placing equipment inside. (1) Inspect airlock passageway- (a) Corroded or deteriorated hinges and to-airlock hatch. Look for: latching mechanism (b) Cut or loose rubber gasket (c) Eroded knife-edge surface (2) Perform chalk test, knife edge to gasket; verify that chalk appears around entire gasket perimeter. (3) Lubricate airlock passageway-to-airlock hatch, hinges, and latching mechanism with a light coat of grease.

2-25 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments (4) Close and open airlock passageway-to-airlock hatch to verify ease of operation and distribution of lubricant. h. Checks and Adjustments. If Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI), manufactured by Volumetrics, Inc. is installed as gage W-GA-10, clear recorder memory at this time. (1) Open front cover of Digital Gage W-GA-10. (2) Repeatedly press CHANGE MODE button until MEMORY FUNCTION light illuminates. (3) Press CHANGE FUNC- TION button repeatedly until CLEAR MEMORY - START light illuminates. (4) Press ENTER button. (5) Repeatedly press CHANGE MODE button until NORMAL FUNCTION light illuminates. (6) Close front cover of Digital Gage W-GA-10. (7) Press CHANGE FUNC- TION toggle switch repeatedly on front cover to display Real Time Pressure. i. Enter airlock (3 men minimum) and establish communication between airlock, airlock passageway, and dome control station. j. Remove pipe cap down stream of A-V-138 (if applicable). k. Close and dog Passageway- to-Airlock access scuttle.

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEP WILL INITIATE PRESSURIZATION OF THE AIRLOCK. TO MINIMIZE RISK OF PERSONNEL INJURY, RATE OF PRESSURE INCREASE SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 PSIG PER MINUTE DURING THE PRESSURIZATION PROCESS. IF ANY DISCOMFORT IS EXPERIENCED AS A RESULT OF THE RATE OF PRESSURIZATION, THROTTLE VALVE A-V-138 AS NECESSARY TO ESTAB- LISH A RATE OF PRESSURIZATION AT WHICH PERSONNEL CAN COMFORTABLY EQUALIZE PRES- SURE IN INTERNAL BODY CAVITIES.

2-26 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments l. Partially open test fitting on A-V-161 to bleed water out of gage line to A-GA-136. m. Pressurize Airlock, slowly A-GA-136 remains at 14 psig and A-GA- crack open valve A-V-138; 139 indication increases from 0 to 14 establish a comfortable rate of psig. pressurization. NOTE THE TIME THAT PRESSURIZATION WAS COMMENCED MUST BE RECORDED TO ENSURE MAXIMUM STAY TIME OF 240 CONSECUTIVE MINUTES IS NOT EXCEEDED. (1) Safety Supervisor, record “Dive Start Time” of pressurization on Dome Entry Report Form. (2) Continue pressurizing Observe that air flow through valve A-V- When air flow through valve A-V-138 Airlock; 138 stops automatically when pressure stops, and pressure stabilizes, Airlock between Sonar Dome and Airlock equal- pressurization is complete. ize. (3) Shut valve A-V-138. (4) Safety Supervisor, record “Minutes Required To Pressur- ize” on Dome Entry Report form. CAUTION

IF AIRLOCK-TO-DOME HATCH IS FOUND DEFECTIVE DURING INSPECTION, DO NOT PROCEED FUR- THER WITH DOME ENTRY UNTIL NECESSARY REPAIRS HAVE BEEN ACCOMPLISHED n. Open airlock-to-sonar dome access scuttle. o. Perform access scuttle maintenance in accordance with MRC R-3. 2. Enter Sonar Dome com- Two persons minimum, taking battle lan- partment terns and communication panel with S.P. phones. a. Close, but do NOT dog, Airlock to Sonar Dome Access scuttle.

WARNING

ENSURE SWITCH E-F-182 IS OFF. b. Remove caps from dome X25J and communication panel E-PN-179 E-call receptacles. Connect sound-powered phones and E-call leads to receptacles.

2-27 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments c. At Airlock Passageway, set Establish communications with airlock, E-Call switch E-F-182 to on. airlock passageway, and dome control station. Verify E-call and sound-powered phone operation between Sonar Dome and Airlock, Airlock Passageway, and Dome Control Station. d. Remove access cover from baffle plate.

2-28 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments e. Sweep residual water from Sonar Dome. (1) Remove pipe cap and connect sweep hose W-H-36 to valve W-V-23 in Sonar Dome. (2) At Passageway (1-42-01-L) open W-V-11 and W-V-(4-41-2). W-V-11 valve is located in the Administration Office and remotely operated from passageway 1-42-01-1. (3) At Dome Control Station, open W-V-1 and W-V-12. (4) At Dome Control Station, verify that gage W-GA-40 indicates 20 inches Hg to 40 inches Hg (vacuum). (5) At Airlock Passageway, open valve W-V-22. (6) At Sonar Dome, open valves W-V-23 and W-V-48. (7) Verify suction at end of sweep hose W-H-36. (8) Sweep residual water from Sonar Dome. Place end of sweep hose in dome access recess until maximum water is removed. (9) Cease sweeping when residual water is removed. (10) At Sonar Dome, shut valves W-V-23 and W-V-48. (11) At Airlock Passageway, shut valve W-V-22. (12) At Dome Control Station, shut valve W-V-12. (13) At passage (1-42-01-L) shut W-V-11. W-V-11 valve is located in the Administration Office and remotely operated from passageway 1-42-01-1. (14) Shut DC valve W-V-(4-41- 2); valve is remotely operated from passageway 1-42-01-1 or on earlier hulls valve locations in Sonar One (1-18-0-Q) on the deck. (15) Disconnect sweep hose W-H-36 from valve; reinstall cap on end of eductor piping; stow sweep hose W-H-36 in Airlock. 2-29 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments f. At Sonar Dome, screw cap on end of Fill Hose W-H-37. NOTE PERIODICALLY RECIRCULATE AIR THROUGH AIRLOCK BY SLIGHTLY OPENING VALVES A-V-138 AND A-V-157 FOR APPROXIMATELY 1 MINUTE, THEN SHUT VALVES A-V-157 AND A-V-138. g. Inspect Sonar Dome interior; (1) No foreign matter is in sonar dome and verify the following: space. (2) Hose and cables are securely clamped. (3) Sound damping material is securely fastened. (4) Zinc anodes are in satisfactory condition (schedule replacement if zinc anodes are deteriorated more than 50%). Replace with 9Z 534000-813-6058, 6x12x1-1/4”. (5) Baffle plate is undamaged and securely fastened. Measure clearance between baffle plate and Sonar Dome; record minimum measurement port and starboard. Verify that clearance remains unchanged from previous entry. PORT ______inches STARBOARD ______inches (6) Rubber dome is free of cuts, gouges, pits, or separations. (7) Transducer elements appear undamaged. h. Upon completion of Sonar Dome inspection, notify Airlock Passageway and Dome Control Station watchstanders of intention to exit Sonar Dome. i. Remove cap from end of Fill Hose W-H-37; stow cap on bracket in Airlock. j. Verify that valve A-V-158 is shut. k. Reinstall access cover on baffle plate. l. Remove all foreign material, debris, tools, sound powered phones, and battle lanterns from Sonar Dome compartment. m. Verify that sound powered phone and E-Call jacks are securely capped. 3. Exit Sonar Dome. a. Inventory all material taken into dome.

2-30 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments b. Close and Dog Airlock to Sonar Dome access scuttle. Dome phone monitor inform airlock and dome control station watches of intention to exit dome. c. Safety Supervisor, record “Bottom Time” on Dome Entry Report form. 4. Depressurize Airlock.

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF FOLLOWING STEP WILL INITIATE DEPRESSURIZATION OF AIRLOCK. TO MINI- MIZE RISK OF PERSONNEL INJURY, RATE OF PRESSURE DECREASE SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 PSIG PER MINUTE DURING THE DEPRESSURIZATION PROCEDURE. IF ANY DISCOMFORT IS EXPERIENCED AS RESULT OF THE RATE OF DEPRESSURIZATION, THROTTLE VALVE A-V-157 AS NECESSARY TO ESTAB- LISH A RATE OF DEPRESSURIZATION AT WHICH PERSONNEL CAN COMFORTABLY EQUALIZE PRES- SURE IN INTERNAL BODY CAVITIES. WHILE PRESSURE IS DECREASING, PERSONNEL IN AIRLOCK SHALL BE WARNED TO BREATH NORMALLY. DO NOT HOLD BREATH WHILE PRESSURE IS DECREASING. a. At Airlock, verify that valve A-V-138 is shut. b. At Airlock, slowly crack open Safety Supervisor, note time of day. valve A-V-157. Throttle valve A-V-157 as required to establish a comfortable rate of decompression. (1) At Airlock, observe gage A-GA-136 remains at 14 psig and A-GA-139 indication decreasing from 14 psig to 0 psig. (2) Continue depressurizing Airlock; observe that airﬂow through valve A-V- 157 stops automatically when pressure between Airlock and Airlock Passageway equalize. c. When airﬂow through valve A-V-157 stops, Airlock depressurization is complete; shut valve A-V-157. d. Open Airlock to Passageway Safety Supervisor, record “Minutes access scuttle. Required to Depressurize” on Dome Entry Report Form. e. Airlock sound powered phone watchstander secure. f. Remove all foreign material, debris, tools, sound power phones, and battle lanterns from Airlock compartment.

2-31 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-8. Sonar Dome Entry Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments g. Verify that service outlets are securely capped; turn off power outlet switches E-F-181 and E-F-182. h. Install pipe cap down stream of A-V-138 (if installed). i. Close Airlock to Passageway access scuttle. j. Secure Forecastle, Airlock Passageway and Engineering Room Watchstanders. k. Safety Supervisor, complete remaining items on Dome Entry Report Form and mail to the address on the form.

2-32 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-1. Sonar Dome Entry Checkoff List (Sheet 1)

2-33 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-1. Sonar Dome Entry Checkoff List (Sheet 2)

2-34 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-2. Sonar Dome Interior Inspection Items Checklist (Sheet 1)

2-35 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-2. Sonar Dome Interior Inspection Items Checklist (Sheet 2)

2-36 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1. Figure 2-3. Sonar Dome Entry (Dive) Report

2-37 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

DOME CONTROL STATION TO BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES. CAUTION

THE SONAR DOME SHALL NORMALLY BE FILLED WITH FRESHWATER. FRESHWATER IS USED TO MINIMIZE THE CORROSIVE EFFECTS OF SALTWATER ON SDPS COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENTS INSTALLED WITHIN THE SONAR DOME. THE USE OF FRESHWATER SHALL BE WAIVED WHEN SHIP IS OPERATING IN EXTREMELY COLD CLIMATES. SALTWATER SHALL BE USED IN LIEU OF FRESH- WATER TO PREVENT FREEZING. CAUTION

IF FRESHWATER-TO-SEAWATER INTERCHANGE MUST BE PERFORMED AT SEA, SHIP’S SPEED MUST BE FIVE KNOTS OR LESS AND SEA STATE 2 OR LESS. NOTE THE NORMAL OPERATION TO REMOVE WATER FROM THE SONAR DOME IS BY SHIP’S SERVICE LP AIR FORCING THE DOME WATER THROUGH THE EDUCTOR AND DISCHARGING IT OVERBOARD. 1. System requirements: a. Establish Dome Control Sta- tion watch with sound powered X25J phone. b. Tag main power switch and Ensure availability of LP air and 115 air compressors to prevent VAC during entire evolution. deenergization: DO NOT DEENERGIZE. c. Tag sonar transmitter power Ensure sonar transmitter power supply supply and AN/UQN or and AN/UQN or AN/WQC are AN/WQC. deenergized. d. Verify position of valves IAW W-GA-41 reads 39.5 psig minus Head Table 2-3. Pressure. e. Verify that alarm panel indications are IAW Table 2-10.

2-38 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

IF AT SEA, SHIP’S SPEED MUST BE LESS THAN FIVE KNOTS AND SEA STATE 2 OR LESS. 2. Water removal and air Ensure availability of LP air and 115 pressurization. VAC supplies. a. Set valves IAW Table 2-2, Panels indicate pressurized water (IAW pressurized seawater. Table 2-10.) b. Close A-V-148. c. Verify A-V-110 is open. A-GA-109 indicates 125 (+ 30, -25) psig. d. Throttle open A-V-148. A-GA-123 indicates 22 (+1, -5) psig. Adjust A-V-119 as required. e. Close A-V-155. f. Open A-V-125. g. Open A-V-166. h. Close A-V-156 when only air drains. i. Verify air circulation in air A-GA-133 indicates 14 (±1) psig A-F- Adjust A-V-134 as required. Throttle panel. 124 indicates 40-50 SCFM. A-V-148 as required. j. Close A-V-166 and A-V-125. CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRES- SURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10. k. Open W-V-27 until gage Observe water venting through valve If alarm does not sound at 25 (±1) psig, W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig. W-V-27 into funnel F-92. adjust low-pressure microswitch in Observe decreasing Sonar Dome pressure W-GA-10 using applicable MRC. as indicated on gage W-GA-10. Low water-pressure alarm sounds at 25 (±1) psig. LOW PRESSURE light is lit. W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig. l. Close W-V-27. Station personnel by E-V-21 to verify valve position. m. Open W-V-11, W-V-(4-41-2), W-V-49, DC-V-96, A-V-127, A-V-125 and DC-V-101.

2-39 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments n. At control panel E-PN-44, set Observe LOW PRESSURE light remains Solenoid Valve E-V-21 switch to lit. OPEN position. Observe that indicator E-F-33 illuminates; this veriﬁes that Solenoid Valve E-V-21 is in the OPEN position. Observe gage W-GA-10 indication decrease to approximately 17 to 19 psig, and then stabilize at approximately 18 psig as air pressure is applied. Observe Flowmeter A-F-124; verify air ﬂow rate of 15 to 20 SCFM. Observe Sonar Dome overboard discharge port; verify that water is being discharged.

WARNING

W-V-49 MUST BE MANNED DURING TEST OF E-F-32. SHUT VALVE W-V-49 IF DOME PRESSURE AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10 DROPS BELOW 11 PSIG. NOTE AS SONAR DOME IS DEWATERED, A PARTIAL VACUUM IN GAGE A-GA-167 GAGE LINE MAY DEVELOP. THIS MAY RESULT IN INADVERTENT CLOSURE OF SOLENOID VALVE E-V-21 BY ACTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH E-F-32. OBSERVE THAT VALVE E-V-21 POSITION INDICATOR E-F-33 REMAINS ILLUMINATED TO ENSURE SOLENOID VALVE E-V-21 REMAINS IN THE OPEN POSITION DURING DEWATERING PROCEDURE. o. At control panel E-PN-44, Alarm bell silences and Dome Full indi- verify the following. cator extinguishes in approximately 10 minutes. LOW PRESS indicator remains lit. p. After DOME FULL indicator extinguishes and Low-Pressure audible alarms cease, shut valve W-V-49. q. At control panel E-PN-44, shut solenoid E-V-21. r. At Airlock Passageway, remove caps from Test Point Connection valves A-V-160 and A-V-100; allow all water to vent from gage lines; then recap Test Point Connection valves A-V- 160 and A-V-100. s. At Dome Control Station, Shut valve A-V-127.

2-40 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRES- SURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. t. Open valve W-V-27; continue Observe air venting through valve to vent air until gages W-GA-10 W-V-27 and A-GA-167 (located in Audible Low Air pressure alarms should Airlock passageway) indicate activate on control panel E-PN-44 and 13.0 (12 to 13) psig; then shut alarm panel E-PN-45. valve W-V-27. u. If alarms do not activate, perform the following. (1) With gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicating 13.0 psig, slowly turn Pressure Switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise until audible alarm activates on control panel E-PN-44. (2) Open valve A-V-127; apply air pressure to Sonar Dome until gage W-GA-10 indication exceeds 13.0 psig and audible alarms silence, then shut valve A-V-127. (3) Open valve W-V-27; vent air through valve W-V-27 until gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig. (4) Slowly turn pressure switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise or counterclockwise, as necessary, to activate audible alarm on control panel E-PN-44 when gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig. v. Open valve A-V-127. Observe pressure increase on gage W-GA-10. Observe Low Air pressure audible alarms cease when gage W-GA-10 indication is greater than 13.0 psig. w. When gage W-GA-10 indicates 22 psig, open valve W-V- 49. x. At control panel E-PN-44, set solenoid valve E-V-21 switch to Open position.

2-41 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments

CAUTION

WATER AND AIR BOARDS AT DOME CONTROL STATION (0.5-28-0-Q) MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES DURING PERFORMANCE OF THIS PROCEDURE. GAGE W-GA-10 MUST BE MONITORED CON- TINUOUSLY DURING WATER TO AIR INTERCHANGE PROCEDURE. NOTE APPROXIMATELY 3.5 HOURS WILL ELAPSE TO COMPLETE WATER TO AIR INTERCHANGE PROCE- DURE. OBSERVE INTERNAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE OF 22 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA- 10. OBSERVE AIR FLOW RATE OF 15 TO 20 SCFM AS INDICATED ON FLOWMETER A-F-124. Observe that DOME EMPTY indicator As water backﬂushes into crawl space illuminates on control panel E-PN-44. under the transducer array due to Solenoid Valve E-V-21 shuts automati- E-V-21 closure, the DOME EMPTY cally. indicator on control panel E-PN-44 may extinguish. y. At control panel E-PN-44, return solenoid valve E-V-21 toggle switch to CLOSED position. z. At Airlock Passageway, shut valve W-V-49. aa. Shut W-V-11 and W-V-(4- 41-2). 3. Air-to seawater interchange system requirements: a. Establish Dome Control Sta- tion watch with sound-powered X25J phone communications with all applicable stations. b. Ensure that ﬁremain is >125 W-GA-38: 150 (+25, -25) psig. psig. c. Ensure that ship’s LP air sup- A-GA-109: 100 psig. LP air compressor is energized. ply is at 100 psig (nominal). d. Ensure that E-PN-44 and Alarm panel indicators are lit IAW Table Ship’s supply, 115 VAC, 60 Hz. E-PN-45 alarm panels are ener- 2-10. gized. 4. Verify that valves are IAW Table 2-2, Prior to Air Circu- lating: a. Open A-V-125, A-V-127, DC-V-101 and DC-V-102. b. Close A-V-155 and A-V-156. c. Open A-V-129 to start circu- W-V-10 decreases and stabilizes at 14 Adjust A-V-134 as required. lating air through the sonar (+/-1) psig. dome. 5. Pressurize dome (seawater). a. Close A-V-129. b. Close A-V-125.

2-42 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments c. Open A-V-166. A-GA-133 and W-GA-10 stabilizes to 14 Adjust A-V-134 as required. (±1) psig. d. Open W-V-1, W-V-5 and W-GA-39, 150.0 (+25, -25) psig. Adjust W-V-16 as required. DC-V-96. e. Open W-V-24. WTR V ON lights on E-PN-45 (Figure FO-6). Ensure W-GA-10 indication is held at 14-20 psig. f. Shut W-V-15 and W-V-18. g. Throttle W-V-17 Do not let W-GA-10 exceed 20 psig Use By-Pass valves with care and discretion. Dome empty indicator on control panel E-PN-44 will extinguish after approximately 10 minutes. Dome seawater ﬁll will continue for 2.5 to 3 hours. NOTE DOME CONTROL STATION MUST BE MANNED AT ALL TIMES DURING THIS PROCEDURE. ENSURE GAGE W-GA-10 INDICATION DOES NOT DROP BELOW 13 PSIG. IF GAGE W-GA-10 INDICATION DROPS BELOW 13 PSIG, SHUT VALVE A-V-166 IMMEDIATELY AND OPEN VALVE A-V-125; WHEN SONAR DOME PRESSURE INCREASES TO 17 PSIG, RESUME FRESHWATER FILLING PROCEDURE BY SHUTTING VALVE A-V-125 AND OPENING VALVE A-V-166. PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEP WILL ACTIVATE AUDIBLE LOW PRESSURE ALARMS. INFORM SONAR CONTROL AND COMBAT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE CENTER WATCHSTANDERS TO DISREGARD SONAR DOME LOW-PRESSURE ALARMS. 6. Verify dome is ﬁlled: DOME FULL and LOW PRESSURE E-PN-44 bell cannot be silenced. indicator lighted on E-PN-44. Alarm bell sounds a. When Dome Full indicator illuminates and alarm bell sounds, Close A-V-127, A-V- 166, and A-V-145. Observe gage W-GA-10 indication increase; audible alarms silence when gage W-GA-10 indication is greater than 25 psig. b. When gage W-GA-10 indica- Allow trapped air in dome to vent. Throttle valve W-V-27 as necessary to tion is greater than 25 psig, ensure Sonar Dome pressure remains open W-V-27; observe air/water above 25 psig as indicated on gage mixture venting through valve W-GA-10. W-V-27. Throttle valve W-V-17 as necessary to maintain W-GA-10 indication below 39.5 psig. c. Close W-V-27 when a steady Throttle valve W-V-17 as necessary to stream of water is observed increase W-GA-10 indication to 39.5 venting through valve W-V-27. psig. d. Shut W-V-17 when gage W-GA-10 indicates 39.5 psig. e. Open W-V-15 and W-V-18.

2-43 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments 7. Purge Digital Gage If Digital Gage W-GA-10 is installed. W-GA-10 Sensing Line: NOTE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL ACTIVATE THE AUDIBLE LOW-PRESSURE ALARMS. CONTACT SONAR CONTROL AND COMBAT SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE CENTER WATCH- STANDERS AND INFORM TO DISREGARD SONAR DOME LOW PRESSURE ALARMS. a. Remove cap from W-V-46 test point connection. b. Allow water to vent through Ensure W-GA-10 is indicating normal valve W-V-46 for 2 minutes operating pressure (39.5 psig). (minimum) until a steady stream of water is observed. Use a bucket to contain water. Recap test point connection of valve W-V-46. 8. Depressurize LP Air Piping: a. Shut valve A-V-110. b. Open drain valve A-V-155 and bypass valve A-V-166. c. Open valve A-V-125. Vent air pressure until gage A-GA-109, A-GA-106 and A-GA-123 indicate 0 psig. 9. Remove tags from underwater telephone, sonar set AN/SQS-53C transmitter power supply, alarm panels main power switch and air compressors: NOTE THE SONAR DOME WILL DEVELOP AIR POCKETS UP TO 72 HOURS AFTER AIR TO WATER INTER- CHANGE HAS BEEN COMPLETED. 10. Remove air pockets from sonar dome: a. Open W-V-27 valve slightly Allow trapped air in dome to vent. every 4 to 6 hours, or as necessary, to vent air pockets from Sonar Dome. b. Close W-V-27 when only W-GA-10 increases and stabilizes at 39.5 Adjust W-V-16 if required. Repeat for water is exhausting (+ 2, -0) psig. the next 72 hours to completely purge all air trapped in dome. Alarm panels indicate pressurized water (IAW Table 2-10.) c. Notify Sonar Control and Combat Systems Maintenance Center to regard all further Sonar Dome alarms.

2-44 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-9. Freshwater-to-Saltwater Interchange Procedure - Continued

Step to be Performed Observe Checks and Adjustments d. Notify Command Duty Officer of completion of maintenance; Inform CDO Sonar Dome is water ﬁlled and pressurized at normal operating pressure. Dome pressurization system is now ready for at Sea Procedure.

Table 2-10. Electrical/Alarm Panel Indications for a Given Condition Indicator Pressurized Air Pressurized Water Un-Pressurized Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Panel E-PN-44 (Dome Control Station) HIGH PRESS. OUT OUT OUT LOW PRESS. LIT OUT LIT DOME FULL OUT LIT OUT DOME EMPTY LIT OUT LIT SOLENOID CLOSED/OPEN Switch CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Bell OFF OFF ON

Panel E-PN-45 (Sonar Control Room) HIGH PRESS. OUT OUT OUT LOW PRESS. LIT OUT LIT WTR V ON OUT OUT OUT WTR V OFF LIT LIT LIT Buzzer OFF OFF ON

DMS Summary Fault Alarm OFF OFF ON

2-45 S9165-AE-MMA-010

2-4. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES.

CAUTION

TABLES 2-10 AND 2-11 CONTAIN PROCEDURES FOR ALL PREDICTABLE SDPS ALARM CONDI- TIONS AND COMPONENT MALFUNCTIONS. IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT ANY ALARM CONDITION OR COMPONENT MALFUNCTION MUST BE THOROUGHLY INVESTIGATED BEFORE ANY COR- RECTIVE ACTION IS UNDERTAKEN. ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO ARE KNOWLEDGEABLE OF ALL ASPECTS OF THE OPERATION AND FUNCTION OF THE SDPS SHALL TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS DURING AN ALARM SITUATION. ALL PROCEDURES ARE TO BE PERFORMED PROMPTLY UPON ACTIVATION OF VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS. APPRAISAL OF ALARMS SHALL BE MADE BY CONDUCTING COORDINATED GAGE READINGS AT THE DOME CONTROL STATION (DCS). SIMULTANEOUS ALARMS ARE RECEIVED AT THE DOME CONTROL STATION (DCS), SONAR CONTROL AND DMS.

Table 2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and Pressurized

1. HIGH PRESSURE ALARM

E-PN-44: HIGH PRESS illuminated. Bell sounding E-PN-45: HIGH PRESS illuminated. BUZZER sounding

A. SLOW SHIP’S SPEED TO 5 KNOTS OR LESS.

B. VERIFY ALARM CONDITION.

1. VERIFY SIMULTANEOUS ALARM PANEL INDICATIONS. 2. VERIFY FUNCTION OF GAGES W-GA-10 AND W-GA-41. W-GA-10 HIGH PRESSURE ALARM ACTIVATION SETPOINT IS 44.00 PSIG. CORRESPONDING INDICATION ON W-GA-41 DURING A HIGH PRESSURE ALARM CONDITION IS GREATER THAN 24.5 PSIG. C. CLOSE VALVE W-V-24.

D. VERIFY BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 IS CLOSED.

E. OPEN W-V-27 UNTIL PRESSURE DECREASES TO 39.5 (+2, -0) PSIG

F. CLOSE W-V-27

G. OPEN W-V-24

H. VERIFY OPERATION OF GAGE W-GA-10 BY ADDING SYSTEM HEAD PRESSURE TO GAGE W-GA-41 INDICATION.

I. NOTIFY OOD THAT NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED.

2-46 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and

Pressurized - Continued

J. IDENTIFY CAUSE OF HIGH PRESSURE ALARM AND TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION AS NECESSARY. COMMON CAUSES OF HIGH PRESSURE ALARM INCLUDE; FAILURE OF REDUCING VALVES W-V-7 OR W-V-16 OR LEAKBY OF BYPASS VALVE W-V-17.

2. LOW PRESSURE ALARM

E-PN-44: LOW PRESS illuminated. Bell sounding E-PN-45: LOW PRESS illuminated. BUZZER sounding

A. SLOW SHIP’S SPEED TO 5 KNOTS OR LESS.

B. VERIFY ALARM CONDITION.

1. VERIFY SIMULTANEOUS ALARM PANEL INDICATIONS. 2. VERIFY FUNCTION OF GAGES W-GA-10 AND W-GA-41. W-GA-10 LOW PRESSURE ALARM ACTIVATION SETPOINT IS 25.00 PSIG. CORRESPONDING INDICATION ON W-GA-41 DURING A LOW PRESSURE ALARM CONDITION IS GREATER THAN 5.5 PSIG.

C. SLOWLY OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 TO INCREASE SONAR DOME PRESSURE.

E. CLOSE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 WHEN NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED.

F. NOTIFY OOD THAT NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED.

G. IDENTIFY CAUSE OF LOW PRESSURE ALARM AND TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION AS NEC- ESSARY. COMMON CAUSES OF LOW PRESSURE ALARM INCLUDE; FAILURE OF REDUC- ING VALVES W-V-3 OR W-V-16, FAILURE OF RELIEF VALVE W-V-31 TO RE-SEAT COMPLETELY OR LOSS OF FIREMAIN PRESSURE.

3. LOW PRESSURE ALARM WITH WATER FLOW ON

E-PN-44: LOW PRESS illuminated; Bell sounding E-PN-45: LOW PRESS illuminated; WTR-V-ON illuminated; BUZZER sounding

A. SLOW SHIP’S SPEED TO 5 KNOTS OR LESS.

B. VERIFY ALARM CONDITION.

2-47 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and

Pressurized - Continued

3. VERIFY FUNCTION OF FLOW SWITCH E-F-29. FLOW SWITCH ALARM ACTIVATION SETPOINT IS A FLOW RATE GREATER THAN 2.5 GALLONS PER MINUTE. WATER FLOW THROUGH THE SDPS AT THIS FLOW RATE SHOULD BE APPARENT, AND MAY BE CONFIRMED BY VISUAL AND AURAL INSPECTION.

C. SLOWLY OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 TO INCREASE SONAR DOME PRESSURE.

D. OBSERVE ASCENDING PRESSURE INDICATION ON GAGE W-GA-10. CONTINUE THROT- TLING VALVE W-V-17 UNTIL NORMAL OPERATING SONAR DOME PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED. NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE IS 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10. ONCE NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED, CLOSE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17; PROCEED TO STEP 3.H. OF THIS TABLE.

E. IF NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE CANNOT BE MAINTAINED BY THROTTLING W-V-17, OPEN W-V-17 COMPLETELY AND SLOWLY OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-3.

F. OBSERVE ASCENDING PRESSURE INDICATION ON GAGE W-GA-10. CONTINUE THROT- TLING VALVE W-V-3 UNTIL NORMAL OPERATING SONAR DOME PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED. NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE IS 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10.

G. IF NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE CAN NOT BE RESTORED WITH BOTH BYPASS VALVES W-V-17 AND W-V-3 OPEN, PROCEED TO SECTION 5 “PROCEDURES FOR APPAR- ENT SONAR DOME RUPTURE.”

H. NOTIFY OOD THAT NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED.

I. IDENTIFY CAUSE OF WATER FLOW ON INDICATION AND TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION AS NECESSARY. THIS INDICATION WILL MOST LIKELY BE CAUSED BY A RUPTURED SONAR DOME; HOWEVER, OTHER COMMON CAUSES OF THE WATER FLOW ON INDICA- TION INCLUDE FAILURE OF RELIEF VALVE W-V-31 TO RE-SEAT COMPLETELY OR A BREAK IN SDPS PIPING.

4. LOSS OF FIREMAIN SUPPLY PRESSURE

GAGE W-GA-38 INDICATION LESS THAN 48 PSIG POSSIBLE LOW PRESSURE VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS

A. SLOW SHIP’S SPEED TO 5 KNOTS OR LESS.

2-48 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and

Pressurized - Continued

B. CLOSE CUTOUT VALVE W-V-18.

C. CONTINUE TO MONITOR GAGE W-GA-38 UNTIL FIREMAIN SUPPLY PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED. NORMAL OPERATIONAL FIREMAIN SUPPLY IS 150 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-38.

D. WHEN GAGE W-GA-38 INDICATES 150.0 PSIG, OPEN CUTOUT VALVE W-V-18.

E. VERIFY RESTORATION OF NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE. NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE IS 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10. CORRESPONDING GAGE W-GA-41 INDICATION IS 20 PSIG.

F. NOTIFY OOD THAT NORMAL SONAR DOME OPERATING PRESSURE HAS BEEN RESTORED.

5. REDUCER W-V-7 FAILURE

SET POINT (INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-39) CANNOT BE MAINTAINED INDEFINITELY.

POSSIBLE WATER LEAKAGE THROUGH WEEPAGE HOLE IN BELL COVER OF W-V-7.

A. PRIOR TO ADJUSTING SONAR DOME PRESSURE, VERIFY OPERATION OF GAGES W-GA-10 AND W-GA-41. NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE, AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10, 39.5 PSIG. CORRESPONDING GAGE W-GA-41 INDICATION FOR NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE IS 20 PSIG.

B. CLOSE CUTOUT VALVES W-V-5 AND W-V-8.

C. SLOWLY OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-3 AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE.

D. CONTINUE TO THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-3 TO MAINTAIN NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE; MONITOR GAGES W-GA-39, W-GA-41 AND W-GA-10 UNTIL REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF REDUCER W-V-7 IS ACCOMPLISHED.

6. REDUCER W-V-16 FAILURE

SET POINT (INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-41) CANNOT BE MAINTAINED INDEFINITELY.

POSSIBLE WATER LEAKAGE THROUGH WEEPAGE HOLE IN BELL COVER OF W-V-16.

POSSIBLE ACTIVATION OF LOW PRESSURE VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS.

POSSIBLE ACTIVATION OF HIGH PRESSURE VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS.

2-49 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-11. Underway Emergency Procedures - Sonar Dome Water Filled and

Pressurized - Continued

A. VERIFY NORMAL OPERATION OF REDUCER VALVE W-V-7 BY CONFIRMING GAGE W-GA-39 INDICATION. NORMAL GAGE W-GA-39 INDICATION IS 50.0 PSIG. REDUCER W-V-7 MUST BE FULLY OPERATIONAL BEFORE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF REDUCER W-V-16 IS ATTEMPTED.

B. CLOSE CUTOUT VALVES W-V-15 AND W-V-18.

C. SLOWLY OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE. NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE, AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10, IS 39.5 PSIG. CORRESPONDING GAGE W-GA-41 INDICATION FOR NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE IS 20 PSIG.

D. CONTINUE TO THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE W-V-17 TO MAINTAIN NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE; MONITOR GAGES W-GA-39, W-GA-41 AND W-GA-10 UNTIL REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF REDUCER W-V-16 IS ACCOMPLISHED.

7. RELIEF VALVE W-V-31 FAILURE

WATER FLOW OBSERVED FROM W-V-31 VENT PORT.

POSSIBLE ACTIVATION OF LOW PRESSURE VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS.

POSSIBLE ACTIVATION OF WTR-V-ON VISUAL INDICATOR ON PANEL E-PN-45.

A. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVE W-V-24.

B. MONITOR GAGE W-GA-10 FOR NORMAL SONAR DOME PRESSURE.

C. MANUALLY JACK OPEN RELIEF VALVE W-V-31 FOR 30 SECONDS. REPEAT AS NECES- SARY TO CLEAR ANY DEBRIS WHICH HAVE FOULED SEAT OF VALVE.

D. IF VALVE SEAT CANNOT BE CLEARED, AND WATER CONTINUES TO VENT THROUGH W-V-31, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF VALVE IS REQUIRED.

Table 2-12. Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry

1. LOSS OF LP AIR SUPPLY

LOW LP AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE INDICATOR ILLUMINATED. GAGES A-GA-109 AND A-GA-106 INDICATE LESS THAN 60 PSIG. POSSIBLE LOW AIR PRESSURE AUDIBLE ALARM SOUNDING.

A. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-104 AND A-V-129.

2-50 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-12. Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry - Continued

B. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-103 AND A-V-127.

C. PERSONNEL IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME RETURN TO AIRLOCK.

D. CLOSE AND SECURE AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCH.

E. DEPRESSURIZE AIRLOCK, OPEN AIRLOCK TO PASSAGE ACCESS HATCH AND EXIT AIRLOCK.

F. OBSERVE GAGES A-GA-109 AND A-GA-106. PERSONNEL MAY RE-ENTER AIRLOCK AND SONAR DOME ONLY AFTER GAGES A-GA-109 AND A-GA-106 INDICATE 120 PSIG (NOMI- NAL) AND ALL VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS HAVE CLEARED.

G. MONITOR GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167 FOR NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE WHILE SONAR DOME IS AIR PRESSURIZED. NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE FOR AIR PRESSUR- IZATION IS 14 PSIG.

H. IF NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE CANNOT BE MAINTAINED, IMMEDIATELY COM- MENCE AIR-TO-FRESHWATER INTERCHANGE PROCEDURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 2-5 OF THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL.

2. LOSS OF ELECTRICAL POWER

ALL VISUAL INDICTOR LAMPS ON PANELS ARE EXTINGUISHED. POSSIBLE LOSS OF OVERHEAD LIGHTING AT DOME CONTROL STATION AND AIRLOCK.

A. PERSONNEL IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME RETURN TO AIRLOCK.

B. CLOSE AND SECURE AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCH.

C. DEPRESSURIZE AIRLOCK, OPEN AIRLOCK TO PASSAGE ACCESS HATCH AND EXIT AIRLOCK.

D. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-104 AND A-V-129.

E. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-103 AND A-V-127.

F. PERSONNEL WILL REMAIN OUTSIDE OF SONAR DOME UNTIL ALL ELECTRICAL POWER HAS BEEN FULLY RESTORED.

G. MONITOR GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167 FOR NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE WHILE SONAR DOME IS AIR PRESSURIZED. NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE FOR AIR PRESSUR- IZATION IS 14 PSIG.

I. IF NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE CANNOT BE MAINTAINED, IMMEDIATELY COM- MENCE AIR-TO-FRESHWATER INTERCHANGE PROCEDURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 2-5 OF THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL.

2-51 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-12. Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry - Continued

3. REGULATOR A-V-119 FAILURE

CANNOT MAINTAIN REQUIRED OUTPUT PRESSURES AND FLOW RATE. GAGE A-GA- 123 INDICATION FLUCTUATES BEYOND NORMAL RANGE DURING FLOW CONDI- TIONS. POSSIBLE VENTING OR RELIEF VALVE A-V-122. POSSIBLE LOW PRESSURE AUDIBLE ALARM SOUNDING.

A. PERSONNEL IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME RETURN TO AIRLOCK.

B. CLOSE AND SECURE AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCH.

C. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-104 AND A-V-129.

D. DEPRESSURIZE AIRLOCK, OPEN AIRLOCK TO PASSAGE ACCESS HATCH AND EXIT AIRLOCK.

E. CLOSE ISOLATION VALVES A-V-103 AND A-V-127.

F. MONITOR GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167 FOR NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE WHILE SONAR DOME IS AIR PRESSURIZED. NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE FOR AIR PRESSUR- IZATION IS 14 PSIG.

G. CLOSE CUTOUT VALVES A-V-118 AND A-V-148.

H. CRACK OPEN BYPASS VALVES A-V-147.

I. OBSERVE GAGE A-GA-123; OPEN VALVE A-V-147 UNTIL A-GA-123 INDICATES 22 PSIG AT LOCK UP (NO FLOW) CONDITION.

J. OPEN ISOLATION VALVES A-V-103 AND A-V-127.

K. OBSERVE FLOWMETER A-V-124; INDICATION SHOULD BE 40 TO 50 SCFM.

L. OPEN ISOLATION VALVES A-V-104 AND A-V-129.

M. OBSERVE NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE OF 14 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. CORRESPONDING FLOW RATE INDICATION ON A-F-124 IS 40 TO 50 SCFM.

N. IF ALL OF THE ABOVE OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE BEING MAINTAINED, PERSON- NEL MAY RE-ENTER AIRLOCK AND CONTINUE WITH SONAR DOME ENTRY.

4. BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR A-V-134 FAILURE

2-52 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 2-12. Emergency Procedures - During Sonar Dome Entry - Continued

NORMAL OPERATING BACKPRESSURE CANNOT BE MAINTAINED BY ADJUSTMENT OF BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE A-V-134. POSSIBLE LOW AIR PRESSURE AUDIBLE ALARM SOUNDING.

A. PERSONNEL IN PRESSURIZED SONAR DOME RETURN TO AIRLOCK.

B. CLOSE AND SECURE AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCH.

C. DEPRESSURIZE AIRLOCK, OPEN AIRLOCK TO PASSAGE ACCESS HATCH AND EXIT AIRLOCK.

D. OBSERVE GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167; IF INDICATIONS ARE LESS THAN 14 PSIG, THROTTLE VALVE A-V-145 UNTIL NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE IS RESTORED.

E. OBSERVE GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167; IF INDICATIONS ARE GREATER THAN 15 PSIG, OPEN AND THROTTLE BYPASS VALVE A-V-131 UNTIL NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE IS RESTORED.

F. OBSERVE NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE OF 14 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. CORRESPONDING FLOW RATE INDICATION ON A-F-124 IS 40 TO 50 SCFM.

G. IF ALL OF THE ABOVE OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE BEING MAINTAINED, PERSON- NEL MAY RE-ENTER AIRLOCK AND CONTINUE WITH SONAR DOME ENTRY.

2-5. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR APPARENT SONAR DOME RUPTURE. The initial indications of a ruptured sonar dome are a sustained low pressure alarm (visual and audible) accompanied by a sustained WTR-V-ON (water ﬂow) alarm. The circumstances under which sonar dome ruptures have occurred include extended operation in high sea states, slamming, impact with a submerged object, or impact with a pier. Sonar domes have also ruptured without apparent direct cause.

2-5.1 INITIAL ACTIONS. The following initial actions shall be taken, if conditions permit when a sonar dome rupture is suspected. a. Slow ship’s speed to the minimum to maintain steerage; do not exceed 5 knots until status of sonar dome is determined. b. Ensure that low pressure and water ﬂow alarms are not caused by pressurization system malfunction. c. If the pressurization system is functioning properly and the alarm condition continues, the sonar dome is probably ruptured. See following paragraphs for operational procedure.

2-5.2 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT PROCEDURE. a. Damage assessment if ship is in port: It may be possible to determine the location of the rupture if striking a

2-53 S9165-AE-MMA-010

pier or grounding caused it. If Diving services are available, they shall be utilized to determine the exact location and extent of damage. The following information shall be provided To NAVSEA IAW current COMNAV- SURFLANT/COMNAVSURFPAC casualty reporting Procedures; (1) The cause of low pressure/water flow on alarm. (2) The lowest sonar dome pressure recorded. (3) The actions taken to resolve alarm condition. (4) Whether or not the sonar dome was air pressurized or water filled and pressurized at the time of the alarm activation. b. Damage assessment if ship is underway: An attempt shall be made to determine whether the sonar dome is torn away or ruptured. All pertinent information regarding status of sonar dome shall be reported to type commander via radio message IAW established COMNAVSURFLANT/COMNAVSURFPAC casualty reporting procedures. (1) If the sonar dome is ruptured A determination of the location of the rupture must be made. Damage to sonar dome may be localized by conducting underway noise level measurements. If no evidence exists to the contrary, the rupture is probably a vertical tear located within a few inches of the forward centerline of the sonar dome. If indications are that a vertical tear exists at the forward center line of the sonar dome but that the sonar dome is not torn away, maintain normal pressurization system valve alignment IAW Table 2-3 of this technical manual, and resume ships operation utilizing guidance in paragraph 2.6. Above sea state 6, reduce speed to the minimum to maintain steerage to avoid slamming. If the limiting speeds are adhered to, slamming or the emergence of the baseline flat should not occur; if however, slamming or baseline flat emergence does occur, reduce ships speed and alter heading. It should be noted that the internal sonar dome pressure may fluctuate with ships speed and will be a further indication of a vertical tear. (2) If the sonar dome is torn away Leaving the transducer array exposed, secure the pressurization system. Ships speed and heading should be adjusted within the following limits as necessary to prevent emergence of the baseline flat: (a) For sea state 0 through sea state 4 (up to 7 feet significant wave height) 13 knots maximum on any heading. (b) For sea state 5 (7 feet to 13 feet significant wave height) minimum speed to maintain steerage, but no greater than 13 knots on any heading. Emergence of the baseline flat is probable at sea state 5, therefore, alter speed and change heading to avoid/minimize emergence of the baseline flat. (c) For sea state 6 and above (13 feet or greater significant wave height) maximum speed on all headings is the minimum speed required to maintain steerage.

2-6. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR SHIPS WITH RUPTURED SONAR DOMES. Figure 2-4 (sheets 1 and 2) is a reprint of Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982. This letter serves as the governing document as it presents operational guidelines for ships with ruptured sonar domes. Selected portions of its enclosure (1) are also presented and are designated herein as Figure 2-4 (sheet 3).

2-54 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 1)

2-55 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 2)

2-56 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-4. Naval Sea Systems Command letter serial 141, dated 17 March 1982 (Sheet 3)

2-57 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-5. Operational Guidelines for DDG 51 Class Ships With Ruptured Sonar Dome Rubber Window (Page 1 of 2)

2-58 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 2-5. Operational Guidelines for DDG 51 Class Ships With Ruptured Sonar Dome Rubber Window (Page 2 of 2) 1.

2-59 S9165-AE-MMA-010

2-7. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DRYDOCK/ROH PERIODS. The following procedures represent the minimum requirements to ensure proper operation of the SDPS and to minimize the possibility of damaging the Sonar Dome during Drydock entry and Lay-up periods. The following procedures are generalized; speciﬁc procedural requirements will vary between repair facilities. The Drydock- ing Officer, as designated by the appropriate Naval organization, represents the ﬁnal authority during all phases of Drydock entry and departure.

2-7.1 PRE-OVERHAUL REQUIREMENTS. a. Self-Noise Evaluation: Prior to entering drydock (within 2 weeks), a self noise evaluation should be conducted. The results of the evaluation will be used to identify any speciﬁc areas of the sonar dome which need to be repaired or groomed as necessary. Additionally, the results of the pre-overhaul evaluation will be used as a baseline for comparison to a post drydocking self-noise evaluation. b. Radiography (X-Ray) Support: A radiographic inspection of the Sonar Dome splice area will usually be performed during the drydock period. The inspection must be performed as early as possible in the drydocking period in order to allow for repair or replacement of the Sonar Dome if inspection results warrant. Radio- graphic inspection support will normally be scheduled by the Program Executive Office Integrated Warfare Systems (Code IWS5B3C; Sonar Domes/Windows Program Office) via the Type Commander. Radiographs are forwarded by overnight mail to the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL) in Washington D.C. Two working days are usually required for complete analysis and evaluation of the radiographs by NRL and NAVSEA. Recom- mendations regarding repair or replacement of the Sonar Dome will then be provided to the Type Commander by NAVSEA. Refer to Chapter 8 of this Technical Manual for complete procedural guidance regarding Sonar Dome repair and replacement. (1) Required Ship’s Force Support: Ship’s Force will usually be required to operate the SDPS; Approximately four cycles of pressurizing and depressurizing the sonar dome will be required during the radiographic inspection. The duration of each cycle is 3 hours. (2) Required Shipyard/Repair Activity Support: Shipyard support items include; availability of electrical power (115 volts AC), providing a reliable means of communications between sonar dome interior and drydock area, crane service for radiographic inspection equipment onload and offloading, protection of sonar dome and adjacent hull area from weather, lighting for night work and liaison to coordinate shipyard and ship’s force support.

NOTE

Website https://www.muwinfodesk.navy.mil/ provides recommended dome entry status, X-ray and SDPS information.

2-7.2 DRYDOCK ENTRY AND DOCKING PROCEDURES. When entering the drydock, the sonar dome shall be completely water ﬁlled and pressurized at 39.5 psig. The sonar dome shall remain water ﬁlled and pressurized during the drydocking procedure until the ship has landed on the blocks of the drydock. Once the ship has landed on the drydock blocks and upon approval of the Drydocking Officer, the sonar dome shall be dewatered by performing a Water–to-Air Interchange IAW Table 2-7 of this Technical Manual. The sonar dome shall be completely dewatered and air pressurized at 15 psig as indicated on gage W-GA-10. Any deviation from this procedure must have the prior approval of the Drydocking Officer. a. If trim by the stern is required during the drydocking procedure the sonar dome may be partially or completely

2-60 S9165-AE-MMA-010

dewatered and air pressurized by performing a Water To Air Interchange IAW Table 2-7 of this Technical Manual. Any dewatering of the sonar dome shall only be accomplished upon approval of the Drydocking Officer. b. If replacement of sonar dome is anticipated, refer to Chapter 8 of this Technical Manual for drydock dimensional criteria.

2-7.3 DRYDOCK LAY-UP REQUIREMENTS FOR SDPS. If dry docking period will exceed 72 hours, the sonar dome shall be dewatered and the water pressurization subsystem of the SDPS shall be depressurized, isolated and drained shortly after the ship has been drydocked. Depressurization of the water pressurization subsystem may be accomplished by performing the following procedure: a. If dry docking period will exceed 72 hours, the sonar dome shall be dewatered and the water pressurization subsystem of the SDPS shall be depressurized, isolated and drained shortly after the ship has been drydocked. Depressurization of the water pressurization subsystem may be accomplished by performing the following procedure: (1) Close isolation valve W-V-24 (2) Close and tag cutout valve W-V-1 (3) Open blowdown valve W-V-2 (4) Open Bypass valves W-V-3 and W-V-17 (5) Verify gages W-GA-38, W-GA-39 and W-GA-41 indicate 0 PSIG. b. SDPS valve Alignment: After the water pressurization subsystem has been depressurized and dewatered, the SDPS valves shall be aligned IAW Table 2-1 while ship is drydocked. The SDPS valve alignment of Table 2-1 represents a baseline alignment which is designed to prevent damage to the SDPS and / or sonar dome during drydock periods. Care shall be exercised during the removal, replacement or repair of any SDPS components for maintenance or overhaul purposes; such actions may indirectly cause damage to the SDPS or sonar dome if proper procedures are not followed. Refer to Chapter 6 of this technical manual for SDPS component repair and replacement procedures.

NOTE

THE SONAR DOME SHALL NORMALLY REMAIN AIR PRESSURIZED AT ALL TIMES DURING THE DRYDOCKING PERIOD. c. SDPS Overhaul Requirements: All SDPS components shall be overhauled or replaced at 60 month intervals IAW the PMS Maintenance Index Page requirements.

2-7.4 DRYDOCK LAY-UP REQUIREMENTS FOR SONAR DOME. a. Normal Configuration: The sonar dome shall be completely dewatered and air pressurized at 15 psig at all times while the ship is in drydock. In this configuration no support slings or banjo support blocks are required. The sonar dome shall be protected from sunlight by a Herculite Sun Screen Cover (or equivalent) IAW NAVSEA Drawing 602-4590931 at all times during the drydock period. The Sun Screen Cover shall be installed within 72 hours after the drydock has been dewatered. Secure the Sun Screen Cover with cloth reinforced tape. If hot work is being performed in the forward area of the ship, a flame retardant cloth tarp shall be installed above and over the sonar dome. The tarp shall be secured around the entire perimeter using cloth reinforced tape. b. Depressurizing Sonar Dome: The dewatered sonar dome may be depressurized during drydock periods to

2-61 S9165-AE-MMA-010

accomplish repair actions to the sonar dome or sonar equipments as necessary. IF THE DEWATERED SONAR DOME IS TO BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR MORE THAN 72 CONSECUTIVE HOURS, SONAR DOME SUPPORT SLINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 8-59. Refer to Norfolk Naval Shipyard Drawing No. 53711-906-6035584 for additional information regarding sonar dome support slings. Support slings shall be installed while the sonar dome is air pressurized at 15 psig. Tension shall be maintained on the support slings to apply full but not depressed contact with the sonar dome. Support slings shall be removed or relaxed prior to any hydrostatic testing of the sonar dome. With sonar dome support slings in place as shown in Figure 8-59 the sonar dome may remain unpressurized indeﬁnitely. Banjo support blocks are not required for a dewatered unpressurized sonar dome. c. Water Filled Sonar Dome: The sonar dome may be ﬁlled with water and held at 39.5 psig in drydock without support slings or banjo support blocks FOR TESTING PURPOSES ONLY. THE SONAR DOME MUST BE AIR PRESSURIZED AT 15 PSIG PRIOR TO REFILLING WITH WATER. Air To Freshwater Interchange shall be accomplished IAW Table 2-5 of this Technical Manual. Upon completion of testing the sonar dome shall be dewatered and pressurized by air to 15 psig IAW Table 2-7 of this Technical Manual.

NOTE

SONAR DOME SUPPORT SLINGS IF INSTALLED MUST BE SLACKED OFF PRIOR TO PRESSURIZING THE SONAR DOME. DAMAGE TO SONAR DOME WILL RESULT IF SUPPORT SLINGS ARE NOT SLACKED OFF. d. Sonar Dome Grooming: The sonar dome shall be cleaned as soon as possible after drydocking. A freshwater washdown shall be performed to remove any slime or verdigris buildup. A second freshwater washdown shall be performed using a mild detergent to clean the rubber. If the sonar dome is extremely fouled, sand blasting with a ﬁne abrasive is permitted when authorized by NAVSEA.

NOTE

THE EXTERNAL SONAR DOME SURFACE IS IMPREGNATED WITH TRIBUTYL TIN OXIDE (TBTO). AVOID DIRECT BARE SKIN CONTACT WITH SONAR DOME SURFACE. WASH HANDS THOROUGHLY AFTER EXPOSURE TO SONAR DOME. e. Hydrostatic Test Requirements: See Figure 8-59. of this Technical Manual for hydrostatic test requirements for new and repaired sonar domes.

2-7.5 DRYDOCK DEPARTURE AND UNDOCKING PROCEDURES. When departing the drydock the sonar dome shall be completely filled with freshwater and pressurized at 39.5 psig. Air-to-freshwater interchange shall be performed IAW Table 2-5 of this Technical Manual. The sonar dome shall be completely filled with freshwater before the water level in the drydock reaches the bottom of the sonar dome. Care shall be taken to limit the sonar dome exposure to direct sunlight to a maximum of 3 hours during the undocking procedure. Any deviation from this procedure must have the prior approval of the Drydocking Officer. a. If trim by the stern is required during the undocking procedure, the sonar dome may be air pressurized or partially flooded and air pressurized at 15 to 22 psig. Air-To- Freshwater Interchange IAW Table 2-5 of this Tech- nical Manual shall be completed immediately after the ship is pierside.

2-62 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 3

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3-1. INTRODUCTION.

3-1.1 PURPOSE. This chapter provides a detailed functional description of the sonar dome rubber window (SDRW) system. The SDRW system is composed of the rubber window/attachment assembly and the following subsystems: air pressurization, water pressurization, electrical control/alarms, dome access, and communications.

The detailed functional description of this chapter is divided into sections describing the rubber window/attachment assembly and each subsystem. Special subsystem components are discussed at the end of the subsystem description. Common components, such as cutoff valves, are discussed at the end of the chapter. Interfaces between the air/water pressurization, electrical control/alarms, and dome access subsystems are shown in Figure FO-8 and discussed at locations in the text where required.

3-1.2 BRIEF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. The following provides a brief description of the SDRW system: a. Rubber Window/Attachment Assembly. This assembly is a pressure-tight rubber membrane with attaching hardware which protects the sonar transducer array, reduces acoustic attenuation (compared with a steel bow dome), and provides the proper hydrodynamic contour to minimize water flow noise. The rubber window must be pressurized at all times including when the ship is drydocked. b. Air Pressurization Subsystem. This subsystem consists of panel-mounted piping components which regulate the ship’s low-pressure air supply to pressurize and circulate air within the sonar dome area. This subsystem is used for: (1) initial drydock dome pressurization, (2) dome water removal, and (3) personnel entry into the dome. c. Water Pressurization Subsystem. This subsystem consists of panel-mounted piping components required to: (1) regulate either the ship’s firemain or dockside freshwater supply to maintain the required static dome water pressure, (2) fill air-pressurized dome from dockside freshwater or ship’s firemain at sea, and (3) sweep residual water from the airlock passageway and dome during dome entry. d. Electrical Control/Alarms Subsystem. This subsystem comprises the necessary electrical controls and alarms to: (1) control the eductor solenoid valve during dome water removal; (2) provide dome high and low water-pressure alarms; (3) provide dome low air-pressure alarm, turning off the eductor solenoid valve in this event; (4) provide dome water full and empty indications; (5) deenergize water low- and high-pressure audible alarms when dome is not full; (6) close eductor solenoid valve when dome is empty; (7) provide water flow off/on indications; and (8) provide E-V-21 open/closed indications. e. Dome Access Subsystem. This subsystem provides the necessary controls to permit personnel to enter the dome by equalizing airlock/dome pressures, and to exit the dome by depressurizing the airlock while maintaining dome air pressure and flow. f. Communication Subsystem. This subsystem provides a sound-powered phone and E-call circuit between the dome, airlock, airlock passageway, dome control station, and forecastle for exclusive use during dome operations. A portable communications panel is provided to be taken into the dome and connected to watertight feedthrough connectors during dome entry.

3-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3-2. RUBBER WINDOW AND ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY.

3-2.1 FUNCTION. The rubber window is a rubber-walled, streamlined housing for the ship’s sonar array. Mounted under the prow of the hull at the lowest point, it provides an optimum location for sonar scanning, and its rubber construction allows a maximum of sonar acoustic energy to be transmitted. The hydrodynamic shape of the rubber window is maintained against sea pressure by internal counterpressure of compressed air or pressurized water. The window’s contours also minimize the acoustic background interference of water ﬂow when underway which increases the range and sensitivity of the sonar gear.

3-2.2 CONFIGURATION. The rubber window configuration is shown in Figures FO-9 and FO-10 shows the steel bow structure below the baseline flat that mounts the rubber window. Detail E of Figure FO-9 illustrates the laminated rubber construction details; the outer layer of NOFOUL rubber inhibits marine growth. Looking inward from the outer layer, five plies of wire-reinforced rubber fabric provide basic tensile strength, three plies running radially and two running longitudinally. Finally, another layer of NOFOUL comprises the inner surface. Average wall thickness is nominally 1-1/4 inches, but a gum rubber filler increases wall thickness to about 8 inches around the window perimeter where the buildup is used for fairing the SDRW into the hull contours. A bead assembly, comprising a 1-3/4-inch steel cable, is similar in construction and function to the bead assembly of a rubber tire. The cable is secured to the wall structure by three wire-reinforced plies that overlay the bead cable and are fused into the wall as shown in details E and A. The bead assembly provides for attachment of the rubber window to the ship’s hull. Additional mounting means are provided by steel nut plates imbedded in the thick fairing perimeter. Each nut plate is supported by rubber blocks and a ply of wire-reinforced rubber fabric. These nut plates secure the fairing angle to the rubber window.

3-2.3 WINDOW ATTACHMENT. (Figure FO-9, details B and C.) The attachment assembly hardware is clamped around the entire rubber window perimeter. The attachment hardware consists of bead seat castings that are ﬁtted and welded to the ship’s bow dome structure, providing a continuous, precisely positioned channel to which the rubber window bead is ﬁtted. Bead seat clamps bolted to the bead seat castings fasten the bead in the channel.

3-2.4 BOW DOME STEEL STRUCTURE. (See Figure FO-10.) The bead seat castings are attached around the perimeter of the window opening. Attachments are made at the following locations: a. Baseline ﬂat along the upper-forward port and starboard waterline. b. Upper vertical chock along the upper-aft port and starboard portion of the bow dome. c. Diagonal bulkhead along the extreme aft portion. d. Lower vertical chock along the lower portion of the banjo structure.

3-2.5 BOW DOME SHELL FAIRING. (See Figure FO-9, details A, B, C, D, and E.) Fairing angles composed of 14-foot contoured lengths of angle iron are bolted to the fairing nut plates around the perimeter of the rubber window. The fairing angle provides an edge for weldment to the closure plates. The closure plates cover the window attachments and complete the fairing of the window to ship hull. The inner void is foam ﬁlled.

3-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3-3. AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM.

The air pressurization is shown in Figure FO-11.

3-3.1 DOME AIR ENTRY. The air pressurization subsystem has one available source of compressed air: ship’s low-pressure (LP) supply at 125 (+30, -25) psig. a. Low-Pressure Air Input. LP air is normally used to aid in dome water removal and to air pressurize the dome. LP air at 125 (+30, -25) psig enters the SDRW system through cutoff valve A-V-110. LP air supply failure switch E-F-175, with associated cutout valve A-V-176, monitors the supply pressure upstream of A-V- 110 and activates LP air supply failure indicator E-F-180 at the dome gage panel when the supply pressure drops below 85 (±2) psig. From A-V-110, air flows through check valve A-V-151, which allows air flow in only one direction, to gage A-GA-109 with associated cutout valves A-V-183 and A-V-108. A-GA-109 indicates the LP air supply pressure. Air at 125 (+30, -25) psig passes through cutout valve A-V-112, air filter A-F-114, orifice A-F-113, and cutout valve A-V-116, to gage A-GA-106 and associated cutout valves A-V-165 and A-V-105. The three-stage air filter removes water, oil, and other contaminants from the ship’s service air making it suitable for human consumption. Air orifice A-F-113 limits the maximum air flow to 50 Standard Cubic Feet Per Minute (SCFM). Cutout valves A-V-112 and A-V-116 isolate the air filter for emergency operation and servicing. Valve A-V-107 bypasses the filter and is normally locked closed. The air filter is monitored by a differential pressure gage, A-GA-117, which indicates the pressure drop across the filter elements. When the pressure drop exceeds 6 psid, the elements require replacement. Three needle valves, A-V- 178, drain each filter stage of accumulated liquid to ball-float liquid drain valve A-V-115. Liquid is automatically expelled from A-V-115 when the ball float lifts and air pressure forces the liquid out to a deck drain. Gage A-GA-106 indicates the air pressure downstream of the air filter and orifice. Under static conditions, A-GA-106 reads the same as A-GA-109; however, with air flow, a pressure drop of 40 psig or more occurs across orifice A-F-113. Filtered air is supplied to air pressure reducer A-V-119. A-V-119 reduces the incoming pressure to 22 (+1, -5) psig. Cutout valves A-V-118 and A-V-148 and bypass valve A-V-147 are provided for emergency operation. Gage A-GA-123, with associated cutout valves A-V-164 and A-V-121, monitors the air pressure downstream of A-V-119. A-GA-123 reads slightly higher than 22 (+1, -5) psig with no air flow, 22 (+1, -5) psig with slight air flow vented to the compartment and slightly greater than 14 psig with air circulation due to the effect of the exhaust regulator. Air flow passes by relief valve A-V-122 and through air flow meter A-F-124, valve A-V-125, float check valve A-V-126, dome cutout valve A-V-127, flex hose isolation valve A-V-103, damage control valve DC-V-101, and air diffuser A-F-128 into the dome. Relief valve A-V-122, set to relieve, at 25 (±1) psig, protects the dome from over pressurization. Flow meter A-F-124 monitors the air flow rate into the dome and should read 50 (+0, -10) scfm. Float check valve A-V-126 allows air flow in either direction, but prohibits dome water from entering the air system. Valve A-V-127 isolates the dome from the air panel when the dome is water pressurized. Air diffuser A-F-128 diffuses the air flow into the dome.

3-3.2 DOME AIR EXHAUST. Air exhausts from the dome through hose A-H-120. Because of the location of the (1) air diffuser, aft top of dome behind the baffle plate and (2) air exhaust hose, forward bottom of dome, complete dome air circulation is achieved. Air enters the valve board through hose A-H-120, damage control valve DC-V-102, flex hose isolation valve A-V-104, and cutout valve A-V-129 which isolate the dome from the air panel when the dome is water pressurized. From A-V-129, air flows through float check valve A-V-130 to pressure gage A-GA-133, with associated cutout valves A-V-185 and A-V-132 and air sample valve A-V-144. Float check valve A-V-130 allows air flow in either direction, but prohibits dome water from entering the air system. Gage A-GA-133 monitors the exhaust air pressure of 14 (±1) psig. Air sample valve A-V-144 permits taking an exhaust air sample. Exhaust air passes by A-V-144 and through cutout valve A-V-145 and control valve

3-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

A-V-134 and is vented to the forecastle through terminal air vent A-F-135. Bypass valve A-V-131, normally locked closed, bypasses A-V-145 and A-V-134 and is used to regulate the exhaust air pressure if any component of the exhaust regulator (A-V-134) fails in operation.

3-3.3 DOME AIR PRESSURE REGULATION. Backpressure regulator valve A-V-134 (Figures 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3) is an automatic pilot-operated control valve which maintains dome air pressure at 14 (±1) psig. It consists of the 1-1/2” IPS, 100 M-1 hytrol assembly, 3/8” CRL5M pilot control pressure relief assembly, and 3/8” NO. x 58BM restriction tube. Operation of the backpressure regulator valve pilot control depends on the ability of the dome air pressure applied to the valve’s diaphragm chamber to overcome an opposing spring tension. When the dome pressure is 14 (±1) psig or greater, the diaphragm will compress the opposing spring and cause the valve’s nozzle disc to open. This allows some portion of the operating air controlling the diaphragm of the Hytrol valve to be vented allowing the Hytrol valve to open and release a greater amount of air from the dome. The degree of the nozzle disc opening is proportional to the level of the dome air pressure above 14 (±1) psig. The pilot control valve will be forced closed by the diaphragm’s opposing spring when dome pressure falls below 14 (±1) psig. This causes line pressure to increase on the diaphragm of the Hytrol valve, closing the valve and restricting the dome exhaust ﬂow. Gage A-GA-167 indicates local dome air pressure, and W-GA-10 indicates dome air pressure remotely at the dome control station. If dome air pressure drops below 12 (±1) psig, low air-pressure alarm switch E-F-32 sounds panel alarms, and E-V-21 disengages extinguishing E-F-33 OPEN light.

3-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-1. Typical Backpressure Regulating Valve (A-V-134) 1-1/2″ IPS, Type 50M 3-3.4 SPECIAL AIR PRESSURIZATION COMPONENTS. a. Control Pilot Valve. (See Figure 3-2.) The pressure-relief control pilot, part of air pressure regulator valve A-V-134, is a direct-acting, spring-loaded, diaphragm-type valve. It opens and closes through the design range of the control without disassembly or use of specially designed tools. The control valve is normally held closed Figure 3-1. Typical Backpressure Regulating Valve (A-V-134) 1-1/2” IPS, Type 50M by the force of the compression spring above the diaphragm. Controlling pressure is applied under the diaphragm. When the controlling pressure exceeds the spring setting, the disc is lifted off the seat and permits ﬂow through the control valve. When the controlling pressure drops below the spring setting, the spring returns the control valve to its normally closed position. When the control valve is used in conjunction with a hytrol valve, it serves to open the Hytrol valve when operating pressure exceeds the control valves set-point and closes the Hytrol valve when the operating pressure returns to below the pilot control valves set-point.

3-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. Hytrol Valve. The hytrol valve (Figure 3-3), a part of backpressure regulator valve A-V-134, is a pneumatically-operated, diaphragm, globe-pattern valve. It consists of three major components: the body, diaphragm assembly, and cover. The diaphragm assembly is the only moving part of the valve. Operational setpoint is determined by the control pilot valve. The body contains a metal seat insert. This is screwed into the valve body to form a tight metal-to-metal seal. The diaphragm assembly uses a diaphragm of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber. A synthetic rubber disc, contained on three sides by two disc retainers, forms a seal with the valve seat when pressure is applied above the diaphragm. The valve diaphragm assembly forms a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve separating operating pressure from the line pressure. The valve position is determined by the line pressure felt on the diaphragm which is controlled by the pilot relief valve of the A-V-134 backpressure regulator valve assembly.

Figure 3-2. 3/8″ CRL5M Pressure Relief Valve Assembly Control Pilot Valve (A-V-134)

3-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-3. 1-1/2″ IPS, 100 M-1 Hytrol Assembly (A-V-134) c. Air Filter A-F-114. Figure 3-4 shows a cross-section view of the air filter and associated components. The filter contains three stages of filtration. 1. First-Stage Filtration. The first stage is an impact filtration device which removes large oil drops and particle matter larger than one micron in size. This greatly increases the life of the second- and third-stage filter elements. The stage consists of a laminar flow device (2), flow straightener, which directs the incoming air stream against an impact plate (3). The laminar flow device (2) is made of a pleated stainless steel foil bonded to the inside of a 1-1/2 inch diameter tube. The impact plate (3) is a 14″ x14″ stainless steel plate positioned 1/4″ from the end of, and perpendicular to, the laminar flow device. The particles and oil droplets that collect on the impact drain off to the bottom of the chamber. 2. Second-Stage Filtration. The second stage consists of 12 fiberglass filter elements (4) which remove most of the remaining contaminants and is especially effective in removing submicron-sized aerosols. The 12 elements are horizontally positioned in parallel and are supported by a vertical retainer plate (5). Air flows from the inside to outside of the elements. The core of the elements retain most of the solid particles, and the fiberglass causes the oil aerosol to form into drops which fall to the bottom of the second-stage chamber. The elements will become contaminated with use and will require periodic replacement. 3. Third-Stage Filtration. The third stage (6) contains 18 filter elements which provide final air filtering action and prevent oil drops formed in the second stage from reentering the air stream. The elements are vertically positioned in parallel and mount to the filter closure assembly (7). The air flows from the outside

3-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

to the inside of the elements. The elements consist of many layers of non-woven cotton cloth and fiberglass wrapped on a spiral-wound paper core. Each element is encased in an aluminum wrapper. The wrapper contains a series of holes which provide a flow path for air, but tend to prevent oil drops from reentering the air stream. Air from the third stage passes through an internal check valve (8), which prevents reverse air flow, to the collection tank (9) and air outlet. These filter elements also require periodic replacement.

Figure 3-4. Air Filter A-F-114

d. Low-Pressure Reducer Valve A-V-119. Figure 3-5 identifies the principal parts of this pressure reducer, and illustrates the flow path of high-pressure air input and reduced-pressure output. The main valve (1) is upward seating with a piston (2) on top of its stem (3). The auxiliary valve (4) is upward seating, attached to controlling diaphragm (5) with downward adjusting spring (6). Input air at 125 (+ 30, -25) psig tends to close the main valve disc. The same pressure input air is applied through high-pressure port (7) to the auxiliary valve. This force controls admission of input air to the top of piston (2). The piston surface area is greater than the main valve disc area; therefore, the piston tends to open the main valve disc area admitting reduced pressure flow to the output side of the valve. This also tends to open the auxiliary valve. However, reduced pressure through low-pressure port (8) presses the diaphragm upward tending to close the auxiliary valve. The two opposing forces on the auxiliary valve balance at a set constant output air pressure of 22 psig nominal.

3-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-5. Low-Pressure Valve A-V-119 3-4. WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM. The water pressurization subsystem is shown integrated with the total system in Figure FO-8, and parts are repeated in Figures FO-12 and FO-13 to facilitate discussion.

3-4.1 DOME WATER FILL/PRESSURIZATION. (See Figure FO-12.) The water pressurization subsystem has two available water sources: (1) ship’s firemain seawater supply at 150 (±25) psig, and (2) dockside freshwater supply at 50 (±10) psig, only one of which is used at a time. The seawater and freshwater input paths join together after the seawater pressure reduction to 50 psig. The dome water fill/pressurization discussion is divided into three parts: (1) seawater input, (2) freshwater input, and (3) common seawater/freshwater path. a. Seawater Input. The dome is normally filled with freshwater and statically pressurized from the ship’s firemain supply. Seawater at 150 (±25) psig is supplied to the SDRW system at cutout valve W-V-1. From W-V-1, water flows through check valve W-V-53 and Y-strainer W-F-43 to pressure gage W-GA-38 and associated cutout valves W-V-64 and W-V-4. The check valve allows water flow in only one direction. The Y-strainer

3-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

traps large particles to reduce fouling of downstream components. The strainer basket can be flushed by opening valve W-V-2 which allows water to flow through the basket and out an overboard discharge. The firemain input supply pressure is monitored by gage W-GA-38. From W-F-43, water passes through orifice W-F-28, which limits the maximum flow to 220 gpm, to pressure reducer W-V-7. Reducer W-V-7 reduces the pressure from a nominal level of 150 psig to 50 (±5) psig. Associated with W-V-7 are two cutout valves, W-V-5 and W-V-8, and bypass valve W-V-3. The cutout valves are normally open and the bypass valve is normally closed. The seawater, at reduced pressure, is then applied to pressure gage W-GA-39 and associated cutout valves W-V-65 and W-V-9; W-GA-39 also monitors the freshwater input pressure when dockside freshwater is in use. b. Freshwater Input. Freshwater pressurization is used when the ship is dockside for extended periods, and during certain Planned Maintenance System (PMS) procedures to prevent clogging of critical valves and contamination of the dome by dirty firemain seawater. Freshwater at 50 (±10) psig is supplied to the SDRW system by a hose connection between a dockside facility and hose valve W-V-6. Water is then applied to cutout valve W-V-61, check valve W-V-55, and orifice W-F-34. Valve W-V-62 is used to drain the piping between W-V-6 on the forecastle and W-V-61 in the dome equipment room to prevent freezing. Check valve W-V-55 allows one-way water flow. Orifice W-F-34 limits the flow to a maximum of 220 gpm. The output of the orifice is applied to gage W-GA-39. c. Common Seawater/Freshwater Path. The remainder of the water pressurization subsystem is identical whether seawater or freshwater supply is used. From gage W-GA-39, water is applied to pressure reducer W-V-16. Reducer W-V-16 reduces the water pressure from a normal level of 50 psig to a level which will maintain dome pressure at 39.5 (+2, -0) psig. Associated with W-V-16 are two cutout valves, W-V-15 and W-V-18, and bypass valve W-V-17. The cutout valves are normally open and the bypass valve is normally closed. The output of the pressure reducer is applied to flow switch E-F-29 which senses water flow in the system and actuates the appropriate indicator on dome status panel E-PN-45. If the flow is less than 2.5 gpm, the WTR VALVE OFF indicator will illuminate; if the flow is greater than 2.5 gpm, the WTR VALVE ON indicator will illuminate. From the flow switch, the water passes to pressure gage W-GA-41 and associated cutouts W-V-66 and W-V-19, relief valve W-V-31, cutout valve W-V-24, flex hose isolation valve W-V-59, damage control valve DC-V-96, and to dome water fill hose W-H-37. Gage W-GA-41 indicates the output pressure of pressure reducer W-V-16 at 39.5 (+2, -0) psig less head pressure. Relief valve W-V-31 is set to relieve at 47 (±1) psig less head pressure. Head pressure is the static pressure created by the weight of the water in the vertical piping between the dome control station and the dome reference level (minus 4-foot baseline (BL), see Figure FO-10) an is equal to 0.44 psig per foot of elevation. Head pressure for each SDRW system can be determined as the pressure differential between gages W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 at the dome control station when the dome is water pressurized. This value is determined at the time of installation and is inscribed on the operating instruction plate at the dome control station. Relief valve W-V-31 relieves excessive dome pressure in case W-V-16 fails. Valve W-V-24 is used to isolate the dome allowing it to retain its internal pressure in case of a piping failure. Five vent lines are located in the top of the dome (two forward, one center, and two aft) and connected to vent valve W-V-27 located on the water piping panel. The vent valve allows venting of air pockets in the dome. Remote dome gage/water pressure switch W-GA-10 is a Barton indicator/switch gage or Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator. The Barton indicator/switch gage has the sensor bellows mounted in the rotunda at dome reference level (minus 4-foot BL), and pressure indicator mounted on the dome gage panel. The sensor bellows transmits water pressure below the bellows to an incompressible fluid in a capillary tube extending from the top of the bellows to pressure indicator W-GA-10. Thus, The BartonW-GA-10 is not affected by a differential head pressure between the dome and dome control station. The Barton Gage W-GA-10 also contains two cam- The remainder of the water pressurization subsystem is identical whether seawater or freshwater supply is used. From gage W-GA-39, water is applied to pressure reducer W-V-16. Reducer W-V-16 reduces the water pressure from a normal level of 50 psig to a level which will maintain dome pressure at 39.5 (+2, -0) psig. Associated with W-V-16 are two cutout valves, W-V-15 and W-V-18, and bypass valve W-V-17. The cutout valves are normally open and the bypass valve is normally closed. The output of the pressure reducer is applied to flow switch E-F-29 which senses water flow in the

3-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

system and actuates the appropriate indicator on dome status panel E-PN-45. If the flow is less than 2.5 gpm, the WTR VALVE OFF indicator will illuminate; if the flow is greater than 2.5 gpm, the WTR VALVE ON indicator will illuminate. From the flow switch, the water passes to pressure gage W-GA-41 and associated cutouts W-V-66 and W-V-19, relief valve W-V-31, cutout valve W-V-24, flex hose isolation valve W-V-59, damage control valve DC-V-96, and to dome water fill hose W-H-37. Gage W-GA-41 indicates the output pressure of pressure reducer W-V-16 at 39.5 (+2, -0) psig less head pressure. Relief valve W-V-31 is set to relieve at 47 (±1) psig less head pressure. Head pressure is the static pressure created by the weight of the water in the vertical piping between the dome control station and the dome reference level (minus 4-foot baseline (BL), See Figure FO-10) and is equal to 0.44 psig per foot of elevation. Head pressure for each SDRW system can be determined as the pressure differential between gages W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 at the dome control station when the dome is water pressurized. This value is determined at the time of installation and is inscribed on the operating instruction plate at the dome control station. Relief valve W-V-31 relieves excessive dome pressure in case W-V-16 fails. Valve W-V-24 is used to isolate the dome allowing it to retain its internal pressure in case of a piping failure. Five vent lines are located in the top of the dome (two forward, one center, and two aft) and connected to vent valve W-V-27 located on the water piping panel. The vent valve allows venting of air pockets in the dome. Remote dome gage/water pressure switch W-GA-10 is a Barton indicator/switch gage or Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator. The Barton indicator/switch gage has the sensor bellows mounted in the rotunda at dome reference level (minus 4-foot BL), and pressure indicator mounted on the dome gage panel. The sensor bellows transmits water pressure below the bellows to an incompressible fluid in a capillary tube extending from the top of the bellows to pressure indicator W-GA-10. Thus, The BartonW-GA-10 is not affected by a differential head pressure between the dome and dome control station. The Barton Gage W-GA-10 also contains two cam-operated micro switches from W-GA-10 pressure indicator drive shaft. These limit switches provide low- and high-water pressure signals to the alarm panels. The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator pressure transducer sensor P-X-26 is mounted in the Airlock. The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator offsets the transducer output to simulate pressure at the level (minus 4-foot BL). The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator provides low- and high-water pressure signals to the alarm panels. switches provide low- and high-water pressure signals to the alarm panels. The Digital Elec- tronic Pressure Indicator pressure transducer sensor P-X-26 is mounted in the Airlock. The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator offsets the transducer output to simulate pressure at the level (minus 4-foot BL). The Digi- tal Electronic Pressure Indicator provides low- and high-water pressure signals to the alarm panels.

3-4.2 DOME WATER REMOVAL. (Figure FO-13). Water is removed from the dome and the dome is air pressurized when dome entry or at-sea freshwater to seawater exchanges are to be performed. When water-to-air interchange is performed, freshwater water is secured to the dome by closing valves W-V-6, W-V-61 (see Figure FO-8), W-V-24, and W-V-5. The air pressurization subsystem is used to supply static air to the dome at 22 (+1, -5) psig through A-V-127 (see Figure FO-11). Normally closed valves, overboard cutout W-V-11, damage control valve W-V-(4-41-2), and solenoid cutout W-V-49, are opened; W-V-12 remains closed. Water flow overboard is started by positioning the solenoid CLOSED/OPEN switch on panel E-PN-44 to the OPEN position which energizes relay E-K-142 and opens solenoid valve E-V-21 energizing the E-F-33 (E-V-21) OPEN light. The water flow path overboard is through water fill/removal hose W-H-37, damage control valve DC-V-96, check valve W-V-56, cutout valve W-V-49, solenoid valve E-V-21, eductor W-F-13, damage control valve W-V-(4-41-2), check valve W-V-54, and overboard cutout W-V-11 During water removal, dome pressure above the water surface is maintained at 22 (+1 -5) psig by the incoming air. Water can only be removed as fast as the incoming air flow rate. If the air flow stops, solenoid valve E-V-21 closes when the air pressure in the dome drops to 12 (±1) psig maintaining pressure in the dome. As long as the air pressure remains constant, A-F-124 indicates water removal rate. Water removal continues until the dome low-level water switch E-F-42 is activated. The switch activates in approximately three hours with approximately four inches of water remaining in the dome. When E-F-42 activates, relay E-K-142 deenergizes causing solenoid valve E-V-21 to close, stopping water overboard flow. The eductor is used only as piping during this water-removal phase. Water passes through the eductor, but is not being educted.

3-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3-4.3 DOME/AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY/AIRLOCK WATER SWEEP. (Figure FO-13). The remainder of the dome water is removed by using eductor W-F-13 and a portable sweep hose assembly, consisting of W-H-36, W-V-48, and W-H-52 inside the dome. The main water removal path is isolated by closing W-V-49. The eductor can now be utilized by applying 150 psig firemain from a connection between Y-strainer W-F-43 and orifice W-F-28, through cutout valve W-V-12, eductor W-F-13, damage control valve W-V-(4-41-2), check valve W-V-54 and overboard cutout valve W-V-11. The flow of water through the eductor creates a vacuum at the suction inlet of the eductor. Gage W-GA-40, with associated cutout valve W-V-20, monitors this vacuum, nominally 20 to 30 inches Hg. The water sweep path is through the sweep hose assembly, dome cutout valve W-V-23, sweep cutout valve W-V-22, check valve W-V-60, eductor W-F-13, damage control valve W-V-(4-41-2), check valve W-V-54, and overboard cutout valve W-V-11. In the event water has leaked into the airlock passageway or airlock, the sweep hose assembly may be connected to airlock passageway cutout W-V-25 which utilizes the same sweep path. Sweep hoses W-H-36 and W-H-52 are stored on a bracket located in the sonar dome Passageway.

3-4.4 SPECIAL WATER PRESSURIZATION COMPONENTS. a. The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) W-GA-10 The Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) W-GA-10 (Figure 3-6) is designed to display actual sonar dome pressure in PSIG at a reference level of 4 feet below the overhead of the transducer compartment. At this level, the indicated pressure represents the average internal pressure of the sonar dome. Pressure Sensing Capillary Tubing: A double loop seal, which is immediately upstream of the pressure sensing (open) end of the capillary tubing, prevents drainage of water from the capillary tubing during sonar dome dewatering procedures. There is a cutout valve (W-V-57) installed that allows isolation of the capillary tubing during repair or replacement of transducer P-X-26. During normal operations W-V-25 is in the open position at all time. Vent valve Transducer Test Point Connection (TPC) (W-V-46) provides maintenance personnel with the capability to purge air pockets from the capillary tubing during sonar dome water filling procedures. The TPC also provides a connection point for calibration equipment. During normal operations W-V-46 is in the open position at all times. The capillary tubing is routed to the airlock compartment where it terminates into pressure transducer P-X-26. Pressure transducer P-X-26 is a sealed unit which converts input pressure to an 4 to 20 dcmA electrical output signal. Changes in input pressure levels will vary amperage levels, which, in turn, changes the indicated PSIG pressure display on the DEPI. The P-X-26 transducer is connected to the DEPI through a cable which is provided with an in-line quick disconnect fitting. The quick disconnect fitting permits replacement of transducer P-X-26. The Prime DEPI is programmed through switches located in the front panel. A simple user interface allows for the set up of the unit where High Alarm, Low Alarm, Alarm Delay, and curve data are set up for the particular application at hand. This set up information is retained in a non-volatile memory that is installed in the Main Board.

3-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-6. Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) W-GA-10 1.

3-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

b. Dome Pressure Barton Gage W-GA-10 (Figures 3-7 and 3-8). Remote dome gage/pressure switch W-GA-10 is a pressure indicator switch which indicates dome pressure at reference level (minus 4-foot BL) relative to atmospheric pressure, and activates low- and high-pressure limit switches. Dome pressure is applied to sensor unit (1) (Figure 3-7) bellows (2), and transmitted without loss through incompressible mineral oil in bellows (2) and capillary tube (3) to the gage differential pressure unit (DPU) (4). The capillary tube is connected to the sensor unit (1) through quick disconnect (5) permitting its installation without loss of tube oil. The DPU contains two bellows: high-pressure bellows (6) activated (compressed) by sensor unit (1) output pressure, and low-pressure bellows (7) vented to the atmosphere. The differential movement between the high (6) and the low (7) DPU bellows is mechanically transferred to the torque tube shaft (8). In turn, the movement of the torque tube shaft is transmitted through the gage movement follower arm and associated mechanism to deﬂect the gage pointer proportionally to DPU differential pressure. The pointer thereby indicates dome pressure relative to atmospheric pressure. Dome pressure gage W-GA-10 switches (2) and (3) (Figure 3-8) are cam- operated microswitches linked to the torque tube shaft (8) (Figure 3-8). The switch operating pointers are adjusted by switch adjusting screws (4) (Figure 3-8), on the gage face. Switch setting indicators (5) on the gage face indicate switch settings in percent of full scale. The low dome pressure switch (2) is set for 41% or 25 psig, and the high dome pressure switch (3) is set for 70% or 44 psig.

Figure 3-7. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10

3-14 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-8. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10 Pressure Switches c. Solenoid Valve E-V-21 (Figure 3-9). Solenoid valve E-V-21 (Figure 3-9) is an electrically operated valve. When 115 VAC is applied to the solenoid coil (1), the resulting magnetic ﬁeld pulls up the solenoid plunger rod which is mechanically connected to the pilot stem. This action overcomes the pilot valve spring that normally holds the pilot valve close (4) and relieves input water pressure from the main valve (5) allowing the main valve to open. When the 115 VAC is removed from the solenoid coil, the plunger rod is released and the

3-15 S9165-AE-MMA-010

pilot/main valve is pulled close from suction caused by the inertia of the water ﬂowing through the valve. This action is slightly assisted by a light external spring. When E-V-21 opens, the arm connected to the plunger rod make contact with the micro switch mounted on E-V-21, closes energizing the E-F-33 OPEN indicator in the dome control station giving an indication that the valve is physically opened.

Figure 3-9. Eductor Solenoid Valve E-V-21 d. Eductor W-F-13 (Figure 3-10). Eductor W-F-13 is a water-powered pump which creates a suction inlet (1) to lift residual water from the dome, airlock, or airlock passageway during sweep operations. Firemain water at 125 (±25) psig ﬂows through the driving inlet (2) and venturi-shaped nozzle (3) to discharge outlet (4). The reduced nozzle area causes the ﬁremain water velocity to be greatly increased. Venturi action creates a vacuum at the suction inlet. The size of the discharge outlet is gradually increased to reduce the discharge water velocity.

3-16 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-10. Eductor W-F-13

3-5. ELECTRICAL CONTROL/ALARMS SUBSYSTEM.

The electrical control/alarms subsystem is divided into three parts: (1) audible alarms, Figure FO-14; (2) visual alarms, Figure FO-15; and (3) eductor solenoid valve control, Figures 3-11 and FO-21. Figure FO-16 shows the electrical control/alarms subsystem interconnection cabling.

3-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-11. Simpliﬁed Schematic of SDRW Eductor Solenoid Valve Control Circuit 3-5.1 AUDIBLE ALARMS. (Figure FO-14). Audible alarms are located on dome control panel (dome control station) E-PN-44 and dome status panel (sonar control area) E-PN-45. Alarms sound for low dome water pressure at 25 (±1) psig, high dome water pressure at 44 (±1) psig, and low dome air pressure at 12 (±1) psig. a. Alarm Inputs. The panel alarms are activated in parallel from the WATER PRESS. and AIR PRESS. lines indicated in Figure FO-14. The WATER PRESS. line is energized indirectly from high and low dome water- pressure limit switches contained within gage W-GA-10, refer to paragraph 3-4.4a). When low (below 25 (±1) psig) or high (above 44 (±1) psig) water-pressure conditions exist, the low- or high-pressure limit switch in W-GA-10 closes and relay K1 or K2 in E-PN-50 is energized. Parallel sets of normally open contacts of K1 and K2 then energize the WATER PRESS. line from one side of the 115 VAC line. The AIR PRESS. line is energized directly from one side of the 115 VAC line through normally open contacts of low air-pressure alarm switch E-F-32. b. Panel E-PN-45 Operation (Figure 3-12). The WATER PRESS. line enters E-PN-45 at (A) through interlock switch S1-2 to the load (L.D.) side of solid-state switch S4 to junction (C). When the switch (SW) side of S4 is closed through interlock switch S3-2 and the contact of dome full indicator switch E-F-14, continuity across the L.D. side terminals results. When the contact of E-F-14 is open, the L.D. terminals of S4 are open. The AIR PRESS. line enters panel E-PN-45 at (B) through interlock S3-1 to junction (C). When air is circulating through the dome, normal pressure is 14 (±1) psig. Therefore, the low dome water pressure input signal must be disabled when the dome is pressurized with air. When dome water level drops seven inches below the dome

3-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010

baseline flat, E-F-14 energizes opening its normally closed contact in SW side of S4 and disconnects the WATER PRESS. line from junction (C). When the dome is filled with water, the contact of E-F-14 is closed and the WATER PRESS. line is connected to the AIR PRESS. line. From junction (C) parallel paths exist to panel E-PN-45 exit point (D) through interlock switch S1-3 to the 115 VAC line return. The right-hand C-D path energizes alarm buzzer DS-7. The left-hand C-D path provides a five-minute alarm silence interval. When momentary contact switch S2 is depressed, alarm inputs from junction (C) are applied to the coil of relay K1 through the normally closed contact of time-delay relay K2. The normally open contact of relay K1 (in parallel with S2) and the normally closed contact of K2 provide a holding circuit for K1. The normally open contact of K1 also provides power to the coil of relay K2. Time-delay relay K2 does not energize for five minutes. When relay K2 energizes, its normally closed contact opens breaking the holding circuit and deenergizing K1. During the five-minute interval that K1 was energized, its normally closed contact in series with DS-5 was open and buzzer DS-7 was silenced.

Figure 3-12. Dome Status Panel E-PN-45 Audible Alarm c. Panel E-PN-44 Operation. Neon indicators in each panel indicate power presence when panel doors are opened. When the dome is ﬁlled with water, the WATER PRESS. and LOW AIR PRESS. lines indicated in Figure FO-14 are still connected together. Therefore, when any panel door is opened, all neon indicators in the open panel will be lit if a low or high water-pressure alarm condition exists. When the dome is pressur-

3-19 S9165-AE-MMA-010

ized with air, the E-F-14 contacts open and WATER PRESS. and AIR PRESS. lines are not connected together. However, the WATER PRESS. line will be energized because dome air pressure is below 25 (±1) psig. Thus, if one of the panels is opened and a low air-pressure condition exists, all internal indicators in the opened panel will light. If air pressure is not low, DS-6 of E-PN-45 would light if corresponding panel door was opened.

3-5.2 VISUAL ALARMS. (Figure FO-15). Visual indicators on panels E-PN-44 and E-PN-45 monitor the SDRW system operation status. Indicators are energized from the secondary of a 115-to-5 VAC step-down transformer T1 in each panel through the appropriate alarm sensor switch contacts. Transformer primaries are connected in parallel from the 115 VAC PRIMARY line (indicated in Figure FO-15) and interlock switches S1-1 and S1-3 in each panel. Transformer secondaries are connected in parallel from the 5 VAC SECONDARY line, and interlock switch S1-4 in each panel through the secondary winding to ground. All panels are provided with water LOW PRESS. and HIGH PRESS. indicators energized through contacts of E-PN-50 relays K1 and K2, respectively. Relays K1 and K2 are energized through water low- and high-pressure limit switches in W-GA-10. In addition, panel E-PN-45 provides dome water flow and panel E-PN-44 provides dome water level information. For dome water flow less than 2.5 gpm, dome water flow switch E-F-29 is as indicated in Figure FO-15, and the WTR VALVE OFF indicator in E-PN-45 is lit. For water flow greater than 2.5 gpm, E-F-29 switches lighting the WTR VALVE ON indicator and turning off the WTR VALVE OFF indicator in E-PN-45. The dome full indicator switch E-F-14 position is shown for dome water level within seven inches of the baseline flat. Under this condition, the DOME FULL indicator in panel E-PN-44 is lit. When water level drops more than seven inches below the baseline flat, E-F-14 switches turning off the DOME FULL indicator. The DOME EMPTY indicator switch E-F-42 position is shown for dome water level higher than four inches from the banjo. Under this condition, the E-PN-44 DOME EMPTY indicator is off. When dome water level drops below four inches of the banjo, E-F-42 switches lighting the DOME EMPTY indicator in E-PN-44. LP AIR SUPPLY FAILURE indicator E-F- 180 is actuated by LP air supply failure switch E-F-175 when ship’s low-pressure air supply drops below 85 (±2) psig. Each panel alarm indicator has a push-to-test feature which places the indicators across 5 VAC. The indicator light labeled P/O S2 in panel E-PN-45 provides background lighting for the ALARM SILENCE pushbutton. Internal neon light DS-5 for E-PN-44 and E-PN-45 indicates presence of 115 VAC power in panels when panel doors are opened. The E-F-33 OPEN light is located on the dome control station gage panel and lights when eductor solenoid valve E-V-21 opens.

3-5.3 EDUCTOR SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT. (Figures 3-12 and FO-21). The eductor solenoid valve control circuit provides both manual and automatic operation of the eductor solenoid valve E-V-21 during the dome water removal operation. Manual operation is controlled by positioning of the solenoid OPEN/ CLOSED switch on dome control panel E-PN-44. When the switch is closed, it completes the circuit through closed contacts of DOME EMPTY indicator switch E-F-42 providing continuity across the SW terminals S3 in the dome control panel. This results in continuity across S3 L.D. terminals. Solenoid control relay E-K-142 is then energized from 115 VAC through interlock switch S1-1, fuse F-1, closed contacts of low air-pressure alarm switch E-F-32, and L.D. terminals of S3. The contacts of E-K-142 close providing 115 VAC to the coil of eductor solenoid valve E-V-21. Energizing E-V-21 causes the valve to open allowing dome water removal. Automatic operation of the circuit is accomplished by the contacts of low air-pressure alarm switch E-F-32 and DOME EMPTY indicator switch E-F-42. When dome air pressure drops below 12 (±1) psig, the E-F-32 contacts open and remove the 115 VAC from the L.D. terminals of S3 in the dome control panel. This deenergizes E-K-142 and closes the solenoid valve. When dome water drops to within four inches of the banjo, the E-F-42 contacts open the line to S3 SW terminals in dome control panel E-PN-44. This removes the 115 VAC applied to E-K- 142 causing it to close the solenoid valve.

3-5.4 CONTROL/ALARMS INTERCONNECTION CABLING. (Figure FO-16). The cables and terminal boxes connecting the alarm sensors to the alarm panels are shown in Figure FO-16. All alarm and control signals pass through main terminal box E-PN-50 located in the dome equipment room. All cables and components not designated otherwise in Figure FO-16 are also located in the dome equipment room.

3-5.5 SPECIAL CONTROL ALARMS COMPONENTS. a. Water Flow Switch E-F-29 (See Figure 3-13.) Dome water ﬂow switch E-F-29 contains a spring (1), biased magnetic shuttle (2), and a hermetically sealed reed SPDT switch (3). When the water ﬂow is less than 2.5 gpm, the spring bias prevents the magnetic shuttle from activating the switch. In this condition, the normally

3-20 S9165-AE-MMA-010

closed switch contacts apply 5 VAC to the WTR VALVE OFF indicator on dome status panel E-PN-45. When the water ﬂow is greater than 2.5 gpm, the shuttle lifting force overcomes the spring bias and the magnet (4) causes the switch (3) to activate. In this condition, the normally closed contacts open causing the WTR VALVE OFF indicator to go out, and the normally open contacts apply 5 VAC to the WTR VALVE ON indicator.

NOTE

WATER-LEVEL SWITCH OPERATION IS DESCRIBED WITH DOME FULL OF WATER (FLOAT UP).

Figure 3-13. Water Flow Switch E-F-29 b. Water Level Switches E-F-42 and E-F-14. (See Figure 3-14.) The low/high water-level switches contain dual single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches (1) operated by magnetic float (2). The switches are glass enclosed and hermetically sealed within the stem (3). Water entering the vent opening (4) causes the magnet (5) imbedded in the float (2) to move upward along the stem (3). When the float (2) level reaches approximately the midpoint of the stem, the dual SPDT switches (1), are activated by the magnetic field. 1. Dome empty indicator switch E-F-42 has one set of normally open contacts and one set of normally closed contacts. The normally open contacts control the 5 VAC to the DOME EMPTY indicator on dome control panel E-PN-44. The normally closed contacts control the SW contacts of S3 in dome control panel E-PN-44 which controls solenoid valve E-V-21. The bottom of the E-F-42 switch is in-line with the top of the 3” Dome Fill/Empty hose that is also located below the transducer array. This is critical to prevent collapsing the dome during dewatering procedures. Beyond that, residual water (i.e. below the level of E-F- 42) must be swept out by using the SDPS eductor prior to sliding under the transducer array. 2. Dome full indicator switch E-F-14 has two sets of normally closed contacts. One set of contacts controls the 5 VAC to the DOME FULL indicator in dome control panel E-PN-44. The other set of contacts controls the SW contacts of S4 in dome status panel E-PN-45, which controls the audible alarms.

3-21 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-14. Water-Level Switches E-F-42 and E-F-14 c. Air Pressure Switches E-F-32 and E-F-175. (See Figure 3-15.) Air pressure switches E-F-32 and E-F-175 consist of a pressure-sensitive, metallic bellows (1) attached to a switch assembly (2). Air input (3) pressure applied to the bottom of the bellows tends to compress the bellows and activate the switch. A permanent magnet in the switch assembly provides positive switch opening and closing. An adjusting screw (4) sets the switch actuating point by adjusting spring (5) tension applied to the top of the bellows. 1. LP air supply failure switch E-F-175 contacts are set to close when the bellows sense a drop in pressure below 85 (±2) psig lighting LP AIR SUPPLY FAILURE indicator E-F-180. 2. Low air-pressure alarm switch E-F-32 has two sets of contacts set to activate when the air input pressure drops to 12 (±1) psig. One set opens and closes eductor solenoid valve E-V-21. The other set closes and sounds the panel alarms.

3-22 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-15. Air Pressure Switches E-F-32 and E-F-175 d. Air Flow Meter A-F-124, Brooks Model 1320-03B1C (See Figures 3-16 or 3-17). Air Flow Meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 1320-03B1C (Figure 3-17) is no longer available for sale from Brooks Instruments. Brooks Model 3810A14A1RAA1A1 (Figure 3-16) replaces Brooks Model 1320-03B1C Figure 3-17). Air flow meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 3810A14A1RAA1A1 (Figure 3-16) is inserted in the dome air flow path, and flow rate indication is provided by means of magnetic coupling where a magnet, encapsulated in the float, is coupled to a rotatable magnet located in the rear of the indicator, thus turning the dial indicator mounted on the meter. Air flow meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 1320-03B1C (Figure 3-17) is inserted in the dome air flow path, and the resulting pressure differential across meter orifice (1) is used to indicate air flow rate. The meter orifice pressure drop is coupled across the ends of a calibrated glass tube (2) containing an indicator ball (3) which rises in the tube to a height proportional to the pressure drop across the meter orifice and, therefore, air flow rate.

3-23 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-16. Air Flow Meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 3810A14A1RAA1A1

Figure 3-17. Air Flow Meter A-F-124 Brooks Model 1320-03B1C

3-24 S9165-AE-MMA-010 e. Solid-State Alarm Panel Switches. (See Figure 3-18.) The Load-Pak switching units used in the audible alarm and eductor control circuits, 5-amp and 10-amp units, respectively, are solid-state devices which perform the same function as a relay. The active component of the Load-Pak is a triac semi-conductor. The triac is equivalent to two silicone control rectiﬁers (SCR’s) connected back to back as shown in Figure 3-18. A positive gate voltage switches the triac on when it is forward biased, and a negative gate voltage switches it on when it is reverse biased. Each portion or SCR alternately conducts on each sine wave half cycle. The triac remains on and continues to conduct until it is no longer forward or reverse biased.

Figure 3-18. Solid-State Alarm Panel Switches

3-6. DOME ACCESS SUBSYSTEM.

Figure 3-19 shows the airlock, airlock passageway, and dome piping components which comprise the dome access subsystem. The airlock allows personnel transfer from the airlock passageway at atmospheric pressure to the dome air pressurized at 14 (±1) psig. The following gages monitor airlock pressure.

3-25 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-19. SDRW Dome Access Subsystem 3-6.1 AIRLOCK PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY PRESSURE. A-GA-140, with associated cutout valve A-V-171, indicates airlock pressure referenced to airlock passageway pressure. A-GA-140 reads 0 psig when the airlock is unpressurized and 14 psig when airlock pressure is equalized to dome pressure.

3-6.2 DOME PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PRESSURE. A-GA-136, with associated cutout valve A-V-137, indicates dome pressure referenced to airlock pressure. A-GA-136 reads 14 psig with the airlock unpressurized, and 0 psig when airlock pressure is equalized to dome pressure.

3-6.3 AIRLOCK PRESSURE REFERENCED TO AIRLOCK PASSAGEWAY PRESSURE. A-GA-139, with associated cutout valve A-V-170, indicates airlock pressure referenced to airlock passageway pressure. A-GA-139 reads 0 psig with the airlock unpressurized, and 14 psig when airlock pressure is equalized to dome pressure. In addition, gage A-GA-167 indicates dome pressure referenced to airlock passageway pressure. A-GA-167 reads 14 psig when the dome is pressurized with air. To pressurize the airlock from the airlock, valve A-V-138 is opened allowing air from the dome to enter the airlock through A-V-138. Air ﬂow continues for approximately two minutes until the airlock/dome pressures are equalized. To depressurize the airlock from the airlock, valve A-V-157 is opened allowing air from the airlock to enter the airlock passageway through A-V-157. Air ﬂow continues for approximately two minutes until the airlock is depressurized. Airlock passageway valve A-V-141 provides for equalizing the airlock and airlock passageway pressures from the airlock passageway. Likewise, dome

3-26 S9165-AE-MMA-010 valve A-V-158 provides for equalizing airlock and dome pressures from the dome. Water ﬁll/removal hose W-H-37 is capped with hose cap W-F-63 while personnel are in the pressurized dome. It is stored on a threaded mount in the airlock.

3-7. COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM.

The communication subsystem provides sound-powered phone communication between all areas critical to the SDRW system operation. During personnel dome entry, communication is required between the dome, airlock, airlock passageway, dome control station, and forecastle. Figure FO-17 shows the X25J sound-powered circuit provided exclusively for the SDRW system. For operation inside the dome, sonar dome portable communications panel E-PN-179 is taken into the dome and connected to the call-bell circuit by means of a watertight feedthrough connector. Each phone station except the forecastle is provided with call-bell pushbuttons and a buzzer (see Figure FO-18.) Depressing a call-bell pushbutton at any station sounds the buzzer at the other stations. As indicated in Figure FO-18, the dome lighting circuit passes through lighting cutout switch E-F-181, and the dome call-bell circuit passes through call-bell cutout switch E-F-182 located in the airlock passageway. Dur- ing dome entry operations, these switches must be in the OFF position until the E-PN-179 cable is connected to its feedthrough connector and a sound-powered phone headset is connected to its feedthrough connector. The feedthrough connectors are capped when the dome is ﬁlled with water.

3-8. GENERAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS.

General air/water pressurization components include standard piping cutout valves, check valves, pressure relief and reducing valves, and pressure gages.

3-8.1 CUTOUT VALVES. Cutout valves are manually operated valves which are inserted in the pipe run to stop or control flow. A number of different types are used to conform to different operating requirements. a. Gate Valve. (See Figure 3-20.) The moving parts of a gate valve consist of a handwheel, gate, and connecting valve stem. For the non-rising stem-type gate valve (Figure 3-20), the gate is threaded to the stem and raises and lowers on the stem threads as the handle is turned. For rising stem-type gate valves (Figure 3-21), the stem is threaded into the bonnet and the gate firmly attached to the stem. As the handle turns the stem, the stem and gate raise or lower together. When fully lowered, the gate wedges with the inlet/outlet gate seat rings stopping flow. The shape of the gate permits an unrestricted in-line flow when the valve is fully open, and a strong, positive seal when the valve is closed. When a gate is partially open, the flow causes uneven wear of the gate and gate seat; therefore, a gate valve is not normally used to throttle flow.

3-27 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-20. Gate Valve (Non-Rising Stem-type)

Figure 3-21. Gate Valve (Rising Stem-type) b. Quick-Acting Gate Valve W-V-48. (See Figure 3-22.) The quick-acting gate valve is similar to the standard gate valve except a lever and stem mechanism provides valve opening and closing.

3-28 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-22. Quick-Acting Gate Valve W-V-48 c. Globe Valves. (See Figure 3-23.) A globe valve operates on the same principle as a gate valve, but has a disc instead of a gate. The handwheel and stem position the disc in relation to the seat ring providing closed, fully open, or throttled flow. The stem may be of the rising or nonrising type. The uniform fluid flow around the disc and seat ring ensures even distribution of disc and seat ring wear when the valve is partially open. Thus, a globe valve is suitable for throttling flow; however, full flow is partially restricted.

Figure 3-23. Angle Globe Valve

3-29 S9165-AE-MMA-010 d. Angle Hose Valve W-V-6. (See Figure 3-24.) An angle hose valve is a globe cutout valve which permits connecting a ﬂexible hose line to a rigid piping. Flow through W-V-6 is in the opposite direction from normal globe valve ﬂow; therefore, the valve is not used for throttling.

Figure 3-24. Angle Hose Valve W-V-6 e. Needle Valve A-V-144. (See Figure 3-25.) A needle valve is a type of globe valve with a long, tapered needle point at the end of the valve stem. This needle acts as a disc passing through the tapered valve seat before actually seating. This conﬁguration permits a very gradual increase or decrease in the opening size, permitting a more precise control of ﬂow than an ordinary globe valve.

3-30 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-25. Needle Valve A-V-144 f. Gage Valve With Test Point. (See Figure 3-26.) A gage valve is a needle valve with an integral test point connection at the top of the stem. When closed, the input is sealed by the seating action of the needle against the seat. Pressure at the gate side or output of the valve is available at the test point through the hollow stem and stem opening.

3-31 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-26. Gage Valve With Test Point

3-8.2 CHECK VALVES. A check valve is a device which allows flow of liquid or gas in only one direction. a. Swing Check Valve. (See Figure 3-27.) A swing check valve can be used for either a liquid or gas. Input fluid pressure acts upon the disc carrier forcing it to pivot up to about the disc carrier pin allowing flow. Pres- sure from the reverse direction forces the disc carrier tighter against the seat which prevents reverse flow.

Figure 3-27. Swing Check Valve

3-32 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. Ball Float Check Valves A-V-126 and A-V-130. (See Figure 3-28.) A ball float check valve allows air flow in either direction while preventing water flow from the bottom to the top. In operation, water entering the valve at the bottom causes the ball float to lift and seal against the seat preventing water flow out the top of the valve. A view cover allows monitoring the valve operation.

Figure 3-28. Ball Float Check Valves A-V-126 and A-V-130 c. Automatic Liquid Drain Valve A-V-115. (See Figure 3-29.) Automatic liquid drain valve A-V-115 is a special check valve used to automatically drain liquid as it accumulates in air filter A-F-114. The automatic drain valve must be pressurized with air to operate. Liquid entering the drain valve forces a cellular rubber float upward opening the drain valve. Air pressure dispels the liquid and reseats the drain valve checking air flow.

3-33 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-29. Ball Float Liquid Drain Valve A-V-115

3-8.3 RELIEF VALVES W-V-31 AND A-V-122. (See Figure 3-30.) A relief valve limits the maximum allowed line pressure in the water or air line. The valve spring is adjusted to apply a pressure equal to the desired maximum allowable relief pressure (set point) against the disc forcing the disc against the valve seat. If the line pressure force tending to lift the disc exceeds the spring force tending to force the disc against the seat, the disc lifts from the seat venting the excess line pressure. The disc reseats when the force resulting from line pressure drops below the spring force.

3-34 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-30. Relief Valves W-V-31 and A-V-122

3-8.4 REDUCER VALVES W-V-7 AND W-V-16. (See Figure 3-31.) The reducer valve lowers the line pressure by throttling the ﬂow through the valve. This throttling action is controlled by the balanced forces of the spring pressure on the top of the diaphragm and the reduced outlet pressure applied to the lower side of the diaphragm. When the outlet or reduced pressure and the spring pressure are equal, the diaphragm and disc remain stationary maintaining a constant outlet pressure. If the outlet pressure increases, the diaphragm forces the stem upward which tends to close the valve reducing the outlet pressure. Conversely, a decrease in outlet pressure tends to open the valve and increase outlet pressure, thereby maintaining a constant output pressure equal to the adjusted spring pressure (set point).

3-35 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-31. Reducer Valves W-V-7 and W-V-16

3-8.5 PRESSURE GAGES. Pressure gages provide a visual indication of applied pressure and are used for monitoring system parameters. a. Simplex Bourdon Tube Gage. (See Figure 3-32.) A simplex pressure gage has a single, zero-to-full-scale pressure range. The internal Bourdon tube is in the shape of a C and is welded or silver-brazed to the stationary base. The free end of the tube is connected to the indicating mechanism by a linkage assembly. The threaded socket, welded to the stationary base, is the pressure connection. When pressure enters the Bourdon tube, the tube straightens out slightly and moves the link connected with the toothed gear sector. The teeth on the gear sector mesh with a small gear on the pinion to which the pointer is attached. Thus, when pressure in the tube increases, the gear mechanism pulls the pointer around the dial and registers the amount of pressure being exerted in the tube.

3-36 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-32. Simplex Bourdon Tube Gage b. Compound Bourdon Tube Gage W-GA-40. (See Figure 3-33.) The compound Bourdon tube pressure gage operation is identical to that of the simplex gage, but has a pressure range which extends from a minimum vacuum to a full maximum positive pressure.

Figure 3-33. Compound Bourdon Tube Gage W-GA-40 c. Differential Bourdon Tube Gage A-GA-139. (See Figure 3-34.)The Differential Bourdon Pressure Tube

3-37 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Gage looks identical to the Simplex Bourdon Tube Gage (Figure 3-32). The Differential Bourdon Tube Gage functions similarly to the Simplex Differential Gage, except that the differential pressure gage uses two Bour- don tubes and takes the difference of the two as its pressure indication. One Bourdon tube is the low pressure tube and is ported to the lower of the two pressures being measured, the other tube is the high pressure tube and is ported to the higher of the two pressures being measured. For A-GA-139 the low pressure port is piped to the airlock passageway and the high pressure port is piped into the airlock. Therefore A-GA-139 will indicate the pressure inside the airlock referenced to the airlock passageway, which is at atmospheric pressure.

Figure 3-34. Differential Bourdon Tube Gage A-GA-139 d. Differential Pressure Gage A-GA-117 (See Figure 3-31.) The differential pressure gage is used to sense the difference in pressure between the input and output of air filter A-F-114, and indicates when the filter elements are becoming dirty and clogged. The gage is a cylinder housing a piston, one end of the piston being a magnet. When a pressure difference exists between the two inputs at the ends of the cylinder, the piston moves proportionally against a compression spring. The magnetic flux field, from the magnet end of the piston, is coupled through the cylinder wall to the pointer, causing the pointer to deflect proportional to piston travel.

3-38 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 3-35. Differential Pressure Gage A-GA-117

3-39 / (3-40 Blank) 3-40 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 4

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

4-1. INTRODUCTION. Required preventive maintenance procedures to be performed on a scheduled basis are provided in Planned Maintenance System (PMS) documentation. OPNAVINST 4790.4 describes this system which also covers depart- mental and work center recordkeeping, as well as the Maintenance Index Page (MIP) and Maintenance Require- ment Cards (MRCs). MRCs cover scheduled inspection, testing, and lubricating procedures for the (NOUN NAME OF EQUIPMENT) covered by this manual.

4-1.1 EXTENT OF COVERAGE. The extensive and comprehensive scheduled maintenance provided by MRCs eliminates the need for any coverage within this chapter. Speciﬁc corrective maintenance is covered in Chapter 6 of this manual.

4-2. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT CARDS. A list of preventive maintenance procedures called Maintenance Requirement Cards are listed on the Main- tenance Index Page (MIP) for the applicable SDRW system.

4-3. OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST. Refer to MIP for applicable MRC.

4-4. DOME EXTERIOR INSPECTION. The sonar dome should be inspected each time the ship is drydocked. This procedure will serve as a preventive maintenance program for the dome. If a dome problem is suspected when the ship is aﬂoat, a diver inspection should be performed utilizing the Underwater Damage Assessment Television System (UDATS) AN/WXQ-1. The UDATS provides a television tape recording which documents the problem areas and allows those respon- sible to accurately assess the dome condition.

4-4.1 SDRW GRID MARKINGS. In order to facilitate improved diver orientation when inspecting sonar dome rubber windows, a system of white grid markings shall be painted on the SDRW. NOT APPLICABLE TO DOMES MARKED FROM THE FACTORY.

NOTE

ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATION 605005, THE EPOXY ANTIFOULING PAINT USED ON THE SDRW IS TRI LUX SIXTY- EIGHT WHITE OR EQUIVALENT. THE PAINT CAN BE PURCHASED THROUGH INTERLOX-INTERNATIONAL PAINT CO., 17 BATTERY PLACE, NEW YORK, NY 10004. a. Each white grid marking shall consist ofa2x2-inch square of white EPOXY NOFOUL paint (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2).

4-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 4-1. Starboard Proﬁle Looking Inboard

4-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 4-2. Bow On View Looking Aft b. The white 2 x 2-inch squares shall be painted on the dome as follows: 1. Starting at the bow (000° relative bearing) in a horizontal line along the periphery of the upper rubber window/fairing angle interface, painta2x2-inch square every 15° to a point 165° aft on both the port and starboard sides of the dome (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2). Directly above each square, paint 2-inch numbers indicating the bearing that the square represents, and add ″S″ or ″P″ to indicate starboard or port, as appropriate. 2. Starting at the bow (000° relative bearing) in a horizontal line along the periphery of the lower rubber window/fairing angle interface, painta2x2-inch square every 15° to a point 165° aft on both the port and the starboard sides of the dome (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2). Directly below each square, paint 2-inch numbers indicating the bearing that the square represents, and add ″S″ or ″P’ to indicate starboard or port, as appropriate. The required markings can be applied while the ship is in drydock and during the ﬁnal Exter- nal Fairness Test utilizing the dome inspection grid on Figures 4-1 and 4-2, as referenced.

CAUTION

SDRW MUST BE PRESSURIZED WITH AIR WHILE SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 FOR PROCEDURES. NOTE

WATER MAY LEAK FROM VOIDS AROUND PERIMETER OF RUBBER WINDOW FOR SEVERAL DAYS AFTER DRYDOCKING SHIP.

4-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

4-4.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES. Inspection of the dome system when the ship is dockside needs to be performed when there is reason to suspect that damage has occurred to the rubber window. External inspection and repair of the dome can be accomplished by a diver, and prior to waterborne dome entry. Internal inspection and repair of the dome can be made with the dome pressurized with air. Procedures for water-to-air transfer, and for personnel entry into the dome, are contained in Chapter 2. a. Inspect the following conditions, and note on a diver’s slate the physical dimensions and relative bearing of (use Figures 4-1 and 4-2 to determine bearings): 1. Cuts, pits, and gouges in the outer surface of the rubber window and the structural area within approximately 4 feet of the rubber window. 2. Separation in rubber plies, which are indicated as bulges or soft spots. 3. Previous repairs to the rubber window which have become faulty or have deteriorated. 4. Separation of the rubber window from the steel in the area of the closure plate. 5. Dents or cracks in the steel areas of the dome including the closure plate. 6. Peeling or absence of protective paint on the steel structural portion of the dome. 7. Peeling or spalling of the fairing compound on the structural portion of the dome including the banjo. 8. Exposed structural steel wire of the rubber window.

NOTE

IF RUBBER WINDOW STEEL WIRES ARE EXPOSED, CONTACT NAVSEA FOR AN ANALYSIS OF THE REPAIR. b. The following is the general inspection pattern to be followed to ensure complete coverage of the SDRW surface and the immediate steel structural areas:

CAUTION

DIVERS MUST EXERCISE CARE WHEN TOUCHING A DOME WITH STEEL WIRES EXPOSED.

NOTE

BECAUSE OF LIMITED CONTRAST, THE DIVER’S HANDS MAY OFTEN SENSE DAMAGE THAT THE EYE CANNOT DETECT. 1. The inspection team follows the stem, surveying both sides (port and starboard), and continues down to the upper marriage-line centerline. 2. Follow the upper marriage-line starboard and inspect the general area while swimming aft. After reaching the most aft point of the window, drop down approximately 3 feet (depending on water turbidity) and work forward to the dome centerline. This sweeping procedure should be followed until the complete starboard side has been inspected. The port side is inspected using this same procedure. 3. Inspect banjo area and the structural area to the water surface. 4. Complete report of damaged area.

4-4.3 INSPECTION ANALYSIS. a. It is difficult for the diver to make repairs to the dome while the ship is waterborne. In addition, the repair material and the surface of the area to be repaired are subject to contamination that can markedly reduce the strength of the bond. Therefore, decisions as to which repairs shall be made underwater should be based on such factors as the effect that the damage might have on the safety of the ship, the impairment of the sonar performance, and the retention of the strength of the window. b. If a pit, gouge, or separation of plies is suspected to be a source of sonar self-noise, it is recommended that

4-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

the defect be repaired regardless of its depth or extent. Small flaps of rubber in the order of 1/16-inch maximum thickness not suspected to be a source of sonar self-noise, or if cutoff will cause an insignificant amount of self-noise, can be cut off in a faired manner that will result in the least flow noise. A sufficient amount of the original 1/4-inch cover ply should remain to protect the wire reinforcement. The decision to make underwater repairs to a damaged area should be based on the seriousness of the problem. All information on damage should be brought to the attention of the ship’s commanding officer or an officer he has designated. All major findings should be reported to Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Wash- ington, D. C. 20376, using the format in Chapter 8, Figures 8-54 through 8-58.

4-4.4 SDRW REPAIR PROCEDURES. Refer to Chapter 6 for SDRW repair procedures.

4-5. SYSTEM OVERHAUL REQUIREMENTS. At each ship’s overhaul, the SDRW system should be tested following the installation checkout procedure in Chapter 8 of this manual. All faulty or suspected components should be overhauled or replaced.

4-6. DRYDOCK BLOCKING INSTRUCTIONS. For emergency repair or replacement of a rubber window, the ship shall be blocked a minimum of 12 feet between baseline flat and drydock floor. Note that it is necessary to use the special external shipping/installation fixture when removing and installing a window from a ship blocked at a height of less than 14 feet.

4-7. DEPRESSURIZING A DOME IN DRYDOCK. a. NAVSEA recommends depressurizing a dome for NOT more than 3 days. b. If a dome is to be depressurized for longer periods, the dome shall be supported as shown in Chapter 8, Figure 8-59. Supported as shown, the window may remain unpressurized indeﬁnitely. c. Install supports while pressurized at 14 psig (air). d. Maintain tension while at 14 psig (air) to apply full, but not depressed contact. e. Remove or relax slings prior to any hydrostatic-related tests. f. Banjo support blocks are not required for ships in drydock.

4-8. PROTECTING A DOME IN DRYDOCK.

NOTE

INITIAL CLEANING SHOULD BE CONDUCTED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER DRYDOCKING. For all drydock periods 3 days or longer, the window shall be covered as follows: a. Hose down window to wash off slime. b. Cover the entire surface of rubber window to protect it from direct sunlight. This prevents the loss of antifouling properties from the rubber. Use a good-quality, cloth-reinforced tape to secure the covering.

4-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. Drape a ﬂame-retardant cloth tarp, and tape the entire upper perimeter of the tarp so that no sparks can become trapped between the tarp and the window.

4-9. CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR RUBBER WINDOW.

a. A mild detergent can be used to clean the rubber. b. If a window is extremely fouled, sand-blasting with a ﬁne abrasive is permitted when authorized by NAVSEA.

4-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 5

TROUBLESHOOTING

5-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter identiﬁes detailed electrical and piping schematic diagrams, fault logic diagrams, and related information to aid in locating failures in the sonar dome rubber window (SDRW) system.

CAUTION

DOME PRESSURIZATION MUST BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES WHEN THE SHIP IS AFLOAT. IF AN EMERGENCY CONDITION EXISTS, REFER TO EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES OF CHAPTER 2.

5-2. TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. The troubleshooting index (Table 5-1) provides a cross-reference for the schematic diagrams, fault logic diagrams, and applicable material in other chapters of this manual.

Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index Functional Area Cross-References - Text, Illustrations, Procedures Functional Descrip- Schematic Dia- Alignment/Ad- tion Fault Logic Diagrams grams justment Air Pressurization Subsystem 3-3 FO-27 FO-8 and FO-11 6-2.3 Water Pressurization Sub- 3-4 FO-26 and FO-28 FO-8, FO-12, FO-13 6-2.2 system Electrical Control/Alarms 3-5 None FO-14, FO-15, 6-2.4 Subsystem FO-16, FO-19, FO-20, FO-21, FO-23, FO-24, FO-25 Communication Subsystem 3-7 None FO-17, FO-18, None FO-22

5-3. FAULT LOGIC DIAGRAMS.

(See Figures FO-26, FO-27, and FO-28) Fault logic diagrams are provided for malfunctioning water- and air- pressurization conditions. A branching series of questions leads to fault isolation. Note the signiﬁcance of the box frames: questions that can be answered are enclosed in a heavy shadow box, questions that require a change in condition or test setup are enclosed in a single-line rectangle, and probable-fault conclusion is outlined in a double-lined box. ″Yes″ branches are solid lines, and ″NO″ responses are dashed.

5-1 / (5-2 Blank) 5-2 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 6

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

SECTION I ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS

6.1 INTRODUCTION.

This chapter is presented in three sections. Section I presents the procedures necessary to perform any adjustments to the primary SDPS components that may be required in order to maintain the Sonar Dome Pressuriza- tion System (SDPS) within operational speciﬁcations. Section II presents necessary instructions to accomplish repairs and conduct performance testing of the repairable primary SDPS components. Section III provides procedural guidance for the removal and installation of all SDPS components.

6.2 LP AIR PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES.

WARNING

LP AIR PIPING IS CHARGED WITH PRESSURIZED AIR DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAU- TIONS.

CAUTION

ENSURE SONAR DOME REMAINS WATER FILLED AND PRESSUR- IZED AT REQUIRED LEVELS AT ALL TIMES DURING THE PERFOR- MANCE OF THESE PROCEDURES.

6.2.1 PRESSURE REDUCER A-V-119. See Figures 6-1 and FO-32.

6-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 6-1. Pressure Reducer Valve A-V-119 a. Ensure dome is pressurized with water.

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE. b. Verify valve alignment at Dome Control Station (0.5-28-0-Q) (1) A-V-110 Shut (2) A-V-127 Shut (3) A-V-129 Shut (4) A-V-155 Open (5) A-V-156 Open (6) A-V-166 Shut (7) A-V-131 Shut (locking device installed) (8) A-V-148 Open (9) A-V-118 Open (10) A-V-125 Open (11) A-V-112 Open (12) A-V-116 Open (13) ALP-V-207 Open (if installed) c. Vent accumulated condensate from LP Air system piping. (1) Slowly open valve A-V-110; observe air ﬂow through LP air system piping. (2) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-155; continue venting through drain valve A-V-155 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (3) Shut drain valve A-V-155. (4) Shut valve A-V-145. (5) Open bypass valve A-V-131.

6-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(6) Slowly open bypass valve A-V-166, observe air flow through LP air system piping. (7) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-156; continue venting through drain valve A-V-156 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (8) Shut drain valve A-V-156. (9) Shut bypass valve A-V-131. (10) Shut bypass valve A-V-166. d. Test and adjust pressure regulator A-V-119 (1) Observe that gage A-GA-109 indicates 125 (100 to 150) psig. (2) Observe that gage A-GA-106 indicates 110 (100 to 135) psig. If gage A-GA-106 does not indicate 110 psig (minimum), perform the following. (3) Observe air filter A-F-114 gage A-GA-117; indication should be less than 6 psid (in clean area). If gage A-GA-117 indication is greater than 6 psid, clean air filter A-F-114 and replace filter elements as described in MRC R-1. (4) Open valve A-V-155 for 1 minute; then shut valve A-V-155. (5) Observe gage A-GA-123 indication; gage A-GA-123 should indicate 22 (21 to 23) psig with no air flow through piping. If gage A-GA-123 indication is correct adjustment is complete. If gage A-GA-123 indication is incorrect, perform the following. (a) Loosen locknut on A-V-119 adjusting screw. (b) Turn pressure regulating valve adjusting screw CLOCKWISE to raise setpoint pressure. Adjust A-V- 119 until gage A-GA-123 indicates 22 psig. (c) Turn pressure regulating valve adjusting screw slightly COUNTERCLOCKWISE to lower setpoint pressure. (d) Tighten pressure regulating valve A-V-119 adjusting screw locknut. (6) Repeat steps 6.2.1.d.(4) and 6.2.1.d.(5) as necessary. (7) Shut valve A-V-110. (8) Open valve A-V-155. (9) Open valve A-V-150. (10) Vent air pressure from LP air system piping; continue venting until gages A-GA-109, A-GA-106, and A-GA-123 indicate 0 psig. (11) Shut valve A-V-150.

6.2.2 RELIEF VALVE A-V-122. (See Figure FO-31.) a. Ensure dome is pressurized with water.

CAUTION

6-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(8) A-V-148 Open (9) A-V-118 Open (10) A-V-125 Open (11) A-V-112 Open (12) A-V-116 Open (13) ALP-V-207 Open (if installed) c. Vent accumulated condensate from LP Air system piping. (1) Slowly open valve A-V-110; observe air ﬂow through LP air system piping. (2) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-155; continue venting through drain valve A-V-155 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (3) Shut drain valve A-V-155. (4) Shut valve A-V-145. (5) Open bypass valve A-V-131. (6) Slowly open bypass valve A-V-166, observe air ﬂow through LP air system piping. (7) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-156; continue venting through drain valve A-V-156 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (8) Shut drain valve A-V-156. (9) Shut bypass valve A-V-131. (10) Shut bypass valve A-V-166. d. Test and adjust Relief Valve A-V-122 (1) Open A-V-155 (2) Close A-V-125 (3) Verify that A-GA-106 indicates 125 (+30, -25) psig.

CAUTION

OPENING BYPASS VALVE A-V-147 CAUSES PRESSURE AT RELIEF VALVE A-V-122 TO INCREASE RAPIDLY. DO NOT ALLOW A-GA-123 INDICATION TO EXCEED 29 PSIG. (4) Open A-V-147 slightly and verify that A-GA-123 indicates 25 (±1) psig when A-V-122 vents; close A-V- 147. (5) If incorrect, adjust A-V-122 as follows: (a) Remove cap and loosen A-V-122 compression screw locknut. (b) Close A-V-148. (c) Open A-V-125 until A-GA-123 indicates 0 psig; close A-V-125. (d) If A-GA-123 indication was less than 24 psig, turn A-V-122 compression screw slightly clockwise. (e) If A-GA-123 indication was greater than 26 psig, turn A-V-122 compression screw slightly counterclockwise. (f) Open A-V-148. (6) Repeat steps 6.2.2.d.(4) and 6.2.2.d.(5) as necessary. (7) Tighten A-V-122 compression screw locknut and reinstall cap. (8) Close A-V-110. (9) Open A-V-125. (10) Open valve A-V-155. (11) Open valve A-V-150. (12) Vent air pressure from LP air system piping; continue venting until gages A-GA-109, A-GA-106, and A-GA-123 indicate 0 psig.

6-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(13) Shut valve A-V-150.

6.2.3 BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE A-V-134. (See Figure 6-2.) a. Ensure dome is pressurized with water.

CAUTION

6-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 6-2. Backpressure Regulating Valve (A-V-134) 1-1/2” IPS d. Test and adjust backpressure regulating valve (A-V-134) (1) Open bypass valve A-V-131. (2) Open bypass valve A-V-166; observe A-F-124 for air flow through system piping. (3) Slowly open valve A-V-145. (4) Slowly shut bypass valve A-V-131. If backpressure regulator valve A-V-134 starts to chatter, crack open bypass valve A-V-131 momentarily to achieve steady flow through A-V-134; then slowly shut bypass valve A-V-131. (5) Observe gage A-GA-133 indication of 14 (13 to 15) psig. (6) Observe Flowmeter A-F-124; indication should be 40 to 50 SCFM. If required, throttle valve A-V-148 to obtain required flow rate. (7) (a) Remove cap and loosen pressure screw locknut on the regulator valve. (b) Adjust backpressure regulating valve A-V-134 pilot control valve adjusting screw clockwise to raise backpressure setpoint, or counterclockwise to lower backpressure setpoint until gage A-GA-133 indicates 14 (±1) psig. (c) Tighten the regulator valve pressure screw locknut and reinstall the cap. This completes the adjustment of backpressure regulator valve A-V-134. (8) Shut valve A-V-110. (9) Open valve A-V-155. (10) Open valve A-V-150. (11) Vent air pressure from LP air system piping; continue venting until gages A-GA-109, A-GA-106, and A-GA-123 indicate 0 psig. (12) Shut valve A-V-166. (13) Shut valve A-V-150.

6-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

6.2.4 AIR FAILURE SWITCH E-F-175. (See Figure 6-3.) a. Ensure dome is pressurized with water.

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE, HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE. b. Verify valve alignment at Dome Control Station (0.5-28-0-Q). (1) A-V-110 Shut (2) A-V-127 Shut (3) A-V-129 Shut (4) A-V-155 Open (5) A-V-156 Open (6) A-V-166 Shut (7) A-V-131 Shut (locking device installed) (8) A-V-148 Open (9) A-V-118 Open (10) A-V-125 Open 11. A-V-112 Open (12) A-V-116 Open (13) ALP-V-207 Open (if installed) c. Vent accumulated condensate from LP Air system piping. (1) Slowly open valve A-V-110; observe air ﬂow through LP air system piping. (2) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-155; continue venting through drain valve A-V-155 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (3) Shut drain valve A-V-155. (4) Shut valve A-V-145. (5) Open bypass valve A-V-131. (6) Slowly open bypass valve A-V-166, observe air ﬂow through LP air system piping. (7) Observe air/water mixture venting through drain valve A-V-156; continue venting through drain valve A-V-156 until all water has been purged from LP air system piping. (8) Shut drain valve A-V-156. (9) Continue venting air through LP air system piping for 3 minutes. (10) Shut valve A-V-110 (11) Shut bypass valve A-V-131. (12) Shut bypass valve A-V-166. (13) Open Drain valve A-V-156. d. Test and adjust pressure switch E-F-175. This task ensures pressure switch is within tolerances. (1) Slowly open valve A-V-110. (2) Observe that gage A-GA-109 indicates 125 (100 to 150) psig. (3) Shut ships low-pressure air service valve ALP-V-207 (if installed) or next valve located immediately upstream of valve A-V-110. (4) Crack open drain valve A-V-155 and vent air from LP air system piping; observe gage A-GA-109 indication decreasing.

6-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(5) Continue to vent air through drain valve A-V-155 until gage A-GA-109 indicates 85 (83 to 87) psig; then shut drain valve A-V-155. (6) When gage A-GA-109 indicates 85 psig, observe low pressure air failure indicator E-F-180 illuminate. If low pressure air failure indicator E-F-180 did not illuminate when gage A-V-109 indicated 85 psig, perform the following. (a) Verify that valves A-V-184 and A-V-176 are open. (b) Verify by reading label plates installed on pressure switch E-F-175 if the switch is manufactured by Detroit Switch Inc. or United Electric controls. 1. If manufactured by Detroit Switch Inc., with open-end wrench remove protective cap from adjusting screw on the right side of the switch. a. Using a ﬂat blade screwdriver adjust pressure switch E-F-175; turn adjusting screw clockwise to increase setpoint pressure; turn adjusting screw counterclockwise to lower setpoint pressure. b. Replace protective cap. 2. If E-F-175 pressure switch manufactured by United Electric Controls, with ﬂat blade screwdriver remove cover and gasket by removing four screws. a. The adjusting screw is located beneath the switch inside the encloser. Using a 5/8” open end wrench adjust setpoint pressure; turn adjusting screw clockwise to increase setpoint pressure; turn adjusting screw counterclockwise to lower setpoint pressure. b. Replace gasket and cover. c. Continue to adjust pressure switch E-F-175 as necessary until low pressure air failure indicator E-F-180 illuminates when gage A-GA-109 indicates 85 psig. (7) Slowly open ship’s low-pressure air service valve ALP-V-207 until fully open (if installed) or next valve located immediately upstream of valve A-V-110. (8) Observe that low pressure air failure indicator E-F-180 extinguishes when gage A-GA-109 indicates 100 psig. (9) Repeat steps 6.2.4.d.(2) through 6.2.4.d.(8) as necessary until E-F-180 illuminates when gage A-GA-109 indicates 85 psig of descending air pressure, and extinguishes when gage A-GA-109 indicates 100 psig of ascending air pressure.

Figure 6-3. L P Air Switches E-F-32 and E-F-175

6.2.5 L.P. AIR ALARM SWITCH E-F-32. (See Figure 6-3.)

6-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

STEPS OF THIS PROCEDURE REQUIRE THAT DOME PRESSURE BE LOWERED TO 12 PSIG. ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITIONS DUE TO EMERGENCY OPERATION HAS PRIORITY.

NOTE

As Sonar Dome is dewatered, a partial vacuum in gage A-GA-167 gage line may develop. This may result in inadvertent closure of solenoid valve E-V-21 by action of Pressure Switch E-F-32. Observe that valve E-V-21 position indicator E-F-33 remains illuminated to ensure Solenoid valve E-V-21 remains in the OPEN position during dewatering procedure. a. Ensure dome is pressurized with air. b. Verify that dome control station valves are set according to Table 2-2 for circulating air. c. Verify that A-GA-123 and W-GA-10 indicate 22 (+1, -5) psig. d. At Airlock Passageway, remove caps from Test Point Connection valves A-V-160 and A-V-100; allow all water to vent from gage lines; then recap Test Point Connection valves A-V-160 and A-V-100. e. Close A-V-127. f. Close A-V-129.

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL RESULT IN A DECREASE OF SONAR DOME PRESSURE. THROTTLE VALVE W-V-27 AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE DOES NOT DROP BELOW 12.0 AS INDICATED ON GAGES W-GA-10 AND A-GA-167. g. Slowly open W-V-27 until W-GA-10 indicates 13 (-1) psig, then close W-V-27. h. When gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig; audible Low Air pressure alarms should activate on control panel E-PN-44 and alarm panel E-PN-45 and solenoid valve E-V-21 will shut. If alarms do not activate, perform the following: (1) With gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicating (12 to 13) psig, slowly turn Pressure Switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise until audible alarm activates on control panel E-PN-44. (2) Open valve A-V-127; apply air pressure to Sonar Dome until gage W-GA-10 indication exceeds 13.0 psig and audible alarm silence, then shut valve A-V-127. (3) Open valve W-V-27; vent air through valve W-V-27 until gages W-GA-10 and A-V-167 indicate 13.0 psig. (4) Slowly turn pressure switch E-F-32 adjusting screw clockwise or counterclockwise, as necessary, to activate audible alarm on control panel E-PN-44 when gages W-GA-10 and A-GA-167 indicate 13.0 psig. i. Repeat step 6.2.5.h. until the audible alarms activate when the dome pressure is lowered to 13 (-1) psig, and deactivates when the dome pressure is raised to 16 (±2) psig. j. Open A-V-127 and ensure that dome pressure rises to 22 (±1) psig. k. Open A-V-129 to return the system to the desired circulating air condition Table 2-2.

6-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

6.3 WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES.

Adjustment and alignment of the following Water Pressurization subsystem components requires proper pressurization of the sonar dome be maintained at all times. This may be accomplished by adherence to the operating procedures and emergency operating procedures provided in Chapter 2. Tools and test equipment required consist of standard hand tools. Operational tolerance values are presented in Table 1-3.

WARNING

Figure 6-4. Pressure Reducer W-V-7

6.3.1 PRESSURE REDUCER W-V-7. (See Figures 6-4 and FO-29.)

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE, HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE.

6-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED FROM SEAWATER FIREMAIN SUPPLY TO ADJUST W-V-7. a. Verify that dome control station valves are set according to Table 2-3. b. Verify that overboard discharge valve W-V-11 is closed. c. Verify that W-GA-38 indicates 150 (±25) psig. d. Observe and note gage W-GA-39 indication; indication should be 50 (45 to 55) psig. If gage W-GA-39 indication is correct, do not proceed any further. e. If gage W-GA-39 indication is greater than 55 psig, perform steps 6.3.1.f through 6.3.1.o. If gage W-GA-39 indication is less than 45 psig, proceed to step 6.3.1.p.

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE WILL ISOLATE THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE REMAINS ABOVE 25 PSIG AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE PERFOR- MANCE OF THIS PROCEDURE. f. Close valves W-V-1, W-V-5 and W-V-15. g. Remove regulator valve W-V-7 cap and loosen adjusting screw locknut. h. Open valves W-V-2 and W-V-3; vent line pressure until gages W-GA-38 and W-GA-39 indicate 0 psig; then shut valves W-V-3 and W-V-2. i. Turn regulator valve W-V-7 adjustment screw three turns counterclockwise. j. Slowly open valves W-V-1 and W-V-5. k. Observe gage W-GA-39; indication should be less than 45 psig. If gage W-GA-39 indication is not less than 45 psig, repeat steps 6.3.1.f. through 6.3.1.j. as necessary until gage W-GA-39 indication is less than 45 psig. l. When gage W-GA-39 indicates less than 45 psig, turn regulator valve W-V-7 adjustment screw clockwise until gage W-GA-39 indicates 50 psig. m. Tighten regulator valve W-V-7 adjustment screw locknut while holding adjusting screw in place, then reinstall cap. n. Open valve W-V-15. o. Do not proceed any further. p. If gage W-GA-39 indication is less than 45 psig, perform the following. (1) Remove regulator valve W-V-7 cap and loosen adjusting screw locknut. (2) Turn regulator valve W-V-7 adjustment screw clockwise until gage W-GA-39 indicates 50 psig. (3) If 50 psig indication on gage W-GA-39 is exceeded, repeat steps 6.3.1.f. through 6.3.1.o. (4) Tighten regulator valve W-V-7 adjustment screw locknut while holding adjustment screw in place; then reinstall cap.

6.3.2 PRESSURE REDUCER W-V-16. (See Figures 6-4 and FO-29 )

6-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE, HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE.

NOTE

TO ADJUST W-V-16, DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED FROM SEAWATER FIREMAIN SUPPLY OR DOCKSIDE FRESHWATER. a. Verify that dome control station valves are set according to Table 2-3. b. Observe and note gage W-GA-41 indication; indication should be 20.0 (19.0 to 21.0) psig. If gage W-GA-41 indication is correct, do not proceed any further. c. If gage W-GA-41 indication is greater than 21.0 psig, perform steps 6.3.2.d through 6.3.2.m. If gage W-GA-41 indication is less than 19.0 psig, proceed to step 6.3.2.o.

CAUTION

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE WILL ISOLATE THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. ENSURE SONAR DOME PRESSURE REMAINS ABOVE 25 PSIG AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE PERFOR- MANCE OF THIS PROCEDURE. d. Shut valve W-V-24. e. Remove regulator valve W-V-16 cap and loosen adjusting screw locknut. f. Shut valves W-V-1 and W-V-5. g. Open valves W-V-2, W-V-3, and W-V-17; vent line pressure until gages W-GA-38 and W-GA-41 indicate 0 psig; then shut valves W-V-17, W-V-3, and W-V-2. h. Turn regulator valve W-V-16 adjustment screw three turns counterclockwise. i. Slowly open valves W-V-1 and W-V-5. j. Observe gage W-GA-41; indication should be less than 20.0 psig. If gage W-GA-41 indication is not less than 20.0 psig, repeat steps 6.3.2.f through 6.3.2.i as necessary until gage W-GA-41 indication is less than 45 psig. k. When gage W-GA-41 indicates less than 45 psig, turn regulator valve W-V-16 adjustment screw clockwise until gage W-GA-41 indicates 20.0 psig. l. Tighten regulator valve W-V-16 adjustment screw locknut while holding adjusting screw in place, then reinstall cap. m. Open valve W-V-24. n. Proceed to step 6.3.2.1.p. o. If gage W-GA-41 indication is less than 19.0 psig, perform the following. (1) Shut valve W-V-24. (2) Remove regulator valve W-V-16 cap and loosen adjusting screw locknut. (3) Turn regulator valve W-V-16 adjustment screw clockwise until gage W-GA-41 indicates 20.0 psig. (4) Tighten W-V-16 adjustment screw locknut while holding adjustment screw in place; then reinstall cap. (5) Open valve W-V-24.

6-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

APPROXIMATELY 15 MINUTES ARE REQUIRED TO STABILIZE GAGE W-GA-10 INDICATION AT 39.5 PSIG AFTER ADJUSTMENT OF REGULA- TOR VALVE W-V-16. p. Observe gage W-GA-10; verify that indication is 39.5 (39.5 to 41.5) psig. If not, repeat steps 6.3.2.b through 6.3.2.p.

6.3.3 RELIEF VALVE W-V-31. (See Figures 6-5 and FO-30)

Figure 6-5. Relief Valve W-V-31 CAUTION

ANY CHANGE IN VALVE POSITION REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COR- RECT DOME PRESSURE HAS PRIORITY WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE.

6-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

NOTE

TO ADJUST W-V-31, DOME MUST BE PRESSURIZED FROM SEAWATER FIREMAIN SUPPLY OR DOCKSIDE FRESHWATER. a. Verify that dome control station valves are set according to Table 2-3. b. Remove retaining nuts and cover from overboard discharge check valve W-V-99 located at bottom of dome control station water valve board. c. At check valve W-V-99, verify that no water is leaking through check valve; this veriﬁes that relief valve W-V-31 is seated properly. d. Shut valves W-V-24 and W-V-18. e. Slowly open bypass valve W-V-17 until water is observed venting through check valve W-V-99; then shut valve W-V-17. f. Observe and note gage W-GA-41 indication when water begins to vent through check valve W-V-99; indication should be 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig. If gage W-GA-41 indication is correct, proceed to step 6.3.3.h.(9). g. If gage W-GA-41 indication is less than 26.5 psig when water vents, complete steps 6.3.3.g.(1) through 6.3.3.g.(6). If gage W-GA-41 indication is greater than 28.5 psig when water vents, proceed to step 6.3.3.h. (1) Remove cap from relief valve W-V-31 and loosen compression screw locknut. (2) Turn relief valve W-V-31 compression screw one turn clockwise. (3) Slowly open bypass valve W-V-17 until water begins to vent through check valve W-V-99; then shut valve W-V-17. (4) Observe that gage W-GA-41 indicates 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig when water vents through check valve W-V-99, repeat steps 6.3.3.g.2 through 6.3.3.g.4 as necessary. (5) Open valves W-V-18 and W-V-24. (6) Proceed to step 6.3.3.i. h. If gage W-GA-41 indication is greater than 28.5 psig, perform the following. (1) Remove cap from relief valve W-V-31 and loosen compression screw locknut. (2) Open valve W-V-24 until gage W-GA-41 indicates 25.0 psig; then shut valve W-V-24. (3) Slowly open bypass valve W-V-17 until gage W-GA-41 indicates 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig; then shut bypass valve W-V-17. (4) Turn relief valve compression screw counterclockwise until water begins to vent through check valve W-V-99. (5) Open valve W-V-24 until gage W-GA-41 indicates 25.0 psig; then shut valve W-V-24. (6) Slowly open bypass valve W-V-17 until gage W-GA-41 indicates 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig; then shut bypass valve W-V-17. (7) Verify that relief valve W-V-31 vents water through check valve W-V-99 when gage W-GA-41 indicates 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig. (8) If gage W-GA-41 does not indicate 27.5 (26.5 to 28.5) psig when water vents through check valve W-V- 99, repeat steps 6.3.3.h.(2) through 6.3.3.h.(7) as necessary. (9) Open valves W-V-18 and W-V-24.

6-14 S9165-AE-MMA-010 i. When water stops venting through check valve W-V-99, observe gage W-GA-41; verify that gage indication remains constant, indicating relief valve W-V-31 has seated properly. j. Reinstall check valve W-V-99 cover and retaining bolts. k. Verify valve alignment at Dome Equipment Room (0.5-28-0-Q): (1) W-V-1 Open (2) W-V-2 Shut (3) W-V-3 Shut (valve locking device installed) (4) W-V-5 Open (5) W-V-15 Open (6) W-V-17 Shut (valve locking device installed) (7) W-V-18 Open (8) W-V-24 Open l. Notify Sonar Control and Combat Systems Maintenance Center of completion of this procedure; regard all further Sonar Dome alarms.

6.3.4 LOW AND HIGH WATER-PRESSURE SWITCHES W-GA-10. (See Figure 6-6.)

Figure 6-6. Dome Pressure Gage W-GA-10 (Barton) a. Ensure dome is pressurized with water.

NOTE

PERFORMANCE OF THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD BE DONE DOCKSIDE BECAUSE DOME PRESSURE MUST BE LOWERED BELOW OPERATING PRESSURE IN ORDER TO ADJUST THE LOW WATER-PRESSURE SWITCH.

6-15 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. Verify that dome control station valves are set according to Table 6-2. c. Remove the three bezel retainer screws (Figure 6-2) and carefully remove glass face from W-GA-10. Unlock switch locks. d. Close W-V-24. e. Slowly open W-V-27. Close W-V-27 when W-GA-10 indicates 25 psig. f. With allen wrench, adjust LOW SWITCH adjusting screw until low water-pressure alarm sounds. g. Open W-V-24 until low water-pressure alarm silences (W-GA-10 indicates approximately 30 psig), then close W-V-24. h. Slowly open W-V-27 and note the pressure indication at W-GA-10 when the low water-pressure alarm sounds. i. Repeat steps 6.3.4.f through 6.3.4.h until low water-pressure alarm sounds when W-GA-10 indicates 25 (±1) psig, descending pressure. j. Open W-V-24.

CAUTION

OPENING W-V-17 INCREASES DOME PRESSURE RAPIDLY. DO NOT ALLOW DOME PRESSURE, AS INDICATED ON W-GA-10, TO EXCEED 48 PSIG. k. Open W-V-17 slightly until W-GA-10 indicates 44 psig, then close W-V-17. l. Adjust HIGH SWITCH adjusting screw until high water-pressure alarm sounds. m. Open W-V-27 until W-GA-10 indicates approximately 39 psig, then close W-V-27. n. Slowly open W-V-17 and note the pressure indication at W-GA-10 when the high water-pressure alarm sounds. Repeat steps 6.3.4.l through 6.3.4.n until high water-pressure alarm sounds when W-GA-10 indicates 44 (±1) psig, ascending pressure. o. Tighten switch locks. p. Reinstall glass face, bezel, and bezel retainer screws.

6.3.5 BARTON GAGE W-GA-10 CALIBRATION POLICY. As gage W-GA-10 provides the primary indication of internal sonar dome pressure and activates alarm indicators when normal operating pressures are exceeded, it is critical that this gage remains fully operational and within calibration at all times. A conﬂict does arise, however, when the sonar dome is considered non-enterable (i.e. due to structural damage determined by radiographic inspection or other causes) which precludes sonar dome entry to perform W-GA-10 calibration procedures. This situation is further aggravated by a malfunctioning gage which degrades the accuracy and reliabil- ity of gage W-GA-10 indications. Operational guidance presented in this paragraphs 6.3.5 through 6.3.6.16 represents established policy regarding calibration requirements and follow-on maintenance procedures for gage W-GA-10. For any situation which falls beyond the scope of normal gage W-GA-10 operation, or precludes accomplishment of PMS, maintenance personnel are referred to Table 6-1. Table 6-1 identiﬁes the applicable procedural paragraph for all foreseeable conditions regarding gage W-GA-10 operation and calibration.

NOTE

The following information is applicable to the Analog (Barton) Type Gage W-GA-10 Only. If Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) is installed as Gage W-GA-10, Refer to Appendix A of this technical manual for maintenance procedures.

6-16 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

Calibration of analog (Barton) gage W-GA-10 shall be accomplished by SISCAL personnel and may require Sonar Dome entry. Contact TYPE COMMANDER to determine Sonar Dome entry status and arrange for calibration using certiﬁed personnel. If dome entry is required, use qualiﬁed dome entry personnel to connect/disconnect calibration equipment as necessary. Calibration shall be accomplished IAW procedure PGP003 in NAVSEA Technical Manual ST700-AV- PRO-20 (DDG 51 Class Installed Instrumentation System Calibration Procedures).

Table 6-1. Barton Gage W-GA-10 Diagnostic Index Is Gage W-GA-10 within Is W-GA-10 Tracking Are HI/LOW Alarm Acti- Calibration? Properly? vation Setpoints Correct? Refer To Paragraph #: YES YES YES 6.3.6.1 or .2 YES YES NO 6.3.6.3 or .4 YES NO YES 6.3.6.5 or .6 YES NO NO 6.3.6.7 or .8 NO YES YES 6.3.6.9 or .10 NO YES NO 6.3.6.11 or .12 NO NO YES 6.3.6.13 or .14 NO NO NO 6.3.6.15 or .16

6.3.6 PROCEDURES FOR ENTERABLE AND NON-ENTERABLE SONAR DOMES.

6.3.6.1 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. No corrective action necessary b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures.

6.3.6.2 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. No immediate corrective actions are necessary. b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. Upon expiry of valid calibration of gage W-GA-10, gage W-GA-41 shall become the primary gage for monitoring internal sonar dome pressure. Continue to monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. e. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.3 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Test and adjust if necessary gage W-GA-10 alarms setpoints per PMS. Identify cause of loss of alarm capability, if possible.

6-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. c. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair or replace gage W-GA-10 as necessary.

6.3.6.4 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Test and adjust if necessary gage W-GA-10 alarms setpoints per PMS. Identify cause of loss of alarm capability, if possible. b. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. c. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock. d. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.5 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate gage W-GA-10. b. Identify cause of loss of tracking capability, if possible. c. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA to repair or replace gage W-GA-10.

6.3.6.6 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to check tracking of gage W-GA-10. b. Identify cause of loss of tracking capability, if possible. c. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock. e. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.7 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate gage W-GA-10. b. Identify cause of loss of tracking capability, if possible. c. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA to repair or replace gage W-GA-10.

6.3.6.8 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes.

6-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010 a. Request IMA assistance to check tracking of gage W-GA-10. b. Identify cause of loss of tracking capability, if possible. c. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock. e. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.9 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate gage W-GA-10, as soon as possible. b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures.

6.3.6.10 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Upon expiry of valid calibration of gage W-GA-10, gage W-GA-41 shall become the primary gage for monitoring internal sonar dome pressure. Continue to monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. b. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration during next drydocking availability. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures.

6.3.6.11 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate gage W-GA-10, as soon as possible. b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair or replace gage W-GA-10 as necessary.

6.3.6.12 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Upon expiry of valid calibration of gage W-GA-10, gage W-GA-41 shall become the primary gage for monitoring internal sonar dome pressure. Continue to monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. b. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration during next drydocking availability. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock.

6-19 S9165-AE-MMA-010 e. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.13 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate, repair or replace gage W-GA-10 as necessary. b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures.

6.3.6.14 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Upon expiry of valid calibration of gage W-GA-10, gage W-GA-41 shall become the primary gage for monitoring internal sonar dome pressure. Continue to monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. b. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration during next drydocking availability. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. d. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock. e. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock. f. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

6.3.6.15 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Request IMA assistance to re-calibrate, repair or replace gage W-GA-10 as necessary. b. Monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. c. Continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures.

6.3.6.16 The Following Procedures Are Applicable To Those Ships With Non-Enterable Sonar Domes. a. Upon expiry of valid calibration of gage W-GA-10, gage W-GA-41 shall become the primary gage for monitoring internal sonar dome pressure. Continue to monitor gage W-GA-10 function by comparing gage W-GA-41 and W-GA-10 indications. b. Request IMA assistance to check tracking of gage W-GA-10. c. Identify cause of loss of tracking capability, if possible. d. If alarm capability is restored, continue to perform maintenance IAW established PMS procedures. e. If alarm capability cannot be restored, request IMA assistance to repair gage W-GA-10 as necessary. The IMA may need to install a temporary emergent simulation repair of W-GA-10 until repair is completed during next drydock.

6-20 S9165-AE-MMA-010 f. Schedule gage W-GA-10 for calibration and/or repair during next drydocking availability.

SECTION II REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY SDPS COMPONENTS

6.4 INTRODUCTION. This section presents the procedures necessary to effect repairs and perform inspections on primary SDPS components. Only those SDPS components which are considered to be within the capability of Ship’s Force to effect repairs are presented in this section. Overhaul and repair of SDPS components not presented in this section should be accomplished with IMA/Depot assistance.

6.5 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS. In order to maximize the operational readiness of the SDPS, the following procedures are provided to enable maintenance personnel to effect repairs of the primary SDPS LP air subsystem components without having to remove them from the system. Refer to Section III of this chapter for component removal and replacement procedures. As a diagnostic aid, symptoms of component failure as well as common causes of failure are provided.

WARNING

REPAIR OF THE FOLLOWING LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS REQUIRES COMPLETE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE LP AIR SUB- SYSTEM PRIOR TO REMOVAL OR DISASSEMBLY OF AIR CONTROL DEVICE.

6.5.1 BACKPRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE A-V-134. Symptoms of backpressure regulator valve failure include loss of ability to obtain required backpressure setpoint, loss of ability to maintain backpressure setpoint, and loss of ability to control pressure or air ﬂow to any degree through the valve. Most failures of the backpressure regulating valve can be traced to a ruptured diaphragm, worn disc assembly, or blockage of pilot valve tubing. Disassembly of the Hytrol (main) valve is accomplished in the following sequence: See Figure FO-33. a. Remove Pilot Control valve from main Hytrol valve assembly at union type connection points. Ensure connection tubing is free of debris or blockage. Disassemble and clean connection tubing if necessary. b. Loosen and remove cover nuts (15). c. Remove spring (4) from stem (12). d. Lift out diaphragm assembly from valve body (1) for further disassembly. e. Remove nut (5) from stem (12). f. Remove diaphragm washer (6) and diaphragm (7) from stem. g. Remove stem from disc retainer (8) and disc guide (11). h. Separate disc retainer from disc guide; Retain spacer washers (10) for reinstallation. i. Remove disc (9) from disc retainer.

6-21 S9165-AE-MMA-010 j. Inspect seat for evidence of damage. DO NOT remove unless it is necessary to replace. k. Inspect cover bearing (3). DO NOT remove unless it is necessary to replace. l. With valve completely disassembled, inspect and clean all parts with solvent. Solvent per FED SPEC TT-T- 291C. m. Replace parts which are damaged. Piece part support provided on APL #882191723. n. Reassemble valve in reverse sequence, steps k through a above. Ensure spacer washers (10) are installed between disc retainer (8) and disc guide (11). The disc guide should engage the disc (9) with only sufficient tension to hold the disc, without causing the disc to curl or bulge. The spacer washer may be added or removed to increase or decrease the tension on the disc.

6.5.2 AIR FILTER A-F-114. The primary symptom of Air Filter failure is reduced air ﬂow and loss of air pressure through the device. These symptoms are usually the result of clogged ﬁlter elements, which will be indicated on gage A-GA-117 as a differential pressure greater than 6 psid, or improper drain valve alignment.

WARNING

ENSURE AIR FILTER A-F-114 IS COMPLETELY DEPRESSURIZED PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY. VERIFY GAGES A-GA-109, A-GA-106, AND A-GA-117 INDICATE ″0″ PSIG BEFORE PROCEEDING. a. Detailed Disassembly, Inspection, and Repair of Air Filter A-F-114 (Figure 3-4.) (1) Ensure dome is pressurized with water. (2) Close A-V-110, A-V-127 and A-V-129 then open A-V-178(3) and A-V-150 to depressurize A-F-114. (3) Verify that A-GA-109, A-GA-106 and A-GA-117 indicate 0 psig. (4) Remove retaining bolts from service port clamp assembly and remove assembly. (5) Lift head cover assembly straight up until free of adapter pipe. (6) Remove stage-3 filter elements retainer. (7) Remove and discard stage-3 filter elements. (8) Install new stage-3 filter elements in head cover assembly, and reinstall stage-3 filter elements retainer. (9) Remove stage-2 filter element plastic retainers from element guide pipes. (10) Pull out and discard stage-2 filter elements. (11) Clean inside of filter tank with clean rags and solution of mild detergent and freshwater. (12) Install new stage-2 filter elements by pushing elements in along guide pipes; start with element furthest from service port. (13) Reinstall stage-2 filter element plastic retainers; hand tighten only. (14) Remove and discard head cover assembly O-ring. (15) Install new head cover O-ring using silicone compound MIL-C-21567. (16) Reinstall head cover assembly using adapter pipe as a guide. (17) Reinstall service port clamp assembly; replace and tighten bolts.

6-22 S9165-AE-MMA-010

6.6 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY WATER PRESSURIZATION SUBSYSTEM COMPO- NENTS. In order to maximize the operational readiness of the SDPS, the following procedures are provided to enable maintenance personnel to effect repairs of the primary SDPS water subsystem components without having to remove them from the system. Refer to Section III of this chapter for component removal and replacement procedures. As a diagnostic aid, symptoms of component failure as well as common causes of failure are provided.

6.6.1 REDUCER VALVES W-V-7 AND W-V-16. Symptoms of reducer valve failure include loss of ability to obtain required output pressure setpoint, loss of ability to maintain output pressure setpoint, and loss of all capability to control pressure to any degree through the valve. Most failures of the reducer valves can be traced to a ruptured diaphragm and/or stem O-ring, or leakage between the seat and disc. A ruptured diaphragm and/or stem O-ring is easily identified as there will be no control of flow through the valve. Additionally, a ruptured diaphragm can be identified by obvious water seepage through the bleed hole of the spring chamber bonnet. Other causes of failure include cracked or broken spring assembly and sensing port blockage. Disassembly and repair of the reducing valves is accomplished in the following procedure: See Figure FO-29.

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES ISOLATION OF THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. THE SONAR DOME SHALL BE WATER FILLED AND PRES- SURIZED AT 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. INITIAL SDPS VALVE ALIGNMENT SHALL BE IAW TABLE 2-3 OF THIS TECHNI- CAL MANUAL. THE SONAR DOME PRESSURE SHALL BE MAIN- TAINED ABOVE 25.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. ADDITIONALLY, LP AIR SHALL BE AVAILABLE AS AN ALTERNATE MEANS OF APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE SONAR DOME AT ALL TIMES DUR- ING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. a. Close sonar dome isolation valve W-V-24. b. Close upstream isolation valve; for repair of reducer W-V-7, close valve W-V-5; for repair of reducer W-V- 16, close valve W-V-15.

NOTE

LINE PRESSURE MUST BE REDUCED PRIOR TO ISOLATION AND DIS- ASSEMBLY OF REDUCER VALVES c. Bleed line pressure by slowly jacking open relief valve W-V-31. d. Close remaining isolation valve; for repair of reducer W-V-7, close valve W-V-8; for repair of reducer W-V- 16, close valve W-V-18. e. Remove adjusting screw cap and count the number of threads from the adjusting screw jam nut to the top of the adjusting screw and record results.

6-23 S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

ENSURE SPRING TENSION IS RELEASED PRIOR TO VALVE DISAS- SEMBLY. FAILURE TO RELEASE SPRING TENSION MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. f. Loosen jam nut and turn adjusting screw fully COUNTERCLOCKWISE to ensure all spring tension has been released. g. Remove nuts and bolts from spring chamber bonnet. h. Remove spring chamber bonnet from valve body. i. Remove spring button and spring; inspect spring for deterioration, cracks, or other damage. j. Remove diaphragm jam nut and button. k. Remove diaphragm; inspect diaphragm for cracks, cuts, or areas of excessive ware. l. Remove liner bolts. m. Remove liner and stem from valve body; remove stem from liner; inspect liner upper bore for excessive ware, inspect liner O-ring, inspect liner seat ring for cuts, deterioration or other damage. n. Inspect stem and O-ring for damage. o. Inspect disc seat for cuts and deterioration. p. Inspect valve body for damage; inspect pressure sensing port for debris or blockage. Clear sensing port, if required, using a rigid ﬂexible wire. q. Thoroughly clean all parts. r. Replace all damaged parts as necessary. Piece part support provided on APL #882097548 (manufacturer Trac) or #882095816 (manufacturer Warren). s. Reinstall stem in liner; reinstall liner in valve body and replace liner bolts; tighten liner bolts evenly. t. Reinstall diaphragm, diaphragm button and diaphragm jam nut. u. Reinstall spring and spring button. v. Reinstall spring chamber bonnet to valve body; tighten bolts evenly. w. Turn adjusting screw to match the number of threads showing as recorded in step e. x. Return SDPS to normal valve alignment; Open isolation valves and W-V-24. y. Adjust reducer valve as required IAW paragraph 6.3.1 or 6.3.2 as applicable.

6.6.2 RELIEF VALVE W-V-31. Symptoms of relief valve failure include inability to maintain sonar dome pressure at normal operating pressure and activation of WTR-V-ON indicator on alarm panel E-PN-45. Most failures of the relief valve may be attributed to incorrect spring setting, leakage between the disc and the seat, leakage around the threads of the seat ring, cocking of the disc or stem, or accumulation of dirt or other foreign matter around working parts. Disassembly of the relief valve is accomplished in the following sequence. See Figure FO-17.

6-24 S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES ISOLATION OF THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. THE SONAR DOME SHALL BE WATER FILLED AND PRES- SURIZED AT 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. INITIAL SDPS VALVE ALIGNMENT SHALL BE IAW TABLE 2-3 OF THIS TECHNI- CAL MANUAL. THE SONAR DOME PRESSURE SHALL BE MAIN- TAINED ABOVE 25.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. ADDITIONALLY, LP AIR SHALL BE AVAILABLE AS AN ALTERNATE MEANS OF APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE SONAR DOME AT ALL TIMES DUR- ING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. a. Close sonar dome isolation valve W-V-24. b. Close cutout valves W-V-5 and W-V-15. c. Bleed line pressure by slowly jacking open relief valve W-V-31. d. Remove adjusting screw cap and count the number of threads from the adjusting screw jam nut to the top of the adjusting screw and record results.

WARNING

ENSURE SPRING TENSION IS RELEASED PRIOR TO VALVE DISAS- SEMBLY. FAILURE TO RELEASE SPRING TENSION MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. e. Loosen jam nut and turn adjusting screw fully COUNTERCLOCKWISE to ensure all spring tension has been released. f. Remove nuts and bolts from spring housing bonnet. g. Remove spring housing bonnet from valve body. h. Inspect bonnet gasket and O-ring for cracks, cuts, deterioration or other damage. i. Remove spring buttons, spring and stem. j. Remove disc and seat from valve body; Inspect for cuts, cracks or other indications of damage. k. If metallic seats are installed, recondition seating surfaces by lapping or machining. Replace parts as required. Piece part support provided on APL #883116596 (manufacturer Kunkle) or #883120149 (manufacturer Danco). l. Inspect stem and spring for excess wear, cracks, or other deterioration. Replace as necessary. Piece part support provided on APL #883116596 (manufacturer Kunkle) or #883120149 (manufacturer Danco). Ensure selection of proper spring size for particular valve. m. Thoroughly clean all parts.

6-25 S9165-AE-MMA-010 n. Reinstall seat. o. Reinstall disc in valve body. p. Reinstall spring, stem, and spring buttons. q. Reinstall spring housing bonnet on valve body; tighten nuts evenly. r. Turn adjusting screw to match the number of threads showing as recorded in step 6.2.2.d. s. Return SDPS to normal valve alignment; Open cutout valves W-V-5 and W-V-15; open isolation valve W-V- 24. t. Adjust relief valve setpoint as required IAW paragraph 6.3.3.

6.6.3 FLOW SWITCH E-F-29. Symptoms of flow switch failure include no WTR-V-ON indication on alarm panel E-PN-45 during sonar dome filling operations, no WTR-V-OFF indication on alarm panel E-PN-45 during normal operating procedures, or no illumination of panel E-PN-45 visual indicators under any conditions. Com- mon causes of flow switch failure include broken spring, magnet and/or shuttle mechanism, broken seal of reed switch chamber or faulty electrical connections. Disassembly of the flow switch is accomplished in the following sequence: See Figure 3-13.

WARNING

PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES ISOLATION OF THE SONAR DOME FROM THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM. THE SONAR DOME SHALL BE WATER FILLED AND PRES- SURIZED AT 39.5 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 PRIOR TO COMMENCING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. INITIAL SDPS VALVE ALIGNMENT SHALL BE IAW TABLE 2-3 OF THIS TECHNI- CAL MANUAL. THE SONAR DOME PRESSURE SHALL BE MAIN- TAINED ABOVE 25.0 PSIG AS INDICATED ON GAGE W-GA-10 AT ALL TIMES DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. ADDITIONALLY, LP AIR SHALL BE AVAILABLE AS AN ALTERNATE MEANS OF APPLYING PRESSURE TO THE SONAR DOME AT ALL TIMES DUR- ING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE. a. Close sonar dome isolation valve W-V-24. b. Close cutout valves W-V-8 and W-V-15. c. Bleed line pressure by slowly jacking open relief valve W-V-31. d. Close cutout valve W-V-18.

NOTE

ENSURE FLOW SWITCH E-F-29 IS DEENERGIZED e. At Distribution Panel E-PN-50, secure electrical power to Flow Switch circuit by pulling plug P11 from jack J11. Ensure circuit is deenergized by utilizing a voltmeter. f. Disconnect ﬂow switch E-F-29 electrical connections at terminal box above switch.

6-26 S9165-AE-MMA-010 g. Remove shuttle and magnet retaining collar. h. Remove shuttle and magnet subassembly from flow switch body. i. Inspect flow switch body internal cavity for dirt, verdigris or other debris; clean internal cavity as necessary. j. Install replacement shuttle and magnet subassembly in flow switch body; apply a light coat of silicon grease to O-ring seal of subassembly cap. k. Reconnect electrical connections at terminal box; restore electrical power to flow switch circuit. l. Verify proper function of shuttle and magnet subassembly by manually raising and lowering shuttle assembly along stem. m. At alarm panel E-PN-45, verify that the WTR-V-ON indicator illuminates when the shuttle assembly is in the fully raised position and that the WTR-V-OFF indicator illuminates when the shuttle assembly is fully lowered; trip point between the two indications is approximately at the midpoint of shuttle travel along stem. n. Reinstall subassembly retaining collar. o. Open cutout valves W-V-8, W-V-15 and W-V-18. p. Open sonar dome isolation valve W-V-24.

6.7 REPAIR STATEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL/ALARM SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS. Repair of all electrical subsystem components consists of replacement only; no disassembly is required. Maintenance personnel should inspect all electrical cabling for visible damage. Alarm panel internal components should be inspected for indications of excessive heat (component or wiring discoloration), foreign materials and proper grounding.

6.8 REPAIR OF REMOTELY OPERATED VALVE ACTUATORS (RMVA’S).

6.8.1 RIGID ROD RMVA SYSTEMS. Repair of Rigid Reach Rod RMVA systems consists primarily of preventive maintenance and is limited to replacement of shear pins and lubrication of universal joints, operating/indicating gear and remote operating gear IAW established PMS requirements. Where applicable, gear operator box cover may be removed to allow for cleaning and application of a light coat of grease (grease per MIL-G-23549) to worm shaft and segment gear. Cover plate gasket should be replaced prior to reassembly of gear operator box cover.

6.8.2 SEALED HELICAL CABLE RMVA SYSTEMS. Repair of Helical cable type RMVA systems is limited to replacement of actuator station shear pins and cable conduit support clamps and mounting hardware. The Heli- cal cable RMVA system is a permanently lubricated and sealed system which does not require periodic greasing. Repair or replacement of Helical Cable RMVA systems requires specialized equipment. Maintenance personnel are strongly advised to contact local IMA for assistance prior to attempting repairs to this type of RMVA system. If recent normal use of the RMVA has indicated no increase in the force at the handwheel (torque) required to open and close the valve, no additional operation is necessary. If, however, an appreciable increase in torque required is noticed, make the following diagnostic check: a. Note the open/closed position of the valve, the position of the valve actuator and the position of operating station handwheel. Record these component positions in a tag-out log. When reconnecting the RMVA, verify that

6-27 S9165-AE-MMA-010

the valve, valve actuator and operating station handwheel are in the same positions as when the RMVA was disconnected. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE WILL REQUIRE RE-INITIALIZATION OF RMVA SYSTEM. b. Completely disengage the RMVA from the valve at the valve actuator station by removing bolts from the adaptor ﬂange at the valve handwheel spokes. c. While the valve is completely disengaged, operate the RMVA through its complete operating cycle in both directions. RMVA should be completely free of binding and require only a minimum amount of torque. d. If the torque required is considered acceptable, then the valve must be considered at fault and shall be repaired or replaced as necessary. e. If the torque required is considered too high, the RMVA must be considered at fault. Repair or replacement of Sealed Helical Cable RMVA systems should only be attempted by trained IMA personnel or authorized manufacturer’s representative.

6.9 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR TRUNK TO AIRLOCK AND AIRLOCK TO SONAR DOME ACCESS HATCHES.

6.9.1 PRELIMINARY. Repair or replacement of hatch plates or associated structural elements, including counter-balance mechanisms and hatch coamings, is normally beyond ship’s force capability. Such repairs should be accomplished during SRA’s with IMA assistance. Repair of Trunk To Airlock and Airlock To Sonar Dome Access Hatches is limited to replacement of hatch gasket IAW established PMS procedures and lubrication of gear teeth and all other faying surfaces, except self lubricating bearing, and parts equipped with grease ﬁttings with multipurpose grease, military speciﬁcation MIL-G-24139. As both hatches are identical, the following procedures are applicable to both.

WARNING

THE USE OF ANY FLAME PRODUCING MATERIAL WITHIN THE PRESSURIZED ENVIRONMENT OF THE SONAR DOME OR AIR- LOCK IS PROHIBITED.

SECTION III REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR SDPS COMPONENTS

6.10 INTRODUCTION. The procedures presented in this section will enable maintenance personnel to effect replacement of all system components. It is emphasized that a complete and thorough understanding of SDPS operation is required of all personnel who are performing corrective maintenance on the system. Every effort should be made to determine the exact cause of component failure and a determination made if repairs are possible prior to replacement of the component. All replacement components shall be of the authorized type and shall be verified as to form, fit and function requirements prior to removal of the existing component. All SDPS components are listed on Table 6-2, ″SDPS Component Replacement Index.″ Maintenance personnel shall locate the specific SDPS component(s) on Table 6-2 and effect replacement of the component(s) IAW the corresponding reference paragraph.

6-28 S9165-AE-MMA-010

WARNING

MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL SHALL READ AND UNDERSTAND ENTIRE PROCEDURE PRIOR TO INITIATING COMPONENT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. ALL WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS SHALL BE OBSERVED AND FOLLOWED.

6.11 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES FOR LP AIR SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS. The following paragraphs present concise procedural information required to accomplish replacement of all SDPS components found within the LP Air Subsystem. Maintenance personnel are advised to ensure themselves that the replacement component is of the proper type and size, and is fully functional prior to attempting replacement of the existing component. Additionally, maintenance personnel should have on hand all required hand tools as well as required replacement gasketing material, sealing materials and component fasteners prior to removal of existing component. For waterborne replacement procedures, the initial SDPS valve alignment shall be IAW Table 2-3 of this Technical Manual; for drydock replacement procedures the initial SDPS valve alignment shall be IAW Table 2-1 of this Technical Manual.

NOTE

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF PIPING DEVICES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NAVAL SHIPS’ TECHNICAL MANUAL, NSTM S9AA0-AB-GOS-010, CHAPTER 505, PIPING SYSTEMS.

NOTE

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF W-V-24, W-V-27, A-V-127, AND A-V- 129 CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED BY CLOSING THE DAMAGE CONTROL VALVES INSTALLED BETWEEN THE SONAR DOME AND THE PRES- SURIZATION SUBSYSTEM (SEE FIGURE FO-8). (SHIPS WITHOUT DC VALVES CONTACT NAVSEASYSCOM.)

Table 6-2. SDPS Component Replacement Index COMPONENT CONNECTION TYPE WATERBORNE RESTRICTION/REMARKS W-V-1 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-2 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-3 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-4 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-5 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-6 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-7 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-8 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-9 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-11 Flange REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK W-V-12 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-13 Flange No waterborne restrictions;

6-29 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 6-2. SDPS Component Replacement Index - Continued

COMPONENT CONNECTION TYPE WATERBORNE RESTRICTION/REMARKS E-F-14 N/A REQUIRES DOME ENTRY W-V-15 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-16 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-17 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-18 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-19 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-20 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; E-V-21 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-22 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-23 Union REQUIRES DOME ENTRY W-V-24 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-25 Union No waterborne restrictions; P-X-26 N/A No waterborne restrictions; W-V-27 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-F-28 Flange No waterborne restrictions; E-F-29 N/A No waterborne restrictions; W-V-31 Flange No waterborne restrictions; E-F-32 N/A No waterborne restrictions; W-F-34 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-H-37 Union REQUIRES DOME ENTRY W-GA-38 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-GA-39 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-GA-40 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-GA-41 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; E-F-42 N/A REQUIRES DOME ENTRY W-F-43 Welded No waterborne restrictions; E-PN-44 N/A No waterborne restrictions; E-PN-45 N/A No waterborne restrictions; W-V-46 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-48 Thread No waterborne restrictions; W-V-49 Flange No waterborne restrictions; E-PN-50 N/A No waterborne restrictions; W-H-52 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-53 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-54 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-55 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-56 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-57 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK W-V-58 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-59 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-60 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-61 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-62 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-F-63 Threaded REQUIRES DOME ENTRY TO INSTALL W-V-64 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-65 Gage line No waterborne restrictions;

6-30 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 6-2. SDPS Component Replacement Index - Continued

COMPONENT CONNECTION TYPE WATERBORNE RESTRICTION/REMARKS W-V-66 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-V-67 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; W-F-92 Union No waterborne restrictions; DC-V-95 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK DC-V-96 Flange REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK W-V-97 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-98 Union No waterborne restrictions; W-V-99 Flange No waterborne restrictions; W-V-100 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; DC-V-101 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK DC-V-102 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK A-V-103 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-104 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-105 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-106 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-107 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-108 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-109 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-110 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-F-111 Flange No waterborne restrictions; A-V-112 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-F-113 Flange No waterborne restrictions; A-F-114 Flange No waterborne restrictions; A-V-115 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-116 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-117 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-118 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-119 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-H-120 Union REQUIRES DOME ENTRY A-V-121 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-122 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-123 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-F-124 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-125 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-126 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-127 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-F-128 Thread REQUIRES DOME ENTRY A-V-129 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-130 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-131 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-132 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-133 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-134 Flange No waterborne restrictions;

6-31 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 6-2. SDPS Component Replacement Index - Continued

COMPONENT CONNECTION TYPE WATERBORNE RESTRICTION/REMARKS A-F-135 Weld No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-136 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-137 Gage line REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK A-V-138 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK A-V-139 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-140 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-141 Union No waterborne restrictions; E-K-142 N/A No waterborne restrictions; A-V-144 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-145 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-147 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-148 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-150 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-151 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-155 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-156 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-157 Thread No waterborne restrictions; A-V-158 Union REQUIRES DOME ENTRY A-V-159 Gage line REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK A-V-160 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-161 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-162 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-163 No waterborne restrictions; A-V-164 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-165 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-166 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-GA-167 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-170 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-171 Union No waterborne restrictions; E-F-175 N/A No waterborne restrictions; A-V-176 Gage line No waterborne restrictions; A-V-177 Union REPLACE VALVE ONLY WHEN SHIP IS IN DRY- DOCK A-V-178 (3) Gage line No waterborne restrictions; E-F-180 N/A No waterborne restrictions; A-V-183 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-184 Union No waterborne restrictions; A-V-185 Union No waterborne restrictions;

6.12 LP AIR DEPRESSURIZATION PROCEDURES. Depressurization of LP Air Subsystem is accomplished by performing the following procedural steps in sequential order: a. Removal and replacement of the following air components. Removal and Replacement of: A-V-151, A-V-183,

6-32 S9165-AE-MMA-010

A-V-112, A-GA-117, A-F-114, AV-178(3), A-V-150, A-V-115, A-V-107, A-F-113, A-V-116, A-V-165, A-V-118, A-V-119, A-V-147, A-V-148, A-V-164, A-V-122, A-F-124, A-V-125, A-V-126, A-V-155, A-V-166, A-V-156, A-V-130, A-V-185, A-V-144, A-V-145, A-V-131, A-V-134, A-F-111 and A-F-135. (1) Secure A-V-127 and A-V-129. (2) Secure and tag LP air supply by closing isolation valve A-V-110. (3) Ensure A-V-183, A-V-108, A-V-112, A-V-107, A-V-116, A-V-165, A-V-105, A-V-147, A-V-164, A-V-121, A-V-125, A-V-166 and A-V-155 are open. (4) Gages A-GA-109, A-GA-117, A-GA-106 and A-GA-123 indicate “0” PSIG.

NOTE

REMOVALAND REPLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES DO NOT REQUIRE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE WATER CONTROL SYSTEM LINES. (5) Remove and replace piping devices. (6) DELETED b. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ALL GAGES, PRESSURE SWITCHES AND TEST POINT CON- NECTION VALVES. Removal and Replacement of: W-GA-38, W-V-4, W-GA-39, W-V-9, W-GA-41, W-V-19, W-GA-40, W-V-20, A-GA-167, A-V-160, A-GA-140, A-V-162, A-GA-139, A-GA-123, A-V-121, A-GA-106, A-V-105, A-GA-109, A-V-108, E-F-175, A-V-176, A-GA-133, A-V-132, A-GA-136, A-V-161, P-X-26, W-V-46, E-F-32 and A-V-100

WARNING

WARNING IF E-F-32 IS TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUG P8 FROM TERMINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J8) PRIOR TO REMOVAL.

NOTE

REMOVALAND REPLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES DO NOT REQUIRE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE WATER OR AIR CONTROL SYSTEM LINES. (1) Close cutoff valve to the device.

WARNING

PRESSURIZED WATER OR AIR IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (2) Relieve pressure from gages, ensure cutoff valve is closed, opening the Test Point Connection (TPC) valve carefully and then loosen the gage’s test point cap until all ﬂow has stops. (3) Remove and replace piping devices. (4) Return the SDRW system to the normal condition.

6-33 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ALL WATER CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES. Removal and Replacement of: W-F-13, E-V-21, W-V-22, W-V-25, W-V-54, W-V-60, W-V-67, W-V-(4-41-2).

NOTE

REMOVALAND REPLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES DO NOT REQUIRE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE WATER CONTROL SYSTEM LINES. (1) Ensure W-V-12 and W-V-49 are closed. (2) Relieve all pressure to the device being removed as follows:

WARNING

WATER PRESSURIZED AT 150 PSIG IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (3) To relieve pressure from devices in the overboard discharge line, open valves W-V-11, W-V-(4-41-2), E-V-21, W-V-22 and W-V-25. (4) Remove piping device. (5) Repair or replace piping device. (6) Reinstall piping device in SDRW system piping. (7) Return the SDRW system to the normal condition. d. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SONAR DOME BOUNDARY COMPONENTS. Removal and Replacement of: W-V-23, E-F-14, E-F-42, and A-V-158.

NOTE

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES REQUIRE DOME ENTRY. (1) Ship in unﬂooded drydock. (a) Verify dome depressurization has been completed and 115 VAC, 60 Hz electrical power to the SDRW system has been secured. (b Remove piping devices. (c) Repair or replace the device. (d) Reinstall the device in the SDRW system piping. (2) Ship in port. (a) Perform water-to-air interchange.

WARNING

IF E-F-14 AND/OR E-F-42 ARE TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUGS P9 AND P10 FROM TERMINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J9 AND J10) PRIOR TO REMOVAL.

6-34 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(b) Enter dome in accordance with procedures given in Table 2-8. (c) Remove piping device. (d) Repair or replace the device. (e) Reinstall the device in the SDRW system piping. (f) Exit dome in accordance with procedures given in Table 2-8. (g) Perform air-to-freshwater interchange in accordance with procedures of Table 2-5. (h) Reconnect plugs P9 and P10 in terminal box E-PN-50 if required. (i) DELETED (j) DELETED (k) DELETED (l) DELETED e. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF WATER CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES WHICH REQUIRE DEPRESSURIZATION OF THE WATERCONTROL SYSTEM SUPPLY LINE. Removal and Replacement of: W-V-61, W-V-55, W-F-34, W-V-53, W-V-43, W-V-2, W-V-64, W-V-28, W-V-5, W-V-7, W-V-8, W-V-3, W-V-49, W-V-65, W-V-12, W-V-17, W-V-15, W-V-16, E-F-29, W-V-18, W-V-66, W-V-31, W-V-24 and W-V- 59.

CAUTION

TO BE PERFORMED DOCKSIDE ONLY. DOME WILL BE PRESSUR- IZED WITH WATER DURING THIS PROCEDURE. THE DOME PRES- SURE WILL NOT BE AUTOMATICALLY MAINTAINED (DC-V-96 CLOSED). THEREFORE, PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE PROCEDURE, ENSURE THAT SHIP’S LOW PRESSURE AIR SERVICE IS AVAILABLE TO THE SDRW SYSTEM AND THAT THE AIR CONTROL VALVES ARE SET ACCORDING TO TABLE 2-2. THIS WILL ALLOW THE IMMEDI- ATE APPLICATION OF AIR TO THE DOME IF THE WATER PRES- SURE SHOULD DROP TO LESS THAN 22 PSIG DURING THE PROCE- DURE. (1) Depressurize the water control system supply line as follows: (a) Close DC-V-96. (b) Secure W-V-1 seawater ﬁremain supply to the SDRW system. (c) Secure W-V-6 freshwater supply to the SDRW system. (d) Open valves W-V-2, W-V-3, and W-V-17. (e) Verify that gages W-GA-38, W-GA-39, and W-GA-41 indicate 0 psig.

WARNING

IF E-F-29 IS TO BE REMOVED, DISCONNECT PLUG P11 FROM TER- MINAL BOX E-PN-50 (J11) PRIOR TO REMOVAL. (2) Remove desired piping device from water control system supply line. (3) Repair or replace device as necessary.

6-35 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(4) Reinstall device in the SDRW water control system supply line. (5) Bleed all air from supply line and pressurize line as follows: (a) Close W-V-2, W-V-3, W-V-15, and W-V-17. (b) Apply ship’s seawater ﬁremain supply pressure to the SDRW water control system. (c) Open W-V-1 and W-V-3. (d) Slowly open W-V-17 until relief valve W-V-31 vents. (e) Close W-V-17 and W-V-3. (f) Close valves W-V-4 and W-V-9.

WARNING

WATER PRESSURIZED AT 150 PSIG IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. (g) Carefully loosen test point cap at gage W-GA-38 and slightly open W-V-4 until all air has been removed from the line. (h) Tighten test point cap and open W-V-4 fully. (i) Carefully loosen test point cap at gage W-GA-39 and slightly open W-V-9 until all air has been removed from the line. (j) Tighten test point cap and open W-V-9 fully. (k) Verify that gage W-GA-38 indicates 150 (±25) psig. (l) If W-V-7 has been repaired or replaced, perform the adjustment procedures of paragraph 6-3.1. (m) Verify that gage W-GA-39 indicates 50 (±5) psig. (n) Open W-V-15. (o) Slowly open W-V-17 until relief valve W-V-31 vents. (p) Close W-V-17. (q) Close W-V-19. (r) Carefully loosen test point cap at gage W-GA-41 and slightly open W-V-19 until all air has been removed from the line. (s) Tighten test point cap and open W-V-19 fully. (t) Verify that gage W-GA-41 indicates 39.5 (+2, -0) psig, minus head pressure. (6) If W-V-16 or W-V-31 have been repaired or replaced, perform the adjustment procedures of paragraphs 6-3.2 and 6-3.3. (7) Position valves W-V-1, W-V-6, and DC-V-96 as necessary to return the SDRW system to the desired condition. (8) If dome is pressurized with water, bleed all air from the dome through W-V-27.

6.13 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF AIR CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES. a. Removal and Replacement of: A-V-141, A-V-157, A-V-163, A-V-171 and A-V-170.

6-36 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

REMOVALAND REPLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES DO NOT REQUIRE PRESSURIZATION OF THE AIRLOCK. (1) Gas free airlock if replacing A-V-170 or A-V-157. (2) Open valves A-V-141, A-V-162, A-V-157, A-V-170, and A-V-171. (3) Remove desired piping device. (4) Repair or replace piping device. (5) Reinstall piping device in SDRW system piping.

6.14 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES.

WARNING

115 VAC, 60 HZ ELECTRICAL POWER IS PRESENT IN THIS SYSTEM. OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. a. Removal and replacement procedures for electromechanical sensing devices are contained in the following paragraphs: E-F-14 paragraph 6.12.d. E-F-29 paragraph 6.12.e. E-F-32 paragraph 6.12.b. E-F-42 paragraph 6.12.d. E-F-175 paragraph 6.12.b. E-V-21 paragraph 6.12.c. b. Removal repair, and replacement of circuit components shall be accomplished by qualiﬁed personnel only.

6-37 / (6-38 Blank) 6-38 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 7

PARTS LIST

7-1. INTRODUCTION. The tables in this chapter contain all information necessary to identify each component in the sonar dome rubber window (SDRW) system. Figure 7-1 illustrates the sonar dome pressurization system components by major subsystems, i.e., air, electrical, and water.

7-2. PARTS LISTS AND REFERENCES.

a. Table 7-1 gives nomenclature and primary reference designations of major components and parts list page references. b. Table 7-2 is the Parts List. It contains all information prescribed by speciﬁcation for the pressurization system. c. Table 7-3 is the List of Common Items, parts used more than once in the system, such as lights, fuses, switches, relays, and common air and water valves. d. Table 7-4 lists the code number, name, and address of each manufacturer or source of parts. e. Table 7-5 lists the Shipping Fixture Parts List and Quantities for SDRW-1.

Figure 7-1. SDRW Family Tree

7-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-1. List of Major Components Nomenclature Name Designation SDRW-1, -2 Rubber Window -R- Bead Seat Assembly -H- Fairing Angle Assembly -F- Repair Kit -K- Water System -W- Air System -A- Electrical System -E-

Table 7-2. Parts List Figure, Manufacturer’s System Desig- Index Part Number Mfg. nator SDRW-1 Number Description (SDRW-1) Code APL Number Sonar Dome Rubber Window 5S808-1 03481 316330001 System R Window Assembly 6S1086-1 03481 H Attachment Hardware Pack- 6S1086-3 03481 age F Fairing Angle Package 6S1086-4 03481 A, W, E Pressurization System, Air, 6258815 53711 Water, and Electrical A Air Pressurization Compo- See Parts List nents W Water Pressurization Compo- See Parts List nents E Electrical Pressurization See Parts List Components K Repair Kit 3S1441, 0 03481 H Bead Seat Hardware Package 5S2393 03481 H-1 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-14(1) 03481 H-2 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-14(2) 03481 H-3 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-15(1) 03481 H-4 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-15(2) 03481 H-5 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-16(1) 03481 H-6 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-16(2) 03481 H-7 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-17(1) 03481 H-8 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-17(2) 03481 H-9 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-18(1) 03481 H-10 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-18(2) 03481 H-11 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-19(1) 03481 H-12 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-19(2) 03481 H-13 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-20(1) 03481 H-14 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-20(2) 03481 H-15 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-21(1) 03481 H-16 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-21(2) 03481 H-17 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-22(1) 03481

7-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Figure, Manufacturer’s System Desig- Index Part Number Mfg. nator SDRW-1 Number Description (SDRW-1) Code APL Number H-18 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-22(2) 03481 H-19 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-23(1) 03481 H-20 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-23(2) 03481 H-21 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-24(1) 03481 H-22 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-24(2) 03481 H-23 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-25(1) 03481 H-24 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-25(2) 03481 H-25 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-26(1) 03481 H-26 Bead Seat Assembly 5S2393-26(2) 03481 H-MP-1 Bolt 6S1086-30 03481 H-MP-2 Bolt 6S1086-31 03481 F Fairing Angle Hardware 552542 03481 Package F-1 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-2 03481 F-2 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-3 03481 F-3 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-4 03481 F-4 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-5 03481 F-5 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-6 03481 F-6 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-7 03481 F-7 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-8 03481 F-8 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-9 03481 F-9 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-10 03481 F-10 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-11 03481 F-11 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-12 03481 F-12 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-13 03481 F-13 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-14 03481 F-14 Fairing Angle Assembly 552542-15 03481

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes SDRW- Firemain Supply 03950 1H 4820-00-585-0433 1 882010196 W-V-1 Cutout 2-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-2 Firemain Strainer 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 Blowdown 1″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-3 Firemain Reducer 03950 1H 4820-00-585-0433 1 882010196 Bypass 2-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve

7-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes W-V-4 Firemain Supply 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve W-V-5 Firemain Reducer 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 Cutout 3/4″ IPS, Gate Valve W-V-6 Freshwater Hose 14959 1H 4820-00-580-6422 1 882000828 Cutout 2-1/2″ IPS Angle Valve W-V-7 Firemain Reducer 55378 4820-01-458-0235 1 882097548 3/4″ IPS Reducing Valve Set @ 50 PSI W-V-8 Firemain Reducer 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 Cutout 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-9 Freshwater Supply 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cut-out 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve W-GA-10C Remote Dome 05991 7H 5930-01-206-5399 1 450100996 Gage/Water-Press SW Pressure Gage 0-60 PSI W-GA-10 Digital Electronic 0BHF9 7HH6685-01-498-9593 1 38A020010 Pressure Indicator W-V-11 Overboard Dis- 80064 1H 4820-00-585-0431 1 882010197 charge Cutout 3″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-12 Eductor Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0677 1 882047490 Cutout 2″ IPS Gate Valve W-F-13 Eductor 3″ IPS 71905 9C 4730-00-165-0956 1 740000218 Eductor SDRW- Dome Full Indica- 04034 9N 5930-00-008-0547 1 213480382 E-F-14 tor Switch Water- Level Switch W-V-15 Dome Water 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 Reducer Cutout 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-16 Dome Water 55378 4820-01-458-0235 1 882097548 Reducer 3/4″ IPS Reducing Valve Set @ 22 PSI

7-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes W-V-17 Dome Water 80064 4820-00-585-0433 1 882010196 Reducer Bypass 2-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-18 Dome Water 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 Reducer Cutout 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-19 Dome Water Sup- 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 ply Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve W-V-20 Eductor Vacuum 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve E-V-21 Eductor Solenoid 87229 9C 4810-01-124-9000 1 882182574 4″ IPS Solenoid Valve W-V-22 Dome/Trunk 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 Sweep Cutout 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-23 Dome Sweep Cut- 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0699 1 882057051 out 3/4″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-24 Dome Water Sup- 80064 9C 4820-00-541-5693 1 882042017 ply Cutout 3″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-25 Trunk Sweep Cut- 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1677 1 882045185 out 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve W-PX-26 DEPI Pressure 27385 7H 6695-01-413-4641 1 612730003 Transducer DEPI Transducer 27385 9G 6150-01-413-3044 1 612730003 Cable W-V-27 Dome Vent 1″ IPS 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Globe Valve SDRW- Firemain Supply Manufactured by Install- W-F-28 Oriﬁce 1-13/16″ ing Activity, Drawing Dia. 6258815, Sheet 11, Detail 96B E-F-29 Dome Water Flow 04034 7H 5930-01-208-6549 1 213480877 Switch 3/4″ IPS Flow Switch W-V-31 Dome Water Sup- 65079 4820-01-457-3110 1 883120149 ply Relief 3″ IPS Relief Valve

7-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes E-F-32 Low Air-Pressure 19278 9N 5930-00-615-4520 1 509990739 Alarm Switch Pressure Switch E-F-33 Lamp, Incandes- 80064 9G 6210-00-336-5867 1 239990021 cent Solenoid Valve Indicator W-F-34 Freshwater Supply Manufactured by Install- Oriﬁce 1-13/16″ ing Activity, Drawing Dia. 6258815, Sheet 11, Detail 96B W-H-36 Dome Sweep Hose 03481 9C 4720-01-091-5277 1 316330013 3/4″ ID Hose, Eductor W-H-37 Water Fill/Re- 03481 9C 4720-01-052-6930 1 316330013 moval Hose 3″ ID Hose, Eductor & Fill W-GA-38 Firemain Supply 64467 9G 6685-01-122-3793 1 316330010 Gage Gage, Pres- sure 0-300 PSI W-GA-39 Freshwater Supply 81349 9G 6685-01-047-5116 1 316330011 Gage Gage, Pres- sure 0-200 PSI W-GA-40 Eductor Vacuum 38056 9G 6685-01-131-8105 1 316330011 Gage Gage, Com- pound 300-0-30″ W-GA-41 Dome Water Sup- 64467 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330011 ply Gage Gage, Pressure 0-60 PSI SDRW- Dome Empty Indi- 04034 9N 5930-00-007-7781 1 213480381 E-F-42 cation Switch Water-Level Switch W-F-43 Firemain Strainer 80064 9B 4730-01-336-6991 1 759990012 2-1/2″ IPS ″Y″ Strainer E-PN-44 Alarm Panel- 21445 3BD6110-01-453-6081 1 501070003 Dome Control Sta- tion Dome Control Panel E-PN-45 Dome Status 21445 3BD6110-01-453-7473 1 501070004 Panel-Sonar Con- trol Room Dome Status Panel W-V-46 DEPI Cutout 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 If DEPI was Valve installed for W-GA-10

7-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes E-PN-47 Isolation Box, 20890 9B 5895-01-446-6321 1 999972201 Sonar W-V-48 Dome Sweep Hose 37239 9C 4820-00-384-0346 1 882047971 Cutout 1-1/4″ IPS Quick-Acting Gate Valve W-V-49 Eductor Solenoid 80064 1H 4820-00-585-0431 1 882010197 Cutout 3″ IPS Globe Valve E-PN-50 Dome Control Sta- 03481 9G 6110-01-023-0351 1 601070006 tion Terminal Box W-H-52 Trunk Sweep Hose 03481 9C 4720-01-053-5121 1 316330013 3/4″ ID Hose, Cleanup W-V-53 Firemain Check 80064 3HD 4820-00-058-3509 1 882032745 Valve 2-1/2″ IPS Check Valve W-V-54 Overboard Dis- 80064 9C 4820-00-005-7328 1 882032746 charge Check Valve 3″ IPS Check Valve W-V-55 Freshwater Check 80064 3HD 4820-00-058-3509 1 882032745 Valve 2-1/2″ IPS Check Valve W-V-56 Water Removal 80064 9C 4820-00-005-7328 1 882032746 Check Valve 3″ IPS Check Valve W-V-57 Dome Gage Cut- 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 If Barton gage out 1″ IPS Globe installed for Valve W-GA-10 W-V-57 DEPI Transducer 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 If DEPI Root Valve installed for W-GA-10 W-V-58 Dome Vent 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 Flexhose Cutout 1″ IPS Gate Valve SDRW- Dome Water Sup- 80064 9C 4820-00-541-5693 1 882042017 W-V-59 ply Flexhose Cut- out 3″ IPS Gate Valve W-V-60 Dome/Trunk 53711 9C 4820-00-483-0680 1 882037048 Sweep Check Valve 3/4″ IPS Check Valve W-V-61 Freshwater Supply 03950 1H 4820-00-585-0433 1 882010196 Cutout 2-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve

7-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes W-V-62 Freshwater Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 Drain 1″ IPS Gate Valve W-F-63 Water Fill/Re- 03481 1HS 4730-01-199-1221 1 316330011 moval Hose Cap 3″ Pipe Cap, Screwed W-V-64 Firemain Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-65 Freshwater Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-66 Dome Water Sup- 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 ply Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve W-V-67 Eductor Vacuum 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve W-F-92 1-1/2″ IPS Funnel Manufactured by Install- ing Activity, Drawing 6258815, Sheet 11, Detail 92F DC-V-95 Dome Vent Dam- 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 age Control Valve 1″ IPS Gate Valve DC-V-96 Dome Water Sup- 80064 9C 4820-00-541-5693 1 882042017 ply Damage Con- trol Valve 3″ IPS Gate Valve SDRW- 1-1/2″ IPS Gate 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 W-V-97 Valve W-V-98 1-1/2″ IPS Check 80064 9C 4820-00-451-2682 1 882037214 Valve W-V-99 3″ IPS Check 80064 9C 4820-00-005-7328 1 882032746 Valve A-V-100 Pressure Switch 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Cutout Valve 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve DC-V-101 Dome Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 Damage Control 1-1/2″ Globe Valve DC-V-102 Dome Air Exhaust 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0677 1 882047490 Damage Control 2″ Gate Valve

7-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-103 Dome Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 Flexhose Cutout 1-1/2″ Gate Valve A-V-104 Dome Air Exhaust 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0677 1 882047490 Flexhose Cutout 2″ Gate Valve A-V-105 Filtered Air Gage 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-GA-106 Filtered Air Gage 81349 9G 6685-01-047-5116 1 316330012 Gage, Pressure 0-200 PSI A-V-107 Air Filter Bypass 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 1″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-108 L.P. Air Supply 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-GA-109 L.P. Air Supply 81349 9G 6685-01-047-5116 1 316330012 Gage Gage, Pres- sure 0-200 PSI A-V-110 L.P. Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 Cutout 1″ IPS Gate Valve A-V-111 Air Exhaust Ori- (Fabricated) 1 ﬁce, 1/2″ Diameter A-V-112 Air Filter Cutout 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 82047488 1″ IPS Gate Valve SDRWA-F- Air Supply Oriﬁce Manufactured by Install- 113 7/32″ Diameter ing Activity, Drawing 6258815, Sheet 11, Detail 94B A-F-114 Air Filter 79960 1HS 4330-01-199-1144 1 480120085 P/O A-F- Filter Element, 79960 9C 4330-01-033-7574 12 480120085 114 2nd Stage P/O A-F- Filter Element, 3rd 79960 9C 4330 01-172-1969 18 480120085 114 Stage A-V-115 Air Filter Ball 98963 9C 4440-00-139-4324 1 316330012 Float Drain 1/2″ Ball Float Valve A-V-116 Air Filter Cutout 80064 9C 4820-00-184-9108 1 882047488 1″ IPS Gate Valve A-GA-117 Air Filter Differ- 90005 1HS 6685-01-199-1304 1 480120085 ential Gage 1/4″ IPS Air Monitor Gage 0-10

7-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-118 Dome Air Reducer 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 Cutout 1-1/2″ IPS Gate Valve A-V-119 Dome Air Reducer 35795 9C 4820-01-007-4046 1 882095713 Cutout 1-1/2″ IPS Press. Reg. Valve A-H-120 Air Exhaust Hose 03481 9C 4720-01-050-9159 1 316330013 2″ ID Hose Air Exhaust A-V-121 Dome Input Air 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-122 Dome Air Relief 65079 3BD4820-01-456-9766 1 883120148 1-1/2″ IPS Relief Valve SDRWA- Dome Input Air 64467 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330012 GA-123 Gage Gage, Pres- sure 0-60 PSI A-F-124 Air Flow Meter 91556 9G 6680-01-502-5813 1 10A020013 Flow Meter 1-1/2″ NPT A-V-125 Air Flow Control 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 1-1/2″ IPS Gate Valve A-V-126 Air Supply Float 09032 9C 4820-00-198-7151 1 882037456 Check Valve 1-1/2″ IPS Float Check Valve A-V-127 Dome Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 Cutout 1-1/2″ IPS Gate Valve A-F-128 Dome Air Diffuser Manufactured by Install- 1-1/2″ IPS Air ing Activity, Drawing Diffuser 6258815, Sheet 11, Detail 96E A-V-129 Dome Air Exhaust 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0677 1 882047490 Cutout 2″ IPS Gate Valve A-V-130 Air Exhaust Float 09032 9C 4820-01-052-5766 1 882037037 Check Valve 2″ IPS Float Check Valve A-V-131 Dome Exhaust 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1681 1 882057055 Control Bypass 2″ IPS Globe Valve

7-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-132 Exhaust Air Gage 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-GA-133 Exhaust Air Gage 64467 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330012 Gage, Pressure 0-60 PSI A-V-134 Exhaust Control 86184 9C 4820-01-184-4104 1 882095771 Regulator P/O A-V- Reducer Valve 86184 9C 4820-01-139-1896 1 882191723 134 P/O A-V- Relief Valve 86184 9C 4820-01-138-5587 1 883116083 134 SDRWA-F- Terminal, Air, Vent 09032 9C 4820-01-155-0261 1 316330012 135 2″ IPS A-GA-136 Dome/Airlock 64467 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330012 Diff. Gage Gage, Pressure 0-60 PSI A-V-137 Dome/Airlock 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Diff. Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-138 Airlock Pressure 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Valve 1″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-139 Trunk/Airlock 38056 9G 6685-00-872-4866 1 316330012 Diff. Gage Gage, Pressure 0-60 PSI A-GA-140 Airlock Gage 64467 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330012 Gage, Pressure 0-60 PSI A-V-141 Airlock Bleed 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Valve 1″ IPS Globe Valve E-K-142 Solenoid Control 11660 9N 5945-00-968-3607 1 198900567 Relay Relay A-V-144 Air Sample 1/4″ 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-145 Dome Exhaust 80064 9C 4820-00-497-1681 1 882057055 Control Cutout 2″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-146 Airlock Auxiliary 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Air Supply 1″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-147 Dome Air Reducer 80064 9C 4820-00-495-6228 1 882057054 Bypass 1-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve

7-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-148 Dome Air Reducer 80064 9C 4820-00-495-6228 1 882057054 Cutout 1-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-150 Air Filter Ball Various 9C 4820-00-483-0695 1 882059576 Float Drain Valve 9C 4820-01-085-3344 1 882057030 (DDG- Bypass, 68, 72 and 73 only) 1/2″ IPS Globe Valve 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-151 L.P. Air Check 80064 9C 4820-00-483-0681 1 882037049 Valve 1″ IPS Check Valve A-V-155 Air Supply Drain 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve SDRWA-V- Air Exhaust Drain 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 156 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-157 Airlock Bleed 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Valve 1″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-158 Airlock Press. 80064 9C 4820-00-189-4887 1 882057052 Valve 1″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-159 Dome Gage Root 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-160 Dome Gage Cut- 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 out 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-161 Dome/AL Diff 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Gage Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-162 Airlock Gage Cut- 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 out 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-163 Pass/AL Diff Gage 30327 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-164 Dome Input Air 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve

7-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-165 Filtered Air Gage 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-166 Dome Air Bypass 80064 9C 4820-00-482-8905 1 882047489 1-1/2″ IPS Gate Valve A-G -167 Dome Gage Gage, 64478 9G 6685-01-059-6266 1 316330012 Pressure 0-60 PSI A-V-170 Trunk/Airlock 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Diff. Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve SDRW- Airlock Gage Root 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 A-V-171 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve E-F-175 L.P. Air Supply 19278 9N 5930-01-023-9210 1 509990739 Fail Switch Pres- sure Switch A-V-176 L.P. Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-01-246-2812 1 882072017 Fail Sw. Cutout 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve A-V-177 Low Air-Press. 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Alarm Switch Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-178 Air Filter Drain 79960 9C 4820-01-145-4105 3 480120085 Provided with Cutout 1/4″ NPT A-F-114 Needle Valve E-PN-179 Sonar Dome Por- Manufactured by Install- table Communica- ing Activity, Long tions Panel Beach Naval Shipyard Drawing 401-1582187 E-F-180 L.P. Air Supply 80064 9G 6210-00-336-5867 1 239990021 Failure Ind. Type B41A E-F-181 Lighting Cutout 81349 9N 5930-01-222-6650 1 316330001 Switch Type 3SR2C4A-2 E-F-182 Call-Bell Cutout 03950 1H 5930-00-581-6032 1 316330001 Switch Type S2JR5-3 A-V-183 L.P. Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Gage Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve

7-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-2. Parts List - Continued

Fig/ Reference Nomenclature/ National Stock Num- Application/ Item Designator Description CAGE ber Qty. CID/APL Notes A-V-184 L.P. Air Supply 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Failure Switch Root, 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve A-V-185 Exhaust Air Gage 80064 9C 4820-00-188-8248 1 882057048 Root 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve

Table 7-3. List of Common Items SYSTEM REFERENCE ITEM APL OR NSN QTY DESIGNATOR 3/4″ IPS Reducing Valve 882095816 2 W-V-7, W-V-16 3″ IPS Globe Valve 882010197 2 W-V-11, W-V-49 3″ IPS Check Valve 882032746 3 W-V-54, W-V-56, W-V-99 2-1/2″ IPS Globe Valve 882010196 4 W-V-1, W-V-3, W-V-17, W-V-61 3/4″ IPS Gate Valve 882045185 6 W-V-5, W-V-8, W-V-15, W-V-18, W-V-22, W-V-25 2-1/2″ IPS Check Valve 882032745 2 W-V-53, W-V-55 2″ IPS Gate Valve 882047490 4 W-V-12, A-V-104, A-V- 129, DC-V-102 2″ IPS Globe Valve 882057055 2 A-V-131, A-V-145 1-1/2″ IPS Gate Valve 882047489 6 W-V-97, A-V-118, A-V- 125, A-V-127, A-V-166, DC-V-101 1″ IPS Globe Valve 882057052 7 W-V-27, W-V-57, A-V-107, A-V-138, A-V-141, A-V- 157, A-V-158 1″ IPS Gate Valve 882047488 7 W-V-2, W-V-58, W-V-62, DC-V-95, A-V-110, A-V- 112, A-V-116 3/4″ IPS Globe Valve 882057051 1 W-V-23 1/2″ IPS Globe Valve 882059576 1 A-V-150 1/4″ IPS Needle Globe Valve 882072017 14 W-V-4, W-V-9, W-V-19, W-V-20, A-V-100, A-V- 105, A-V-108, A-V-121, A-V-132, A-V-160, A-V- 161, A-V-162, A-V-163, A-V-176 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve 882057048 16 W-V-64, W-V-65, W-V-66, W-V-67, A-V-137, A-V- 155, A-V-156, A-V-159, A-V-164, A-V-165, A-V- 170, A-V-171, A-V-177, A-V-183, A-V-184, A-V- 185

7-14 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-3. List of Common Items - Continued

SYSTEM REFERENCE ITEM APL OR NSN QTY DESIGNATOR 1/4″ IPS Globe Valve 882057030 1 A-V-150 (DDG-68, 72 and 73 only) Pressure gage, 0-200 psig 9G 6685-01-047-5116 2 A-GA-106, A-GA-109 Pressure Gage, 0-60 psig 9G 6685-01-059-6266 7 W-GA-41, A-GA-123, A-GA-133, A-GA-136, A-GA-139, A-GA-140, A-GA-167 Buzzer 9G 6350-00-295-2847 1 E-PN-45-DS7 Bell 9G 6350-00-295-2682 1 E-PN-44-DS7 Relay 9N 5945-00-914-0152 1 E-PN-45-K1 Relay, Time Delay, Solid state, 5-minute 9G 6645-01-482-9704 1 E-PN-45-K2 delay, TS241300. 50107004 Relay, Solid State SPST 9N 5945-00-008-0546 1 E-PN-45-S4 Transformer 9N 5950-01-162-6090 2 E-PN-44-T1, E-PN-45-T1 Switch, Push Button 9N 5930-00-142-4418 1 E-PN-45-S2 Switch, Interlock 9N 5930-00-052-3260 3 E-PN-44-S1, E-PN-45-S1, S3 Fuse, 4 Amp 9N 5920-00-281-0210 2 E-PN-45-F1, F2 Fuse, 6 Amp 9N 5920-00-281-0225 2 E-PN-44-F1, F2 Lamp 9G 6240-00-155-7857 8 E-PN-44-DS1, 2, 3, 4, E-PN-45-DS1, 2, 3, 4 Lamp, Neon 9G 6240-00-892-4420 6 E-PN-44-DS5, 6, E-PN-45- DS5, 6, 8, E-PN-50-DS1 Pressure Gage 300-0-30 9G 6685-01-131-8105 2 W-GA-40 Pressure Gage, O-Looping 9G 6685-00-906-4002 1 W-GA-39

Table 7-4. List of Manufacturers CAGE Company Address 0BHF9 Prime Technology LLC 344 Twin Lakes Rd 352 North Branford, Ct. 06471- 1220 03481 B. F. Goodrich Co. 500 S. Main Street Engineered Products Group Akron, OH 44318 03847 Warren Controls Corp. Route 57, P.O. Box 8 Broadway, NJ 08808-3474 03950 Ships Parts Control Center Mechanicsburg, PA 17055- 0788 04034 Transamerica DeLaval, Inc. Cowles Road Gems Sensors Div. Plainsville, CT 06062 05991 ITT Barton Instruments 900 S. Turnbull Canyon Road P.O. Box 1882 City of Industry, CA 91749 09032 Tate Andale Inc. 1941 Lansdowne Road Baltimore, MD 21227 11660 Westinghouse Electric Corp. 1945 Craig Road Distribution Equipment Div. St. Louis, MO 63141

7-15 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-4. List of Manufacturers - Continued

CAGE Company Address 14959 Crane Company 500 Executive Blvd. Central Quotations Dept. 500 Elmsford, NY 10532 19278 Detroit Switch Inc. 1025-33 Beaver Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15233 20890 VMC Instruments, Inc. 3010 Rollie Gates Dr. (formely Volumetrics Inc.) Paso Robles, CA 93447 21445 Panelmatic Youngstown Inc. 1125 Meadowbrook AVE Youngstown, Oh. 44512-1884 27385 Viatran Corp. 300 Industrial Dr. Grand Island, NY 14072 27710 Carborundum Co. P.O. Box 403 The Bonded Abrasives Div. Niagara Falls, NY 14302- 3291 30327 Clevite 6300 W. Howard Street An Imperial Clevite Co. Chicago, IL 60648 Fluid Components Div. 34494 Kunkle Valve Co., Inc. 8200 Bluffton Road P.O. Box 1740 Fort Wayne, IN 46801 35795 Leslie Co. 401 Jefferson Road Navy Sales Parsippany, NJ 07054 38056 Dresser Industries, Inc. 250 C. Main Street Dresser Instrument Div. Stratford, CT 06497 53711 Naval Sea Systems Command Washington, DC 20362-5101 64467 Weksler Instruments Corp. 80 Mill Road, Freeport Long Island, NY 11520-3823 65079 Danco Valve Company 15230 Lakewood Blvd bellflower, Ca. 90706-4240 65597 Wilcox Electric, Inc. 1400 Chestnut Street Subsidiary of Northrup Kansas City, MO 64127 65709 Ran-Paige Co Inc 1 Jeffrey Way Youngsville, Nc. 27596 71905 Derbyshire Machine & Tool Co. Belfield Avenue and Wister St. Philadelphia, PA 19144-3599 75954 J. E. Lonergan Co. 10050 Sandmeyer Lane Philadelphia, PA 19116 76364 Milwaukee Valve Co. 2375 S. Burrell Street Milwaukee, WI 53207 77348 Plumb Rayette R. Inc. Aramingo Ave. at Tocony St. Philadelphia, PA 19137 79960 Facet Enterprises Inc. 1048 Industrial Park Road Fuel Devices Div. Bristol, VA 24201 80064 Naval Sea Systems Command Washington, DC 20362-5101 81349 Military Specifications promulgated by military departments/agencies under authority of defense standardization manual 41203-M 86184 Cla-Val Co. 17th and Placentia St. Costa Mesa, CA 92627

7-16 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-4. List of Manufacturers - Continued

CAGE Company Address 87229 R.G. Laurence Co., Inc. 29 Atwood Avenue P.O. Box 187 Tenafly, NJ 07670-3494 90005 Facet Enterprises, Inc. 8439 Triad Road Filter Products Div. Greensboro, NC 27409 91556 Emerson Electric Co. 407 W. Vine Street Brooks Instrument Div. Hatfield, PA 19440 92108 Semco Div. Products Research & Chemical Corp. 5454 San Fernando Road Glendale, CA 91203 98963 Wilkerson Corp. 1201 W. Mansfield Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 Iberia High Tech 3424 State Route 309 Iberia, OH 43325

Table 7-5. Shipping/Installation Fixture Parts List for SDRW-1 Required Quantity ARTICLE Received Quantity 2 Halves, Port and Starboard 1 Hinge Assembly 1 Tail Connector 153″-long, 4″ Angle 7 Pins - 2″ diameter 74″ O.D. x 2″ I.D. Washers 34″ O.D. x 2″ I.D. Spacers 4 Jacking Pads 42 1″,8UNCx3″-long Bolts 42 1″, 8 UNC Nuts 42 1″ Lock Washers 32 Butterﬂies 30 1-1/4″,7UNCx4″ - long Bolts 32 Bead Clamp Brackets (see below) 32 Bead Clamps 72 3/4″ 10 UNC x 2-1/4″-long Bolts 16 3/4″ 10 UNC x 2-1/2″-long Bolts 72 3/4″ 10 UNC x 3″-long Bolts 86 3/4″ 10 UNC Nuts 144 3/4″ Flat Washers 72 3/4″ Lock Washers 108 1/2″, 13 UNC x 1-3/4″-long Bolts 108 2-1/4″ O.D. x 9/16″ I.D. Washers 6 1-1/4″ diameter x 12-ton Shackles 2 1-1/2″, 6 UNC x 4-1/2″-long Bolts 2 1-1/2″, 6 UNC Nuts 2 1-1/2″ Lock Washers 8 3/4″ diameter x 5-ton Shackles 2 4S17 13-1, 3/4″ diameter wire Rope Slings (short) 2 4S17 13-2, 3/4″ diameter wire Rope Slings (long)

7-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 7-5. Shipping/Installation Fixture Parts List for SDRW-1 - Continued

Required Quantity ARTICLE Received Quantity 2 3/4″ Turnbuckles 2 C5A Loading Beams, 14’8″ and 16’5″ 2 20’ 8″-long, 2″ Angle Shipping Braces

7-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CHAPTER 8

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

8-1. INTRODUCTION.

8-1.1 GENERAL. This chapter provides information necessary to remove and install the sonar dome rubber window (SDRW-1 and SDRW-1A) and sonar dome pressurization systems (SDPS) on DDG 51 Class ships.

8-1.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE SDRW AND SDPS SYSTEMS. a. Removal of Rubber Window. b. Installation of the Rubber Window/Attachment Assembly: 1. Installation of bead seat castings. 2. Installation of rubber window. 3. Installation of fairing angles. 4. Installation of fairing closure plates. c. Installation of the Support Subsystems: 1. Air pressurization. 2. Water pressurization. 3. Electrical control/alarms. 4. Dome access. 5. Communication. d. Installation Checkout.

8-2. REMOVAL OF RUBBER WINDOW.

8-2.1 REMOVAL OF SDRW FAIRING CLOSURE PLATES AND ANGLES. a. Removal of Fairing Closure Plates.

WARNING

WHEN ARC-GOUGING, AN EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF SMOKE AND GASES WILL DEVELOP FROM THE VOID FILL FOAM. ALL CRAFT WORKERS SHOULD USE APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE MASKS. 1. The suggested method for removing the fairing plates is by arc-gouging. Start at the fairing angle weld seam and work up to within 2 inches of the shell seam weld. Care should be taken near the shell area to prevent unnecessary damage. Final trimming to the shell should be accomplished after the void ﬁll foam has been removed. (See Figure 8-1.)

8-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-1. Removing the Fairing Plates CAUTION

CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE THE BOLT HEADS THAT HOLD DOWN THE BEAD SEAT CLAMPS AND THE SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS THAT HOLD THE FAIRING ANGLE TO THE RUBBER WINDOW NUT PLATES. (SEE FIGURE 8-2.)

Figure 8-2. Bolt Head Critical Areas 2. When either the port or starboard fairing plates have been removed, the void ﬁll foam must be removed. It is suggested that pneumatic chipping guns be used with a variety of chisels. The arc-gougers should be removing the remaining fairing plates from the other side of the ship at the same time. b. Removal of Fairing Angle Sections. 1. The fairing angle socket head capscrews and the bead seat clamp bolts are locked into place with 1/8-inch- diameter CRES wire. A chipping gun and chisel are recommended for this operation to prevent damage to

8-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

the hardware that can be reused during reinstallation of the new rubber window. (See Figure 8-3.)

Figure 8-3. Lock Wire Removal 2. The fairing angle must be removed at locations where the installation/removal ﬁxture fairing adaptor plates are attached. The bolt holes to be used are the same used to secure the fairing angle. It is not necessary for all ﬁxture adaptor plates to be installed for window removals. However, if the window is to be shipped for repair, all adaptor plates and bead clamps should be installed after the window has been removed from the ship’s structure. The recommended adaptor plate locations for window removal are at radial frames 4, 7, 11, 15, 17, and 21, upper and lower, both port and starboard. Remove all fairing angle supports. (See Figure 8-1.)

8-2.2 PLACEMENT OF SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIXTURE.

NOTE

WHEN TWO FIXTURES ARE REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND REPLACE A WINDOW, ONE EMPTY FIXTURE, 2-PIECE, B.F. GOODRICH DRAWING NUMBER 7S1020, IS PLACED AROUND THE DAMAGED WINDOW. a. Install cables, shackles, and chainfall as shown in Figure 8-4. Rigging the fixture correctly is very important. The forward cables are attached with a shackle directly to the chainfall, and the chainfall is attached to the bottom of the fixture. The aft cables are rigged similarly; however, the cable must be ″snaked″ between the aft top frame and then attached to the chainfall. b. Raise the fixture approximately 1 foot, and spread the fixture a sufficient amount to clear the installed rubber window. Use a chainfall/come-along and cables on the lower side at the rear of the fixture to control the amount of spread. (See Figure 8-4.) c. Using a gantry, slowly move the fixture into position on the window. Slowly collapse the tail end of the fixture until the fixture is in the desired position. A chainfall on each of the two rear lift points provide precise control of fixture pitch and roll. Two 1-1/2-ton come-alongs connected to temporary padeyes, port and starboard of the ship, provide side-to-side control of the fixture. The rear post attachment points provide control along the longitudinal axis. (See Figure 8-4 as an example of how this can be accomplished.) For height adjustments, use four 8-ton hydraulic jacks placed beneath the four jacking pads on the fixture’s 10-inch beams.

8-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010 d. An alternate method for positioning the fixture would be in two halves. This would be accomplished by removing the pins at the centerline of the fixture and placing each half in position around the rubber window, then repinning the centerline of the fixture. All rigging of the fixture should then be added as discussed in paragraphs 8-2.2.a through 8-2.2.c.

8-2.3 REMOVAL OF BEAD CLAMPS AND BOLTS. All clamps, except for about every eighth clamp, may be removed prior to installing the adaptor plates. As the adaptor plates and ﬁxture are installed, the remaining clamps should be sequentially removed.

8-2.4 REMOVAL OF SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW. Check to verify that all rigging is properly attached. With tension on the gantry cables, spread the rear of the fixture with the window attached to approximately 17 feet 6 inches wide at the narrowest points between the upper beads. See Figure 8-4 for suggested fixture rigging method. Slowly move the fixture forward until it is clear of the structure. Care should be taken to avoid possible damage to the transducer elements that could occur without having strict control of the fixture.

8-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-4. Removal of Sonar Dome Rubber Window 8-2.5 STRUCTURE CLEANING REQUIREMENTS. Special attention should be taken to ensure that the bead seat cavity is completely free of foam chips, weld splatter, and so forth. In addition, the interior area of the bead seat may have portions of the secondary sealing system (PR 1422) still attached. The PR 1422 should be completely removed.

8-2.6 RECOMMENDED SDRW REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITHOUT A SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIX- TURE. a. The following procedure may be used for the removal of an SDRW without a shipping/installation ﬁxture. The equipment required (or the removal includes the spreaders, cable pendants, and chainfalls normally used for

8-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

the installation of a new SDRW. The only additional equipment necessary is two cable pendant chainfall assemblies made to the same length as the ones used for the new window installation. b. Following the removal of the closure plates, foam, and clamp bolt locking bars, remove clamps leaving every tenth one secured. Weld three padeyes and stiffener bars to the existing upper fairing angles at 10-foot intervals measured from the stem aft along both sides of the SDRW. Weld an additional padeye to the fairing angles in the tail section at the minus 4-foot baseline. (See Figure 8-5.) c. Rig the crane and spreader bars so that there are three pick points on each side of the ship. After hooking to the padeyes previously welded to the fairing angles, attach a chainfall between the two padeyes welded at the minus 4-foot baseline, running the tightened pendant beneath the ship. Temporarily shore the bottom of the SDRW under the maximum inboard areas below the last padeye welded to the upper fairing angles. Balance the load between the six lift points supporting the dome, and remove the remaining clamps beginning with the bottom. Always stand clear of the sonar dome when removing these last clamps. Certain areas along the lower bead seat may fall to the shoring when these ﬁnal clamps are removed. d. With all the clamps removed, slowly release the chainfall connecting the tail sections together. If the sonar dome does not spread open upon release of the pendant, it may be necessary to pull the tail sections outboard slightly with another chainfall. If this step is necessary, the pendant between the tail sections should be loos- ened enough to allow the sonar dome to spread open several feet. This is necessary to maintain control over the spread rate. e. After the sonar dome is free from the bead seat, walk the crane forward with the tail sections spread wide enough to eliminate any chance of interference with the transducer array. When the SDRW is removed from the ship, it should set down in such a manner that the welded padeyes are exposed in case it has to be moved again.

8-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-5. SDRW Removal Without a Shipping/Installation Fixture 8-3. CUTTING SDRW SAMPLES.

8-3.1 PARTS REQUIRED. The following is a list of recommended parts to be used in cutting the SDRW samples: a. Gasoline-powered rotary saw (e.g., Homelite XL-98). b. Steel cutting disk, 12-inch, with impregnated blade (e.g., Homelite 64597B).

8-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. Spare drive belts. d. Spare air ﬁlters. e. Blades with a particularly good endurance (e.g., Bergen and AEG Telefunken); the quantity varies depending on the quality of the blades.

8-3.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. a. The recommended sawing crew is two persons; one to man the saw, the other as a safety observer. At the time of each blade change, these personnel will rotate. b. Avoid inhaling NOFOUL vapors, mist, dust, or fumes. Dust from buffing operations may cause irritation of upper and lower respiratory tract and mucous membranes, nausea, headache, and eye and skin irritation. The use of adequate ventilation within the SDRW is recommended. A fan can be directed against the curvature of the SDRW to sweep most of the fumes away from the saw operator and out of the SDRW enclosure. c. Avoid direct bare skin contact with NOFOUL surfaces or dust. If hands have been exposed to the NOFOUL rubber material, avoid contact between hands and mouth, and hands and eyes. Wash hands thoroughly before eating or smoking.

WARNING

DUE TO SMALL PIECES OF WIRE BEING THROWN OFF DURING CUTTING, AND THE NEED TO AVOID CONTACT WITH NOFOUL, PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SHOULD BE WORN AT ALL TIMES. d. The following equipment and/or clothing is required to be worn at all times during the cutting procedure: 1. A chemical cartridge respirator, NIOSH approved, for an atmosphere containing organotins. Use an air- purifying cartridge for organic vapors and a HEPA ﬁlter, MSA, Comfo-Fit II respirator with a Type H ultra ﬁlter cartridge. 2. Goggles (with a full faceshield being the most desirable). 3. Head protection. 4. Long-sleeved shirt buttoned to the neck. 5. Long trousers. 6. Disposable vinyl gauntlet-type gloves. e. In addition, it is recommended that the occupational health and safety specialist be consulted to ensure that handling procedures will be adequate for required operations, and are in compliance with applicable laws and regulations.

8-3.3 EMERGENCY AND FIRST-AID PROCEDURES. a. Eyes Flush with plenty of water for 15 minutes, lifting eyelids occasionally; see a physician. b. Skin Remove contaminated clothing; wash area with plenty of soap and water. If irritation develops, see a physician. c. Inhalation Remove to fresh air. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. See a physician.

8-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

8-3.4 CUTTING PROCEDURES.

WARNING

PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE IN AN ISOLATED AREA ONLY. THOR- OUGH CLEANUP OF NOFOUL DUST IS REQUIRED. a. The SDRWs are best cut from the interior. Chalk marks are laid out and the cut preferably starts near the minus 4-foot baseline at the thinner portion of the SDRW wall. The saw is worked so as to make a groove with even cuts through approximately one ply of the wire at a time. The groove is then worked deeper and deeper through succeeding plies. As the beads are approached, the thickness of the fill rubber makes cutting with the disk somewhat difficult. A recommended procedure is to cut through the wire reinforcement with the saw, then to pry the crack apart with a wedge or bar and cut the fill rubber with a sturdy knife. b. In a bead-to-bead cut, the cutting would proceed from the minus 4-foot baseline upward and downward toward the bead area. Staging is required to allow the saw operator to reach the upper portions of the SDRW. The staging must have an overhang of several feet because of the concave curvature of the SDRW internal wall. When the entire wall of the SDRW is cut through on either side of the splice, cut the lower beads. This allows the cut section to sag toward the ground when the final cut is made through the upper bead. c. Usually, the part of the SDRW removed will be a bead-to-bead section at the bow, 3 feet to either side of the splice centerline. The piece cut out will have approximate dimensions of 6 feet wide x 9 feet long x 2-1/2 feet high, with an approximate weight of 2,000 pounds. A shipping container would have dimensions of 6 to 6-1/2 feet wide x 9-1/2 to 10 feet long x 2-1/2 feet high. It is recommended that the shipping box be constructed so that the SDRW piece can be loaded from one end using a forklift. The container should be mounted on skids for pallet use. The recommended wrap for cut pieces is either shipping foil or polyethylene to protect the piece from moisture. d. The SDRW piece should be placed in the crate with the convex surface (splice) upwards. Bracing is required to prevent the piece from sagging in the crate. For shipping information, contact NAVSEA Code 63J.

8-4. SONAR DOME RUBBER WINDOW DISPOSAL. SDRWs are classiﬁed by Defense Reutilization and Marketing Service (DRMS) as nonhazardous material. To arrange for disposal of scrap SDRWs, the repair activity should submit a DD 1348-1 form to the local Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office (DRMO) who will then contract for the removal and disposal of the discarded SDRWs. A sample DD 1348-1 form with known items included is shown in Figure 8-6. If the SDRW is sawed or buffed, the dust becomes hazardous during the cutting or buffing operation. Refer to paragraph 8-3.2 for safety precautions that apply during the cutting or buffing operation. B.F. Goodrich of Jacksonville, FL, will also provide disposal services (telephone 904-757-3660).

8-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1. Figure 8-6. Sample Form DD 1348-1

8-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

8-5. MEASUREMENT BEAD SEAT OFFSETS: METHOD 1.

8-5.1 BEAD SEAT HARDWARE MEASUREMENT. This section covers the measurement of the bead seat hardware for SDRW-1 sonar domes using a coordinate analyzing theodolite (CAT) system. (See Figure 8-7.) An alternate method of measurement is in Paragraph 8-6.

8-5.2 SHELTER & ENVIRONMENT. a. This section covers the facilities and environment required. These facility requirements must be accomplished prior to CAT measurements. b. A shelter (Figure 8-8) will be required over the dome module portion of the ship because CAT electronic equipment is sensitive to temperature changes. Shelter types vary considerably, climate being the principle governing factor. A tarpaulin, canvas or preferably white Herculite (allows improved visibility) are adequate

Figure 8-7. Measurement of the Bead Seat Hardware for SDRW-1

8-11 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-8. Dome Module Shelter in warm climates and during the summer months in the north. For CAT hardware checks during the winter, a sturdy plywood shelter is the preferred construction. Construction using a plywood roof with Herculite covered stud walls has been used successfully during northern springs and falls and warm climate rainy seasons; however, high winds (i.e., Santa Anas) can be severely damaging to this type construction. Sealing the shelter against the hull of the ship is always critical. The roof, therefore, must be watertight. For bow dome hardware measurement, a 42- x 52-foot area is required. c. During a CAT hardware check, there is to be no ﬁxed position staging; however, a portable electric lift or portable, rolling staging will be required for access to the upper bead seat. d. Good visibility is necessary for surveying of the hardware with a CAT system. Painting the interior of the shelter white or using white Herculite for canvas type shelters improves the lighting. Lighting should produce approximately 90 candies (per a photometer). As a rule of thumb, one should be able to read by the lighting. A115 VAC, 60 cycle, isolated circuit line will be necessary for the CAT system. e. During the winter, or seasons when the temperature goes down below 60 degrees, heating will be necessary.

8.5.3 MEASURING THE STATIONS, CHORDS, AND ANGLES. a. Because several instrument positions are required and grid templates are not used, control point targets are necessary. These adhesive targets allow alignment of instruments to the same coordinate system regardless of position. They also allow later alignment to the ship’s coordinate system after it has been established. Con- trol point targets must be installed on easily visible, rigid positions around the periphery of the sonar dome module. The visibility of these targets must be ensured from the anticipated theodolite positions. b. After control point targets are installed, the next step is to obtain a set of measurements to align the system

8-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

to the coordinate system of the ship and/or existing bead seat hardware. The desired references (ship centerline, centerline of transducer, baseline ﬂat, identiﬁable stations, and so forth) vary dependent upon available information.

Figure 8-9. Bead Seat Centerline Target Disk c. Place the 2-1/2-inch diameter disk (fabricated in accordance with Figure 8-9) in the bead seat at a station. Ensure that the disk ﬁts tightly into the bottom of the bead seat and squarely within it. If necessary, clamp the disk into the bead seat. Shoot the center of the disk and compare the measurement with the loft offsets for that station. d. When the station is satisfactorily located, record it and mark its location with a felt tip marker along the edge of the 2-1/2-inch diameter disk. e. After all stations have been measured, calculate the chord lengths and record them. Marginal or out of tolerance chords should be rechecked with chord calipers. With an angle indicator gage, measure the angle of the hardware and record the results. Angles are measured at each station in a plane normal to the centerline of bead, and are referenced to a horizontal plane. The angle at station 12 is an exception; it is on a horizontal plane and is measured referenced to the diagonal bulkhead.

8-5.4 PERIMETER CHECK. a. Bead seat length is measured by using two 100-foot measuring tapes around the outboard lip of the bead seat. For further instructions or alternate methods, contact NSWCCD Philadelphia Code 9244. b. Locate the centerline of ship. Using two 100-foot measuring tapes and two rolls of duct tape, start at stations 1 upper (centerline of ship) and tape them ﬂat against the outermost edge of the lip of the bead casting. c. In the tail section, starting at the smaller #3 bead clamp bolt holes, it will be necessary to twist the measur-

8-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

ing tape onto its edge to get around the tighter turns. (See Figure 8-10.) The perimeter measurement for each side will end at station 1 lower. The average of three readings will be used to establish the perimeter length.

Figure 8-10. Bead Lip Perimeter Measurement 8-5.5 OFFSET MEASUREMENT TOLERANCES. a. Refer to Table 8-1 for offset tolerances. Offsets are referenced to the following locations: 1. X - measurements are referenced to frame 14 (station 9), centerline of transducer for SDRW-1 Symmetric- to-loft and SDRW-1A Spliceless domes. 2. Y - measured from longitudinal,centerline of ship. 3. Z - measured from baseline ﬂat. 4. Attachment angle is the intersection of mounting surface and attach hardware in a plane perpendicular to the bead centerline and hardware surface as referenced from the horizontal.

Table 8-1. Offsets for SDRW-1 and -1A Bead Seats MEASUREMENT TOLERANCE X +/-1/8 inch Y at Station 9 +/-1/8 inch Y at Other Sta. +/-1/4 inch Z at Station 24 +/-1/8 inch Z at Other Sta. +/-1/4 inch Chord Length +1/16 inch-/4 inch Attach Angle +/-3 degrees Bead Lip Length 1,961 +/-1 in inches

8-14 Table 8-2. Symmetric-to-Loft SDRW-1 and Spliceless SDRW-1A Port Offsets S9165-AE-MMA-010 8-15 8-16 Table 8-3. Symmetric-to-Loft SDRW-1 and Spliceless SDRW-1A Stbd. Offsets S9165-AE-MMA-010 S9165-AE-MMA-010

8-5.6 REPORTING/RECORDING THE DATA. a. Record the measurement results in the appropriate form (Table 8-2 or 8-3). Calculate all the differences between loft and the X-Y-Z measurements, the chords, hardware angles, and bead seat lip perimeter. b. From the data generated determine the parameters that are out of tolerance and produce a hardware map highlighting the stations that must be moved (See Figure 8-11). Install station target at every station that must be relocated or installed.

Figure 8-11. 24 Station Map

8-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010

8-5.7 TARGET INSTALLATION. a. The shipyard must prepare precut lengths of 16-inch long sections of 3 to 4 inches wide angle iron for station targets. One piece will be required for each station that will be relocated/installed. b. The upper stations require the targets to be positioned on the hull above the bead seat hardware and the lower stations on the hull below the bead seat hardware. Position the angle iron targets 8 to 12 inches vertically away from the station mark with one leg of the angle centered and level horizontally over the station marks. (See Figure 8-14.) c. Use a level on the ﬂat horizontal surface of the angle to set it level in the X and Y directions. d. Use a plumb bob to center the horizontal leg of the angle iron over the station mark. e. Weld the angles to the hull with a 3/8-inch weld on one side of each leg. The targets must be attached so that they will not move, even if they are accidentally hit. All subsequent hardware movement and checks depend on the ﬁxed location of these targets.

8-5.8 SHOOTING THE STATION TARGETS. a. Shoot the station targets by locating the point on the target that has the loft X-Y offset for the hardware station. Mark this point with a center punch, and drill a 1/16 to 3/32-inch diameter hole through the target. This will provide a permanent X-Y offset location on the target. Calculate the distance from this point to the loft Z for this station. This distance will provide a measurement from the target to the centerline of bead loft off set. b. Repeat the above step for each station target installed.

8-5.9 CHECKING THE HARDWARE WITH THE STATION TARGET. a. The shipyard must fabricate bead seat centerline target disks to make measurements to the station targets while the hardware is being moved. (See Figure 8-9.)

8-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-12. Station Targets 1.

8-19 S9165-AE-MMA-010

b. All subsequent checks to move the hardware and/or recheck its position can now be accomplished with the established targets. c. To check the X and Y coordinates, use a plumb bob between the station target and a ″Pac-man″ disk in the hardware bead cavity. (See Figure 8-12.) When locating the disk in the bead cavity, disregard any previous station marks. Move the disk within the cavity to the best ﬁt to the station target. This will indicate how close the hardware is to the desired location. d. To check the Z coordinate, measure the vertical distance between the target and the horizonal/level surface of the notch in the ″Pac-man″ disk with a tape measure. (See Figure 8-12.) e. Angles are measured at each station in a plane normal to the centerline of bead and are referenced to a horizontal plane. The angle at the station located at the minus 4-foot baseline is an exception; it is on a horizontal plane and is measured referenced to the diagonal bulkhead. f. The hardware must be located within the loft offset tolerances for the X, the Y, and the Z. (Refer to Tables 8-2 and 8-3.)

8-5.10 CHECKING CHORDS.

a. In order to check the chords during the process of moving the hardware, the shipyard must fabricate a set of chord calipers. A set of chord calipers that must be fabricated to take the chord measurements is shown in Figure 8-13. b. Chords are calculated based upon the position in space of the upper and lower station forming the chord. Marginal and out of tolerance chords should be rechecked by measuring with a caliper as shown in Figure 8-13. c. Use the fabricated chord calipers to measure the chord lengths at the stations that are being moved. Make certain that the calipers are seated tightly into the bead seat. Lock the calipers with the wing nuts, and measure the chord length between the scribed lines on the calipers.

8-20 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-13. Cord Calipers 8-6. BEAD SEAT OFFSET MEASUREMENTS: METHOD 2. The methods of measurement for bead seat angles, bead seat length, and chords remain unchanged. The following is an alternate method of measuring bead seat offsets using optical theodolites and wooden offset templates. Other appropriate

8-21 S9165-AE-MMA-010 methods may be used at the discretion of the installing activity, providing all bead seat casting installation dimensional tolerances can be obtained. The attachment offsets are in Tables 8-2 and 8-3.

8-6.1 INSTALLATION MATERIALS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS. Refer to Table 8-4 for a summary of installation materials and Table 8-5 for the tools/equipment requirements list. The facility requirements remain unchanged.

Table 8-4. SDRW Summary List, Installation Material Qty Req. Description BFG Dwg. No. 26 Bead Seat Casting 5S2393 204 Bead Seat Clamp, Code 1 5S1852-1 134 Bead Seat Clamp, Code 2 5S1852-2 84 Bead Seat Clamp, Code 3 5S1852-3 84 Hex Head Bolts, Cres, 3/4-10 UNC-2A x 1-3/4-in. ----- 84 Washer, Flat, Round, Cres for 3/4-in. diameter bolt ----- 238 Hex Head Bolts, Cres, 1-1/4-UNC-2A x 1-3/4-in. ----- 238 Washer, Flat, Round, Cres, for 1-1/4-in. diameter bolt ----- 440LF Wire, 1/8-in. diameter, Cres ----- 104 Hex Head Capscrew, ZN CTD STL, 1/2-in. -13 UNC-2A x 2 in. ----- 104 Nut, ZN CTD STL, 1/2-in. -13UNC-38 ----- 104 Washer, Flat, Round, ZN CTD STL ----- 26.4-SF Plate, 20.4, OSS 16 LF Angle, 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/8-in., OSS ----- 10 LF 5 in. x 4 in. x 6:#:T ----- 4 LF Pipe, 2.375 in. OD X 0.154 in. well 1 SF 1/4-in. Plate, 9 in. diameter 1 SF 1/4-in. Plate, 3 in.x4in. 1 SF 3/4-in. Plate, 9 in. diameter 1 SF 3/4-in. Plate, 9 in. diameter 3 Stud, 1/2-in. -20 UNF 2A 6 Nut, Self-Locking, 1/2-in. 20 UNF 3B 6 Washer for 1/2 in bolt 16 3 in. x 1/4 in. FB, 18 in. long

8-22 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-14. Reference Plane Template (Starboard Shown)

Table 8-5. Tools/Equipment Requirement List Item Qty 1. Theodolites (normal accuracy +/-sec.) calibrated with close focus lens and 90-degree 2 eyepiece 2. Template 1

8-23 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 8-5. Tools/Equipment Requirement List - Continued

Item Qty 3. 2-1/2-inch diameter by 3/4-inch thick disk with a quarter section cut out 3 min. 4. Chord calipers As required 5. Shepherd’s hooks As required 6. 100-foot measuring tapes 2 7. 15-foot measuring tapes 3 8. Magnetic based protractor or angle indicator As required 9. Plumb bobs As required

8-6.2 GENERAL.

a. A full size loft template must be fabricated by the shipyard to serve as an upper reference plane during bead seat casting and bracket installation. b. All 24 stations (listed in Tables 8-2 and 8-3), as well as centerline ship and buttock lines 1 through 10, must be located on the underside of the template. c. The template (shown in Figure 8-14) can be fabricated from 1/2-inch thick plywood or other materials at the discretion of the installing activity.

NOTE

USE ESTABLISHED CONSTRUCTION REFERENCE LINES AND TABLES 8-2 AND 8-3 TO LOCATE STATIONS 1 THROUGH 24.

8-6.3 PRELIMINARY SETUP.

a. Install transit platforms to ship banjo structure as shown in Figure 8-15. b. Establish pitch and roll reference planes as follows: 1. Set the theodolite in a location so that the three approximate points are as shown in Figure 8-16. 2. Suspend three measuring tapes from these baseline points and adjust the theodolite (that has been locked in on vertical 90 degrees) by using the leveling screws until all tape readings are the same.

8-24 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-15. Theodolite Platform Location

8-25 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-16. Establishing Baseline Flat Reference Plane

3. Once this has been achieved, transfer this temporary line onto the dome structure with as many points as possible, so the theodolite can be set to the same plane on the opposite side of the ship. 4. From this plane, do a general survey of the existing bead seat casting at centerline ship (upper and lower), centerline baffle frame 26 (upper and lower), and the minus 4-foot baseline in the horseshoe area, port and starboard, to obtain offset readings. 5. After data has been collected, compare the readings to the original offsets at these locations. This information can be obtained from NAVSEA Code 63J if not in the work package. At this time, it may require that the horizontal plane be adjusted to better suit the original offsets and the ship structure.

8-26 S9165-AE-MMA-010

6. This line becomes the sonar dome reference plane (SDRP) and should be marked on the ship structure in as many locations as possible. 7. Place a theodolite on the forward stands that have been attached to the ship structure. (See Figure 8-15.) Normalize the theodolite scope to its base plate, and lock the scope barrel on vertical 90 degrees. Plane the theodolite into the SDRP by using jacking screws on the instrument stand (Figure 8-17). When this has been achieved, remove the theodolite and take roll and pitch inclination of the stand by means of a clinometer or equivalent instrument. This information will be needed to acquire the longitudinal centerline. 8. To establish centerline of dome, plumb down to a temporary platform (angle or other suitable member) from the centerline of bead seat at the minus 4-foot baseline, station 24, port and starboard. Adjust the plummet point and correct for error caused by roll of the dome structure, if any. The half-breadth of these two points can be determined/ checked by obtaining the original offsets if available. Where slight differences occur between the original offsets and the newly obtained offsets, an average may be taken. 9. To establish the second set of points, plumb down to another temporary platform from the upper bead at frame 14 (centerline transducer), port and starboard. Correct plummet point according to roll error taken off theodolite stand. The half-breadths of these two points can be determined by comparing the original bead seat offsets to the newly taken offsets and averaging. Double checks for human error should be made where compared differences are greater than 1/8-inch. 10. Once satisﬁed with the point locations, set the theodolites on the forward platform stands normal to the SDRP and parallel to the newly created line. 11. From this setup, survey predetermined points; port and starboard, to establish the centerline of sonar dome. This survey is taken to determine if an adjustment is needed to better suit the structure.

8-27 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-17. Instrument Stand

12. At this point, establish two known buttock lines (suggest 8 feet), one port and one starboard. The lines should be located on an angle iron bar attached to the sonar dome structure both forward and aft. The lines should be located outside of the working area and remain throughout the entire casting changeout for periodic reference checks. 13. Next, establish a transverse reference line at the centerline of the transducer. This can be accomplished by turning 90 degrees off the established buttock line and reading the centerline of bead seat at station 1, upper and lower. Com- pare these two readings to the original offset data and establish centerline of transducer. Mark location on the shell plating or other visible location at the baseline flat and banjo flat, port and starboard. 14. When confidence has been established that the reference lines are correct, mark and punch the location on the structure for future use. 15. Using the established reference lines, lay out the 24 stations on the upper and lower shell. This should be accom-

8-28 S9165-AE-MMA-010

plished at night, if possible, and after the ship reaches a constant temperature. At this time, the drydock floor can be used with absolute accuracy. This can be accomplished as follows: (a) From the theodolite stands (port and starboard), plane the theodolite into the SDRP. (b) Parallel the theodolite vertical crosshairs to the 8-foot buttock. (c) Transfer this buttock onto the drydock floor, and establish a 10-foot buttock and a centerline of the dome. (d) Turn the theodolite 90 degrees toward the ship, and take a tape reading from the transverse centerline of the transducer (station 9). (e) Project this line onto the drydock floor. (f) Establish two known (forward/aft) reference lines that can be used to lay out coordinate stations 1 through 24 as specified in Tables 8-2 and 8-3. (g) Along established transverse reference lines, lay out stations 1, 2, and 3, upper and lower. These stations are controlled by the “Y” dimension (transverse) in lieu of the “X“dimension (longitudinal) used for stations 4-24. (h) Along the buttocks, transverses, and centerline established, lay out stations 4 through 24, upper and lower. (i) Locate a leveling station at starting point, station 4, and set to roll and pitch plane previously established. See Figure 8-17 for suggested level station. (j) Set the normalized theodolite on top of the leveling station, and move the theodolite in a manner to make its line of sight correspond to the station layout on the dock floor. (k) Project this line onto the baseline flat and banjo flat, and extend onto the shell approximately 2 feet. This line should be clearly marked by punch or other suitable method. (l) Lay out remaining stations, port, starboard, upper, and lower, as described above.

8-6.4 REFERENCE PLANE TEMPLATE BRACKETS. Install reference plane template brackets as shown in Figure 8-18. The brackets must be placed 3 to 4 feet apart to provide adequate support for the template. Care must be taken to allow for thickness of the template when installing the brackets.

8-6.5 TEMPLATE INSTALLATION. After the reference plane template brackets have been installed and welded in place, locate and attach the template to the brackets using a suitable fastening system. Shims may be required between the template and brackets during ﬁnal alignment.

The template must be aligned into the ship coordinate system, as well as parallel to the sonar dome reference plane. Frequent monitoring of the template plane is essential.

8-6.6 INSTALL BEAD SEAT CASTINGS. Install bead seat castings with temporary welds. Check alignment of castings, make necessary corrections, and lay ﬁnal welds.

8-6.7 OBTAIN AND RECORD BEAD SEAT CASTING OFFSET DATA. After installation of the bead seat casting has been completely welded, the ﬁnal offsets can be taken as follows:

a. Lay out the location of each station (1 through 24). This can be accomplished most accurately by the plumb bob method, using the installed baseline template as the layout guide. b. Once the layout is complete, install the theodolite on the welded platform stands suspended from the banjo ﬂat.

8-29 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-18. Template Brackets c. Plane the theodolite into the SDRP, and record the instrument height. From this setup, take and record the below baseline ″Z″ dimensions. d. The ″Y″ dimensions for stations 1 through 3 were established when laying out the centerline of bead cavity locations. Take and record the ″X″ dimensions for stations 1 through 3 by dropping a plumb bob from the known forward reference line and measuring aft to the centerline of bead cavity.

NOTE

EACH TIME THE PLUMB BOB IS USED, CORRECTIONS FOR ERROR IN PLUM- MET CAUSED BY PITCH AND ROLL OF THE SHIP ON DOCK MUST BE COM- PENSATED FOR. e. The ″X″ dimensions for stations 4 through 24 were developed when laying out the centerline of bead cavity locations. Take and record the ″Y″ dimensions by dropping a plumb bob from the installed template layout. f. All ﬁnal coordinate data shall be recorded on the appropriate (Tables 8-2 and 8-3) and forwarded to NAVSEA Code 63J for permanent record.

8-7. BEAD SEAT CASTING INSTALLATION.

8-7.1 SCOPE. Two procedures are presented in this section. These procedures are provided as a guide to the installing activity. Other appropriate methods may be used at the discretion of the installing activity, provided all bead seat casting installation tolerances can be obtained.

8-7.2 GENERAL. This section provides information necessary to install bead seat castings for symmetric-to-loft or spliceless sonar dome rubber windows (SDRW-1 or SDRW-1A) with 26 (Figure 8-19) bead seat castings on DDG 51 Class ships. a. On retroﬁt:

8-30 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

THIS PROCEDURE ASSUMES THE RUBBER WINDOW, CLOSURE PLATES, AND VOID FOAM HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM THE SHIP. b. Two methods of bead seat handling and installation are presented. The ﬁrst utilizes a screw adjustable ﬁtting tool to align and trim the castings. The second method utilizes erection brackets to position the castings.

8-7.3 BEAD SEAT INSTALLATION: METHOD 1.

a. SDRW Hardware/Shipfitting Tool. The shipfitting tool depicted in Figure 8-20 is available as an aid to the shipfitting process during SDRW hardware installations, changeouts, and hardware relocations. The tool is designed to provide a support for each casting during the fitting, and to provide adjustability in any direction. b. Two tools are needed to support each piece of casting while the casting is being fitted, scribed, cut, tack welded, and braced off. After each casting is braced and tack welded, the tools may be removed and relocated for the fitting process on the next piece of casting. c. Tooling Requirement Example. Two tools are required for each team of ship fitters working separate casting locations at the same time. Two teams of fitters working two separate casting locations equals a need for four tools. Four teams on four castings would need eight tools, and so forth. d. Fitting and Cutting. Each piece of casting presents a different challenge to the ship fitters. Some castings may be offset in the ″X″ direction for scribing, and others may require an offset in the ″Y″ or ″Z″ direction. Often castings are offset in the ″XY″ direction. There are choices to make, and each choice can require a different procedure during the scribing process.

8-31 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-19. SDRW-1 & -1A Hardware Map

8-32 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-20. Bead Seat Fitting Tool e. Scribe and cut casting twice to avoid cutting a casting too short. Experience has shown that the shape of a casting may change during the cutting. The heat from the cutting torch sometimes stress relieves the castings and, in some cases, enough to effect a change in the ″XYZ″ offsets and the scribe fit of the casting. The safest procedure is to scribe and cut each casting about 1/2- to 1-inch long. Then refit, carefully checking each offset and angle before making the final cut. f. Using the Shipfitting Tools. 1. The shipfitting tools are designed to provide minor adjustments to a casting location. Therefore, it is important to locate each casting as near as possible to its proper location before trying to install the adjustable tools. Build the tools in place from the casting, rather than trying to locate the tools and then the casting. Locate the casting near its proper location, especially in the fwd/aft direction. 2. Determine the best location for each tool. In most cases, tools should be 6 to 18 inches from each end of the casting, depending on station locations. Do not install the tools or attachment brackets where they will interfere with station measurements. 3. Cut the angle irons which attach to the castings as depicted in Figure 8-21. This requires cutting one end with the proper attachment angle for the location. 4. Check fit the angle iron. The bottom of each should be within about 5 degrees of level when the cut side of the angle is placed against the casting, assuming the casting is somewhere near its proper angle. When the fit is right, weld the angle to the casting.

CAUTION

ENSURE CASTING HAS AN ADEQUATE GROUND BEFORE WELDING TO AVOID DAMAGE TO CHAINFALLS, AND SO FORTH. 5. Adjust the inboard/outboard adjustment of each tool, outboard a little more than the amount of material which is to be removed from the back side of the casting for ﬁnal ﬁt. Usually about 4 inches is adequate. 6. Screw the up/down adjustments to extend up about 1-1/2 to 2 inches above the top surface of the tools.

8-33 S9165-AE-MMA-010

7. Calculate the proper location and cut the elongated hole in the angles which are attached to the casting. 8. Place a shim over the tool and between the two extending screws, thick enough so that the tool can be clamped to the angle iron without rocking on the screws. 9. C-clamp the tool to the angle. 10. Cut and fit the angles which will support the tools. 11. Weld the attachment angles to the vertical chock or other support brackets as depicted in Figure 8-21. 12. Tack weld or C-clamp the tools to the support brackets. 13. Remove the shims, and the tools are ready for use. 14. Measure station offsets and adjust the casting to obtain equal offsets at each station. 15. Adjust a scribe to the delta difference of the offsets. 16. Scribe and cut the casting. 17. When the final fit is accomplished, tack weld the casting in place, install adequate braces or gussets, and then remove the tools for use at the next location.

8-34 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-21. Fitting Tool Installation

8-7.4 BEAD SEAT CASTING INSTALLATION: METHOD 2. a. This section applies to the installation of a symmetric-to-loft or spliceless sonar dome rubber window with 26 (vice 14) bead seat castings on DDG 51 Class ships. The procedure presented in this section (for bead seat casting installation)

8-35 S9165-AE-MMA-010

does not require the use of an installation platform. Of the steps listed below, only the installation of bead seat castings and the fairness and smoothness requirements are affected by this section. b. Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets. Erection brackets must be fabricated by the installing activity. Fabrication of bead seat casting erection brackets are shown in Figure 8-22 and Table 8-6.

Figure 8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 1 of 3)

8-36 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 2 of 3)

8-37 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-22. Speciﬁcations for Fabrication of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets (Sheet 3 of 3)

8-38 Table 8-6. Installation of Bead Seat Casting Erection Brackets BRACKET UPPER/ BRACKET NO. X DIM Y DIM Z DIM ANGLE 0 LOWER TYPE L H PART NO. BRKT CLIP 1 -128.88 12.00 -6.88 49 UPPER A 6-7/16″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 2 -108.69 59.00 -6.88 44 UPPER A 6-7/16″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 3 -64.00 93.71 -6.88 44 UPPER A 6-7/16″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 4 -36.00 100.78 -6.88 44 UPPER A 6-7/16″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 5 -12.00 102.02 -6.88 44 UPPER A 6-7/16″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 6 47.00 96.50 -6.88 43 UPPER A 6-5/8″ 5-1/4″ 01001 01002 7 71.00 90.69 -6.95 40 UPPER SIM A 7-13/ 5-3/8″ 01003 01004 32″ 8 132.00 71.23 -7.12 36 UPPER SIM A 9-9/16″ 5-9/16″ 01005 01006 9 144.00 66.98 -7.19 32 UPPER SIM A 9-29/ 5-9/16″ 01005 01006 32″ 10 204.00 46.80 -10.97 15 UPPER B 7-13/ 7-11/16″ 01007 01008 16″ 11 228.00 41.87 -14.94 11 UPPER SIM B 7-5/16″ 7-1/8″ 01009 01010 12 263.00 47.16 -24.30 12 UPPER SIM B 7-5/32″ 7-3/16″ 01011 01012 13 286.94 61.06 -48.00 15 UPPER C 5-1/2″ 4-3/4″ 01013 01014 14 275.00 53.22 -65.83 7 LOWER SIM E 6-29/ 6-5/8″ 01015 01016 32″ 15 263.00 46.44 -71.36 -6 LOWER SIM D 7-1/16″ 5-1/4″ 01017 01018 16 228.00 33.23 -79.63 -14 LOWER SIM D 7-7/16″ 4-5/16″ 01019 01020 17 204.00 28.95 -83.22 -14 LOWER SIM D 7-17/ 4-1/4″ 01019 01020 32″ 18 144.00 33.17 -90.94 -14 LOWER SIM D 7-19/ 4-1/4″ 01019 01020 32″ 19 119.00 41.58 -93.98 -12 LOWER D 7-7/16″ 4-1/2″ 01021 01022 20 71.00 72.47 -95.83 10 LOWER SIM E 7-9/16″ 7-1/16″ 01023 01024 21 60.00 80.83 -94.86 13 LOWER SIM E 7-7/32″ 7-5/16″ 01025 01026 22 12.00 97.93 -89.61 23 LOWER SIM E 6-31/ 8-7/16″ 01027 01028 ″ 32 S9165-AE-MMA-010 23 -12.00 97.91 -89.97 25 LOWER SIM E 7-1/32″ 8-11/16″ 01029 01030 24 -60.00 80.79 -96.34 23 LOWER SIM E 7-1/8″ 8-1/2″ 01031 01032 25 -82.72 59.00 -99.99 23 LOWER SIM E 7-7/32″ 8-1/2″ 01031 01032 26 -101.94 12.00 -102.65 23 LOWER E 7-5/32″ 8-1/2″ 01031 01032 8-39 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. Erection Brackets Installation. Erection brackets must be installed by the installing activity. Speciﬁcations and installation of the brackets are shown in Figure 8-22 and Table 8-6. The following general guidelines shall apply during bracket installation:

NOTE

CARE MUST BE TAKEN SO THAT SUPPORT BRACKETS DO NOT LAND ON STATION LAYOUTS. 1. Brackets shall be installed normal to the ship structure. 2. Centerline of bead (target point) shall be located as specified in Tables 8-2 and 8-3. 3. Weld brackets A and B (from Figure 8-22) to structure using 1-1 intermittent weld. 4. Movable brackets C and D (from Figure 8-22) shall be finite adjusted to required offsets and fasteners secured to maintain position. 5. The target point shall be painted with a 1/4-inch black dot and have a punchmark at the center. 6. After final alignment of the movable brackets and quality assurance verification, tack weld in position to prevent movement during casting installation. 7. ″X″ dimensions are from centerline transducer running fore and aft. ″Y″ dimensions are from centerline ship running athwartship. ″Z″ dimensions are from molded line of baseline flat running vertical. 8. Brackets and clips shall have applicable part number from Table 8-6 bead welded to its surface for identification. 9. Port and starboard brackets and clips are to be opposite hands. Part number shall indicate port or starboard.

8-7.5 WELDING OF BEAD SEAT CASTINGS. a. Weld bead seat sections to ship. Remove all restraint from bead seat assembly as soon as enough weld has been applied to support assembly.

CAUTION

DO NOT COMPLETE WELDING WITH BRACES IN PLACE. RESIDUAL STRESSES MAY CAUSE THE BEAD SEAT TO WARP OUT OF SHAPE AND OUT OF TOLERANCE. USE CONTROLLED WELDING PROCEDURES. PRE- VENT CONCENTRATED (LOCAL) WELDING. CHECK MEASUREMENTS PERIODICALLY TO ENSURE THAT BEAD SEAT ASSEMBLY IS CORRECTLY POSITIONED AND IS NOT MIGRATING OUT OF TOLERANCE. b. Dress all weld joints. c. Inspect bead seat cavity for smoothness, and dress as necessary. d. Measure and record ﬁnal X, Y, and Z planes, attachment angles, and chord lengths. e. While welding the bead seat, conduct interior dome work. At this time, all work on the interior of the dome must be completed prior to sonar dome installation. This work consists of the following: 1. Airlock construction. 2. Baffle assembly and damping tile installation. 3. Anode installation. 4. Pressurization system installation. 5. Airlock and trunk pressure testing.

8-40 S9165-AE-MMA-010

6. Underwater telephone transducer installation. 7. Sonar transducer element installation, continuity, and insulation resistance tests. 8. Painting of applicable surfaces. (Do not paint acoustic tile.) 9. Removal of all debris from the dome interior. f. Final Bead Seat Inspection. 1. The bead seat areas will be checked for preservation, soundness of welds, adequate clamp bolt thread depth (1-1/2 inches for 3/4-inch bolts and 1-13/16 inches depth for 1-1/4-inch bolts), and damages.

8-8. SONAR DOME INSTALLATION.

8-8.1 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT. Special equipment needed for SDRW system installation includes a shipping/installation (S/I) ﬁxture. Installation/interface drawings are listed in Tables 8-7 and 8-8. Tool, equipment, and facility requirements are provided in Tables 8-9 and 8-10.

a. Shipping/Installation Fixture (BFG Dwg. No. 7S1020 for SDRW-1 and -1A). The rubber window is shipped from the manufacturer to the shipyard mounted on a shipping/installation fixture. The fixture provides support and protection for the rubber window during shipping and handling. The fixture for SDRW-1 or SDRW-1A is illustrated in Figure 8-23.

8-41 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-23. Rubber Window Shown in Shipping Fixture

Table 8-7. Data List - SDRW-1 Item BFG Dwg. No. Title 01 5S2393** Bead Seat Assy. 551578 Bead Seat Assy. - Lower 02 551579 Bead Seat Assy. - Lower 03 5S1580 Bead Seat Assy. - Lower 04 5S1581 Bead Seat Assy. - Tail Section 05 551582 Bead Seat Assy. - Upper 06 5S1583 Bead Seat Assy. - Upper 07 551584 Bead Seat Assy. - Upper 08 5S2542 Fairing Angle Sections 09 6S1087 Loft 10 7S1020 Shipping/Installation Fixture

**SDRW-1A only.

8-42 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 8-8. Drawing List - SDRW-1 and SDRW-1A BFG Dwg. No. Description 6S1086 Rubber Window System (as of 1-31-88) 5S2545 Symmetric to Loft SDRW-1 5S2556 Spliceless SDRW-1A

Table 8-9. Tools/Equipment Requirements List Item Quantity 1. Pneumatic chipping gun 1 2. Pneumatic scaling gun 1 3. Chisels for pneumatic guns Assorted 4. Arc-gouging assembly 1 5. 70’ steel cable slings with minimum 10,000-pound lift capacity 4 6. 18’ spreader bars capable of 40,000-pound lifts (fixture rotation) 2 7. Shackles capable of supporting 20,000-pound lifts 8 8. Shackles capable of supporting 50,000-pound lifts 4 9. 41’ spreader bar, capable of a 40,000-pound lift (USN-02-4-008) 1 minimum 10. Steel cable slings, minimum 12’ length and 20,000-pound lift capacity 4 (fixture rotation) 11. Shackles capable of supporting 12,000-pound lifts 10 12. Shackles capable of supporting 3,000-pound lifts 10 13. 6-ton chainfalls 4 14. 1-1/2-ton come-alongs 5 15. Expandable post jacks, 8’ long 4 16. 8-ton hydraulic floor jacks 4 17. SDRW shipping/installation fixture (USN-03-6-139) 1 18. Portable grinders 4″ to 7″ pneumatic (speed 6, 000 rotations per minute As required maximum) 19. Impact wrenches As required 20. Special sockets for 1-1/4″ clamp bolts (USN-03-9-105) As required 21. Allen wrench or socket for 1/2″ socket head capscrews, fairing angles 1 22. Torque wrenches capable of applying torques at 50, 144, and 475 foot- As required pounds, respectively 23. 100’ measuring tape 2 24. Feeler gage set up to 1/4″ 1 25. Wooden battens for fairness checks of the dome window and required As required shell plating area 12″ x 3/16″ x 3/16″ where dome precludes use of longer batten 26. Wooden battens for fairness checks of the dome window and required As required shell plating area 24″ x 3/16″ x 3/16″ 27. Wooden battens for fairness checks of the dome window and required As required shell plating area 36″ x 1/4″ x 1/4″ 28. Miscellaneous slings 6’ and 8’ long with 3,000-pound capacity As required 29. 25’ x 1/2″ manila or nylon guide ropes 4 30. Paint trays As required 31. Paint roller handles As required 32. Paint roller shells (medium nap) As required 33. Hypodermic needles (1-1/2″ x 20 gage) As required 34. Marking pencils (yellow) or chalk As required

8-43 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 8-9. Tools/Equipment Requirements List - Continued

Item Quantity 35. Grinding disks (50 to 80 grit) As required 36. Clean, disposable, lint-free rags As required 37. Clear polyethylene ﬁlm (used during rubber application and as a cover As required for the cementing tables) 38. Bear-Tex buffing pads As required 39. Microinch smoothness comparator As required 40. 4″ x12″ steel (WAO 12, 3/8″ plate) panels 8 41. Putty knives (1-1/2″ and 3″) As required 42. 8″ wide polyester window support straps (USN-03-09-103) 3

Table 8-10. Facility Requirements List Item Quantity 1. Marking table (wood) approximately 4’ x 8’ As required 2. Electrical power outlet, explosion-proof wiring As required 3. Compressed air outlets, air manifold, 1-1/2″ air lines, and IPT pipe fittings As required 4. Portable explosion-proof lighting (fluorescent) sufficient to illuminate the immediate work As required surface to a minimum of 80 foot-candles shall be available and utilized during application and buffing of antifouling rubber. The illumination shall be measured using a portable photometer at a distance of 6″ from the work surface. 5. An environmental control shelter equipped with dehumidifiers and heater/air conditioner As required units capable of maintaining the temperature between 60° and 85° F and the relative humidity at least five units below the temperature 6. White, fire-resistant plastic shroud 7. Gantry-type cranes (two to rotate shipping fixtures; one to install rubber window) 2 8. Lightweight scaffolding around SDRW As required 9. Eye and hand wash facilities to be located in immediate vicinity of the sonar dome As required 10. Air motor, variable speed, 3/8″ capacity chuck 1 11. Drydock (Refer to paragraph 8-13 for minimum requirements.) As required b. The bead seat shall be properly preserved prior to installation of the SDRW.

8-8.2 IMPORTANCE OF PROPER INSTALLATION. a. The importance of the sonar dome rubber window installation cannot be overemphasized. All personnel should be aware that proper installation of the rubber window is instrumental to the accuracy, range, and overall performance of the sonar system. The rubber window acts as an aperture through which the sonar signals are sent and received in target searches performed in antisubmarine warfare. The rubber window must be free of flaws on the outside surface. The inside surface will be marked from wires, thermocouples, and stock used during the manufacturing cure cycle. Any flaw or defect is harmful to the purity of the transmitted and received sonar signals and causes range and accuracy degradation. b. Careful inspections will be made to ensure that no shipping damage, gouges, air pockets, blisters, voids, wrinkles, or other disfiguring conditions exist before, during, or after the sonar dome rubber window installation.

8-8.3 INSTALLATION WITH A SHIPPING/INSTALLATION FIXTURE (BFG 7S1020).

8-44 S9165-AE-MMA-010 a. Several supports are required during shipment. They consist of two I-beams and two supports across the aft end of the fixture. Each of these supports must be removed before the window can be spread. Remove two tail brackets and two shipping I-beams (Figure 8-24). b. Located at each upright and attached to the window are combination fairing adapters (butterflies) and clamp assemblies. Remove all clamp assemblies (shipping clamps and clamp brackets). c. Remove the first four lower adaptor plates at and forward of upright #11 (90 and 270 degrees), port and starboard. This step should be accomplished 24 hours prior to installing the SDRW. This will allow the lower bead to sag and, in turn, increase the distance between the upper and lower beads at the centerline of ship, making for an easier installation.

NOTE

THE SDRW IS SHIPPED WITH THE FIRST TWO (2) (FORWARD LOWER PORT AND STARBOARD) ADAPTOR PLATES REMOVED. REMOVAL OF THE CLAMPS AND ADAPTORS PERMITS THE BEAD TO SAG AND THE SDRW TO OPEN WITHOUT WRINKLING.

Do not remove any other adaptor plates. Windows are sometimes shipped without the two forward upper fairing plates and clamps in position. This can cause problems during installation in that, as the window is spread, the upper bead will ″fall″ and will cause bead seating problems at the forward end during installation. To prevent this problem, install fairing plates at the two upper points prior to spreading.

Figure 8-24. Installation with a Shipping/Installation Fixture (BFG 7S1020)

8-45 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-25. SDRW Fixture Opened to 17’6″ d. Adjust the remaining butterﬂies to make the chord distance between the upper and lower beads at each station as large as possible without distorting the nut plates of the SDRW.

CAUTION

DO NOT REMOVE ANY S/I FIXTURE HINGE PINS PRIOR TO INSTALLA- TION. THE SDRW AND S/I FIXTURE WILL OPEN TO THE DESIRED 17 FEET 6 INCHES (PER FIGURE 8-25) WITH ALL HINGE PINS IN PLACE. SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE FIXTURE AND SDRW CAN OCCUR IF THE PINS ARE REMOVED.

8-8.4 RIGGING OF THE S/I FIXTURE.

a. Prior to rigging, cut 3/4-inch plywood to fit the top of the S/I fixture from RF-11 to RF-20. Secure this working platform with banding straps. Cut holes in the plywood where aft rigging cables come through fixture. Install temporary safety rails around the top of the fixture. b. Rigging the S/I fixture for installation is important, as the fixture can be lifted in only one manner. The forward cables are to be connected directly to the shackles. The aft cables must pass between the frame and then attach to the aft shackles. (See Figure 8-26.) If the installation fixture is not hoisted in this manner, the aft top end will rotate inboard, preventing a smooth installation.

8-46 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-26. Rigging the S/I Fixture

CAUTION

DO NOT ATTACH A CLEVIS, CABLES, OR CHAINFALLS TO THE AFT FRAME MOUNTING HOLES. THE HOLES ARE DESIGNED FOR MOUNTING THE AFT SHIPPING BRACKETS. 1. Chainfalls must be attached between the four lifting cables and the shackles to provide up/down adjustments at each of the four corners of the S/I ﬁxture.

NOTE

TOTAL WEIGHT OF THE S/I FIXTURE WITH A SDRW ATTACHED IS 42,000 POUNDS. (SEE FIGURE 8-26.) 2. Raise fixture/window approximately 1 foot. Open the S/I fixture tail such that the shortest distance between the upper port and upper starboard bead is 17 feet 6 inches. This distance should be measured perpendicular to the centerline of the SDRW. As the fixture is being opened, check the upper center nut plates and butterflies for excess strain. Remove the butterfly if the strain appears excessive. 3. Lock the S/I fixture into this position. This can be done by attaching a 4-inch angle (25 feet long) between the two S/I fixture halves near the bottom. Tack weld the angle to the fixture. The fixture can also be locked by attaching a come-along between the port upright #1 and the starboard upright #1 near the lower hinge. This will prevent the hinge from operating.

8-8.5 MOVING THE FIXTURE INTO POSITION. a. Lift the fixture so that the lower bead (near the thickest section) will pass below the banjo. At the proper position, the upper bead should be at approximately the minus 4-foot baseline at the transducers. b. Move the fixture in around the transducer until the SDRW bead at centerline is within 5 feet of the transducer. Raise the S/I fixture so that the upper bead is just above the upper bead seat.

8-47 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

DO NOT HIT THE TRANSDUCER ELEMENTS OR THE BAFFLE WHILE POSITIONING THE WINDOW. c. At this time, attach two chainfalls to the aft end of the ﬁxture, crossing each other and attached to a keel block. (See Figure 8-27.) This will allow the ﬁxture to be pulled aft and rotate slightly.

Figure 8-27. Moving the Fixture into Position d. Remove the angle or come-along used in step c.

CAUTION

THE S/I FIXTURE TAIL SECTIONS WILL MOVE INBOARD; DO NOT HIT THE BAFFLE PLATE. e. Attach a come-along between the two sides of the S/I ﬁxture to pull the tail sections together. (See Figure 8-27.) f. Continue closing the tail section and moving the S/I ﬁxture aft until the curvature for the upper bead is similar to the bead seat curvature. Do not seat the bead until the following are achieved: 1. Use straight liquid soap (or BFG approved lubricant) to lubricate the bead seat and SDRW bead surfaces. 2. Check the relationship between the lower bead and the lower bead seat. If any adjustments can be made to help seat the lower bead without jeopardizing the upper bead, make them.

8-48 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

DO NOT PERMIT THE LOWER BEAD TO RIDE ON TOP OF THE CASTINGS. WOODEN WEDGES CAN BE USED TO ASSIST IN PREVENTING THIS. IF IT DOES OCCUR, THE BEAD MUST BE FORCED DOWN AROUND THE SEAT BY USE OF HYDRAULIC ″JAWS″ OR JACKS, OR, WITH CAUTION, USE OF A PRYING DEVICE. USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE RUBBER BEAD.

8-8.6 INSTALLING THE BEAD AT UPPER CENTERLINE.

a. The bead seat is 163 feet long, and the bead must be installed in sections. Each section is installed in a particular order. The following is a breakdown of the bead sections and order of installation. Clamp each section into position before starting on the next section. See Figure 8-28 for sequence summary. (1) Move the SDRW aft and seat the forward upper bead in the bead seat at the centerline of the ship, aligning the centerline of window with centerline of ship on bead seat hardware. Place four clamps on either side of the centerline of the ship upper bead, and tighten to prevent movement of the bead.

NOTE

USE MIL-A-907 ANTISEIZE COMPOUND ON THREADS OF ALL BOLTS. (2) Install at least every ﬁfth clamp into position from centerline of ship to centerline of transducer, both port and starboard. (3) As the clamps are installed and a fairing plate adaptor is approached, remove the fairing adaptor plates. This will prevent nut plate damage in the window. This procedure applies to the installation of all clamps.

CAUTION

WHILE INSTALLING CLAMPS, REMOVAL OF FAIRING ADAPTOR PLATES IS ESSENTIAL. USING THIS PROCEDURE WILL PREVENT DANGEROUSLY HIGH LOCAL STRESSES. EXCESSIVE STRESSES APPLIED TO THE WIN- DOW VIA THE FAIRING ADAPTOR PLATES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAM- AGE TO THE RUBBER. SEE FIGURES 8-29 AND 8-30 FOR EXAMPLES OF INCORRECT AND CORRECT APPLICATION OF FORCE.

8-49 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-28. Clamping Sequence

8-50 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-29. Incorrect Method of Applying Force

Figure 8-30. Correct Method of Applying Force

8-8.7 INSTALLING THE LOWER BEAD AT CENTERLINE. a. If any of the lower bead is resting on top of the lower bead seat hardware, do not install any clamps. b. The lower bead can be seated by manipulating the S/I ﬁxture. When the tail section of the S/I ﬁxture is lowered, the lower bead at centerline moves forward and up.

8-51 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. When the tail of the S/I ﬁxture halves are pulled together, the lower bead at centerline will lower. d. When the lower bead has slipped down onto the lip of the bead seat hardware, lift the S/I ﬁxture tail. The lower bead should seat.

NOTE

USE PLENTY OF SOAP TO LUBRICATE THE SURFACES. e. Verify that the centerline of the window coincides with the centerline of the ship at the lower-forward position. Clamp the centerline area with four clamps on either side of the centerline. f. Progressively install at least every ﬁfth clamp from centerline of ship to centerline of transducer, both port and starboard. Use MIL-A-907 antiseize compound on threads of all bolts. g. Remove fairing adaptor plates as each section is clamped.

8-8.8 INSTALLING THE BEAD IN THE TAIL SECTIONS. a. Pull the S/I ﬁxture’s tail together and seat the tail sections.

NOTE

USE PLENTY OF SOAP TO LUBRICATE THE SURFACES. b. When the S/I ﬁxture’s tails are drawn together and the bead at the minus 4-foot baseline is clamped in place, the outward rigging component will hold the aft upper bead away from the bead seat. In order to seat this section of bead, the aft end of the S/I ﬁxture will need to be pulled inboard at the top. This can be achieved by welding a padeye to the hull of the ship and using a chainfall.

NOTE

RELEASE THE CHAINFALL USED TO PULL THE TAILS TOGETHER. A second method would be to ″shore up″ the S/I fixture and rerig the aft cables and chainfalls so they are on the outside of the fixture. When the fixture is hoisted, the aft upper section will be allowed to ″roll over″ into the bead seat. A third method would be to position a forklift at the aft end of the S/I fixture and lift with the forks. This allows the fixture and upper bead to rotate inboard. c. If the bead cable minus 4-foot baseline index does not align with the bead seat hardware at the minus 4-foot baseline, adjust the S/I either forward or aft before trying to seat the bead. d. Align the minus 4-foot baseline of the SDRW with the minus 4-foot baseline of the bead seat, and install all the small (2-1/2-inch) clamps. e. Seat the upper bead from the tail section to the centerline of transducer, both port and starboard. 1. Use plenty of soap to lubricate the surfaces. 2. Install at least every fifth clamp. f. Seat the lower bead from the tail section to the centerline of transducer, both port and starboard. 1. Ensure all butterfly plates have been removed from the top. 2. Pull the S/I fixture’s tail together and lift the lower bead into the bead seat hardware. 3. Install at least every fifth clamp.

8-8.9 REMOVING AND TRANSPORTING THE S/I FIXTURE. a. Removing the S/I Fixture. 1. Check to ensure that all butterﬂy plates have been removed. 2. Ensure that at least every ﬁfth clamp has been installed around the entire bead.

8-52 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3. Open the tail section of the fixture with a chainfall/come-along. 4. Reinstall the angle iron brace to hold the fixture open. An alternative is to use a come-along between the port upright no. 1 and the starboard upright no. 1 near the lower hinge to lock the S/I fixture into the open position. 5. Remove the plywood working platform and safety rails from the S/I fixture. 6. Remove any chainfalls used to manipulate the fixture.

NOTE

DO NOT REMOVE THE CHAINFALL/COME-ALONG BETWEEN THE TWO AFT SIDES OF THE FIXTURE UNTIL AFTER ALL BUTTERFLIES HAVE BEEN REMOVED. THE FIXTURE CAN SPRING OPEN! b. After use, the shipping fixture must be shipped to a refurbishment facility. 1. Conduct an inventory of S/I fixture parts as listed in Table 8-11. The shipping installation fixture is to be shipped back to a NAVSEA-designated supplier, and should be complete in accordance with the parts list. 2. The fixture can be removed in halves. (See Figures 8-31 and 8-32.) Each half must be shipped on a flatbed truck. (See Figure 8-33.)

Table 8-11. S/I Fixture Inventory Required Quantity Article Received Quantity 2 Halves, Port and Starboard 1 Hinge Assembly 1 Tail Connector 153″ Long, 4″ Angle 7 Pins, 2″ Diameter 74″ O.D. x 2″ I.D. Washers 34″ O.D. x 2″ I.D. Spacers 4 Jacking Pads 42 1″,8UNCx3″ Long Bolts XXXXXXX 42 1″, 8 UNC Nuts 34 ″Butterﬂy, ″ Adaptor Plates 32 1-1/4″, 7 UNC x 4-1/2″ Long Bolts 32 Bead Clamp Brackets 32 Bead Clamps 72 3/4″, 10 UNC x 2-1/4″ Long Bolts 16 3/4″, 10 UNC x 2-1/2″ Long Bolts 72 3/4″,10UNCx3″ Long Bolts 86 3/4″, 10 UNC Nuts 144 3/4″ Flat Washers 72 3/4″ Lockwashers 108 1/2″, 13 UNC x 1-3/4″ Long Bolts 108 2-1/4″ O.D. x 9/16″ I.D. Washers 6 1-1/4″ Dia. x 12 Ton Shackles 2 1-1/2″, 6 UNC x 4-1/2″ Long Bolts 2 1-1/2″, 6 UNC Nuts 2 1-1/2″ Lockwashers 8 3/4″ Dia. x 5 Ton Shackles 2 4S1713-1 3/4″ Dia. Rope Slings (Short) 2 4S1713-2 3/4″ Dia. Rope Slings (Long) 2 3/4″ Turnbuckles

8-53 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 8-11. S/I Fixture Inventory - Continued

Required Quantity Article Received Quantity 2 C5A Loading Beams, 14’8″ and 16’5″ 2 20’8″ Long, 2″ Angle Shipping Braces

8-54 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-31. Removing Shipping Fixture from a Ship

8-55 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-32. Removing Shipping Fixture from a Ship

8-56 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-33. Load Instructions for Returning S/I Fixture Halves

8-8.10 INSTALLING AND TORQUING THE BEAD CLAMP BOLTS. a. Install staging around the sonar dome to access the placement of the window on the bead seat.

8-57 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1. Verify and document that the minus 4-foot baseline of the window is coincident with the minus 4-foot baseline of the bead seat hardware at the diagonal bulkhead. 2. Verify and document that the centerlines of the window upper and lower beads, forward, are aligned at the stem and banjo. 3. Verify that the bead is uniformly distributed around the perimeter, and that there is no local kinking or bulging of the bead away from the seat. If a bulge occurs, the bead may be more evenly distributed around the perimeter by loosen- ing the clamps over the bulge and ″snaking″ the bead to another area. b. Install all remaining clamps with the bolts ﬁnger tightened. Use MIL-A-907 antiseize compound on threads of all bolts. Loosen all clamps that are torqued down with the exception of the clamps at centerline of ship and the minus 4-foot baseline.

NOTE

CLAMPS MUST BE LOOSE ENOUGH TO PERMIT THE BEAD TO SLIP ALONG THE BEAD SEAT AND DISTRIBUTE ITSELF EVENLY. DO NOT LOOSEN THE CENTERLINE AND MINUS 4-FOOT BASELINE MARKS IF PROPERLY ALIGNED. c. Initial Bead Clamp Bolting Torque 1. Torque every 1-1/4-inch bolt to 100 foot-pounds. 2. Torque the 3/4-inch bolts to 50 foot-pounds. d. Preliminary Air Test and Final Torquing. Perform preliminary air test of window to check seal of bead area and stop leaks.

NOTE

USE A CALIBRATED 0 TO 25 PSIG TEST GAGE TO SENSE DOME PRESSURE FOR INCREASES AND DECREASES IN PRESSURE. 1. Verify that all baseline flat pressure plate penetrations, stuffing tubes, valves, diagonal bulkhead penetrations, hatches, and airlock valve penetrations are closed or tight. 2. Using an accessible baseline flat pressure plate penetration, provide air to dome and inflate to 5.0 psig.

WARNING

TO PRECLUDE INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE SDRW, THE APPLICATION OF INTERNAL PRESSURE TO THE SDRW WITHOUT ALL BEAD CLAMPS IN PLACE IS PROHIBITED. 3. With the 1-1/4-inch bolts torqued to 100 foot-pounds and the 3/4-inch bolts torqued to 50 foot-pounds, respectively, one can expect to ﬁnd numerous leaks. Either apply a soap solution or listen for air leaks. One may ﬁnd it difficult to obtain 5 psig. Tighten clamps over the leaks just enough to stop the leak. The purpose of the initial torque/pressurization phase is to allow the SDRW bead to rotate within the bead seat. 4. Raise air pressure to 10 psig and repeat step 3. 5. Raise air pressure to 15 psig and repeat step 3. 6. Maintain air pressure at 15 psig and proceed with the torque procedure. 7. Torque every eighth 1-1/4-inch bolt to 475 foot-pounds; then torque the middle bolt between those already torqued. Do not over torque. 8. Using the torque pattern of Figure 8-37, continue splitting the difference until all of the 1-1/4-inch bolts are torqued.

8-58 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-34. Torque Pattern

Bolt Size Initial Torque Final Torque 1-1/4 inch 100 foot-pounds 475 foot-pounds 3/4 inch 50 foot-pounds 144 foot-pounds 9. Torque the 3/4-inch bolts to 144 foot-pounds using the same pattern as for the 1-1/4-inch bolts. Do not over torque. 10. Apply soap solution around bead seat/clamp perimeter, bead seat hardware welds, airlock structure, diagonal bulkhead, and baseline ﬂat pressure plate; check for leaks.

8-8.11 LEAKS DURING THE SOAP & AIR TEST.

a. If leaks are found in the bead seat hardware welds, depressurize, backgouge, and reweld. b. If leaks are found around stuffing tubes, in hatch seals, or in pressure plate penetrations, they should be corrected at this time. c. If leaks are discovered in the bead area and all clamps are correctly torqued, then use the following procedure to stop the leaks: 1. Depressurize the dome. 2. Remove bolts in leak area, then replace and retorque them. If the results are still unsatisfactory, proceed with step 3 through step 5. 3. Remove clamps covering leak area and 5 to 10 clamps on either side of the leak area (Figure 8-35). 4. Insert a 5-inch wide, 0.080 thick section of neoprene rubber, 1 foot longer than the leak area, between the bead and bead seat, not between the bead and clamp (Figure 8-36).

8-59 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-35. Leaks During the Soap & Air Test

5. Replace clamps, and torque bolts to prescribed value.

Figure 8-36. Stopping Leak Around Bead

8-8.12 LEAKS OR RUBBER REPAIRS AT THE SDRW BEAD COUPLINGS. a. Located at the centerline of both upper and lower beads of the SDRW (Figure 8-37) is a steel coupling that couples the port and starboard cables of the bead together.

8-60 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN THAT ALL CLAMPS ARE PROPERLY IN PLACE BEFORE PRESSURIZING, OR WHILE THE SDRW IS PRESSURIZED. IT IS POSSIBLE TO INFLICT CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE TO THE SDRW IF THE CLAMPS ARE NOT INSTALLED. b. Procedure for Lifting SDRW Bead from Bead Seat. Should it become necessary to lift or shift the SDRW bead away from the bead seat for repair (or during removal for replacement) of the SDRW, the recommended procedure for the different conditions is as follows: 1. Condition 1. Upper centerline bead in the coupler area to be lifted. (a) Conﬁrm that the SDRW is depressurized. (b) Remove a minimum of 36 clamps from port and starboard sides of the upper centerline (total 72), but leave every tenth clamp loose, in place.

8-61 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-37. Coupling Area 1.

8-62 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

DO NOT APPLY JACK PRESSURE DIRECTLY AGAINST THE COUPLING AREA (SEE FIGURE 8-37). POSITION JACKS 12 INCHES AWAY, PORT AND STAR- BOARD, FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE SDRW. (c) The bead can be jacked out of the bead seat from the inside (Figure 8-38). Position jacks between the banjo and 12 inches on either side of the uppermost part of the centerline of the SDRW. Run the jacks up together.

Figure 8-38. Jacking the Bead out of the Bead Seat

(d) If the bead is to be repaired in place, the bead should be raised no further than it takes to slide a thickness of 0.080-gage NOFOUL rubber between the bead and bead seat from outside of the SDRW. After the 0.080-gage NOFOUL is properly inserted in place, be careful not to crease the sheet rubber; release the jacks together. Rein- stall all clamps and continue the repair in accordance with proper procedures. 2. Condition 2. Upper bead other than in the coupling area to be lifted. (a) Conﬁrm that the SDRW is depressurized. (b) Remove a minimum of 15 clamps from the vicinity of the bead to be lifted.

8-63 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(c) The bead can be jacked out of the bead seat from the inside (Figure 8-38). Position a minimum of three jacks between the banjo and the uppermost part of the SDRW. Ensure that no jack is placed within 12 inches of the centerline. Run the jacks up together. (d) If the bead is to be repaired in place, the bead should be raised no further than it takes to slide a thickness of 0.080-gage NOFOUL rubber between the bead and bead seat from the outside of the SDRW. After the 0.080-gage NOFOUL is properly inserted in place, be careful not to crease the sheet rubber; release the jacks together. Rein- stall all clamps, and continue the repair in accordance with proper procedure. 3. Condition 3. Lower bead to be lifted. (a) Conﬁrm that the SDRW is depressurized. (b) In most cases, the lower bead will drop away from the bead seat by removing the clamps. If the lower bead is tight against the bead seat, use a similar jacking procedure on the lower bead to the procedure given for Condi- tion 1 or 2 on the upper bead (Figures 8-37 and 8-38).

8-8.13 EXTERNAL SURFACE WAVINESS TEST. a. Perform preliminary surface waviness measurements with a flexible batten (wood) and feeler gage with 15 psig of air in the dome. Dome pressure must be maintained at 14 (+/-1) psig throughout this test. If severe wrinkling occurs during the air test, further testing will be terminated and NAVSEA must be contacted for evaluation. b. Surface waviness measurements (vertical and horizontal), both forward and aft of the transducer centerline, shall be made along the minus 4-foot baseline, a baseline midway between the minus 4-foot baseline and the upper rubber line, and a baseline midway between the minus 4-foot baseline and the lower rubber line. The interface between the rubber and steel shall also be checked. See Figure 8-50 for complete fairness inspection requirements by location. During the preliminary test, estimate the rubber fairing material requirements for the rubber final finish. c. From frame 14 to frame 26 (extending 1 foot above baseline flat to the bottom of the sonar dome) a 3/16-inch x 3/16- inch x 24-inch long flexible batten (wood) shall be used. A 3/16-inch feeler gage shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. d. From frame 26 to frame 40 (extending 1 foot above the baseline flat to the bottom of the sonar dome) a 1/4-inch feeler gage shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. Areas of the window which are concave by design shall be checked with a 1/4-inch x 1/4-inch x 24-inch long batten held within the edge of the concave area with an applied moment that will cause the batten to lay against the window surface. While holding the batten at its ends, press the batten against the dome. The fairness shall be such that: 1. A feeler gage 1/4 (+1/-0.008) inch in diameter shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. 2. A feeler gage 3/16 (+/-0.008) inch in diameter shall be excluded over a minimum of 75% of the length of the batten. e. From frame 3 to frame 14, use a 1/4-inch x 1/4-inch x 36-inch long flexible batten (wood). A 1/8-inch feeler gage shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. Where dome shape precludes the use of the longer batten (where the bow stem joins with the closure plates and rubber window) a 12-inch x 3/16-inch x 3/16-inch flexible batten may be used, but a 1/16-inch diameter feeler gage must be excluded everywhere along the batten.

8-8.14 SDRW HYDROTEST. a. This test is performed to check the integrity of the window wall, bead seat area, ship’s structure, hatches, penetrations, and valves with the dome filled with water. b. Verify that the water fill and eductor hose has been installed or that some means exists for filling and removing water from the dome. c. Serious damage may occur to the rubber window if the following caution is not heeded.

CAUTION

THE DOME MUST NEVER BE DEPRESSURIZED WHEN FILLED WITH WATER IN DRYDOCK. d. If the dome is not pressurized with air, increase the air pressure to 14 (+/-1) psig. Use the air pressurization procedure given in Chapter 2.

8-64 S9165-AE-MMA-010 e. Using a 50 (+/-10) psig freshwater source, fill the dome with water through the water fill and educt hose. Maintain a dome pressure of 14 (+/-1) psig during the filling operation. When the dome is full, hold pressure at 34 (+2 -1) psig. Use the air-to-water interchange procedure given in Chapter 2. f. Holding pressure for 30 minutes, check window wall, bead seat area, ship’s structure, hatches, penetrations through the wall, and valves for leaks. 1. If leaks are found in the bead seat area, retighten clamps without reducing pressure. 2. If leaks appear to be caused by a penetration through the wall, remove the water, repair the leak as instructed in Chapter 6, and restart the test.

CAUTION

AIR PRESSURE OF 14 (+/-1) PSIG MUST BE SUPPLIED TO THE DOME AS WATER IS BEING REMOVED. 3. If leaks are found in the ship’s structure, airlock hatches and penetrations, diagonal bulkhead hatches, or pressure plate penetrations at the baseline ﬂat, they must be repaired before continuing the test. 4. If leaks cannot be stopped while the dome is under pressure, remove the water in accordance with Chapter 2, repair the leaks, and restart the test. g. Install blanking plate on W-V-31. h. Conduct a dome pressure cycling test when there has been an alteration to the bead seat as follows: 1. Increase dome pressure to 52 (+0 -2) psig. 2. Reduce dome pressure to 39.5 (+2 -0) psig. 3. Repeat steps h.1 and h.2 three times, checking for leaks at the minimum and the maximum hydrostatic pressure in accordance with step f. i. Remove blanking plate on W-V-31. j. Hydrostatic Hold Test. Reduce and hold the hydrostatic pressure at 39.5 (+2 -0) psig for 8 hours. k. After the 8-hour hold, check all clamp bolts and tighten all bolts not at the proper minimum torque requirements. l. Removal of closure plates or minor window repairs do not require hydrostatic testing. m. A dome pressure cycling test for all other SDRW replacements or dome structural repairs will be accomplished following steps 8-8.14.h.1 through 8-8.14.h.3. with a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 43 psig.

NOTE

DOME MAY BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR AN INDETERMINATE PERIOD OF TIME BEFORE CLOSURE PLATES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED.

8-9. FAIRING ANGLE AND CLOSURE PLATE INSTALLATION.

8-9.1 PREPARATION. a. The dome shall be pressurized to 15 psig with air before the beginning of ﬁtting and installation of the fairing angles and closure plates, and thereafter remain pressurized. b. Prior to installing the fairing angles, tap and clean the fairing angle bolt holes in the rubber window.

8-9.2 INSTALL FAIRING ANGLE SECTIONS. a. Install and bolt fairing angle sections to the rubber window using the ﬂat bar washers, ﬂat washers and capscrews in accordance with Figure 8-39.

8-65 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-39. Fairing Angle Assembly b. Install the fairing angles in the order shown in Figure 8-40, for SDRW-1. Do not tighten bolts at this time. c. Adjust the position of the fairing angle inboard or outboard to the line of a batten in accordance with Figure 8-41. 1. The fairing angles may have to be adjusted outward by the use of extending tabs to achieve correct fairness. 2. If fairing angles do not ﬁt properly, EXCESS FORCE SHALL NOT BE USED, remove angle section off window and shape to suit requirements.

8-66 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-40. SDRW-1 & -1A Fairing Angle Map

3. In order to achieve a proper ﬁt, it may become necessary to cut the fairing angle. (a) Fairing angle maximum allowable angle misalignment not to exceed +/-10 degrees. (b) Welding of cuts and splices will be done after the fairing angle has been removed from the rubber window. (c) All cuts and splices may be tacked while the fairing angle is attached to the window, but shall only be tacked at the toe of the angle and not adjacent to the window.

8-67 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(d) All joints shall be sequence welded to prevent fairing angle distortion.

Figure 8-41. Positioning the Fairing Angle

d. Insert a 0.010-inch x 4-inch wide shim strip between the fairing angle and rubber at each butt joint as shown in Figure 8-42.

8-68 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-42. Installing Shim Strip at each Butt Joint

8-69 S9165-AE-MMA-010

CAUTION

DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILDUP OR ALLOW WELD SPATTER TO STRIKE THE RUBBER. e. Cover the entire surface of the rubber window with fire-resistant material cloth held in place with 4-inch wide fire- resistant tape (Scotchwrap 50, 2 inches x 100 feet x 0.010 inch per roll or equal). f. Weld butt joints and remove shims. (Vee out butt joints if required to achieve full penetration weld.) g. Torque all fairing angle bolts a minimum of 15 (+/-5) foot-pounds and a maximum of 20 foot-pounds. Do not overtorque. h. Tack weld every flat bar washer that secures the fairing angle to the rubber window. i. Tack weld a 1/8-inch CRES rod (lockwire) between each fairing angle bolt head.

CAUTION

DO NOT FOUL THE SOCKET HEADS OF THE BOLTS WITH WELD.

NOTE

THE SOCKET HOLES SHALL BE FILLED WITH DUCT SEAL OR A SIMILAR MATERIAL TO PREVENT THE HOLES FROM BEING FILLED WITH FOAM DUR- ING FILLING OF THE VOIDS BETWEEN THE FAIRING ANGLE PLATES AND THE HULL STRUCTURE.

8-9.3 INSTALLATION OF FAIRING ANGLE SUPPORT TABS.

a. After installation of fairing angles and prior to installation of the fairing closure plates, support tabs shall be welded to the bead clamp and the toe of the fairing angle alternating support as shown in Figure 8-43. Support tabs are used to prevent buckling and stress buildup in the window nut plates. The fairing angle shall be pulled outboard by 1/16-inch and the tabs placed ﬁrmly between the clamp and angle. This will allow for weld shrinkage at the closure plate/fairing angle joint. b. Tabs can be fabricated from either 3/8-inch minimum diameter rod or 10.2 # plate. c. Plate type tabs should have approximately 1-inch spacing between each plate. d. The fairing angle tabs should be welded on the clamp about halfway between the bolt and the center of the clamp cavity. The supports shall approximate a 90-degree angle off the fairing angle, but not to exceed 40 degrees in either direction.

8-70 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-43. Fairing Angle Support Tabs

8-9.4 INSTALLATION OF CLOSURE PLATE SUPPORT. a. Fabricate support tees per Figure 8-44, utilizing minimum 15.3# plate OS web and 1 x 1/4 inch or 2 x 1/4 inch ﬂat bar ﬂange. b. Install with 12 to 18-inch spacing throughout the periphery of the sonar dome. c. Care must be taken to contour the support tees to the correct hull shape. Use a batten stick to pick up the hull curvature.

8-71 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-44. Tee Bar Closure Plate Supports 8-9.5 INSTALLATION OF FAIRING CLOSURE PLATES. a. Certain class ships will require rework of hull plating above baseline to produce required fairness in forward area.

8-72 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. Other areas may require lapping the closure plate over the hull plate to achieve fairness. c. Each ship should be treated individually to ensure that the ship’s construction actually matches plan drawings.

Figure 8-45. Installation of Fairing Closure Plates

8-73 S9165-AE-MMA-010 d. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to lap closure plates over the shell plating to achieve fairness and minimize clad welding. The rubber window must be sufficiently outside the shell line to warrant this type application. (See Figure 8-45.)

Figure 8-46. Closure Plate Foam Fill and Vent Holes e. Two inch diameter foam fill holes shall be cut and backing bars added to the closure plate prior to installation. Vent holes (1/2-inch diameter) shall be drilled above the fill holes and as close to the baseline flat as possible. (See Figure 8-46.) Generally, six fill vent holes are required (three port, three starboard); however, quantity of holes may vary at the option of the shipyard/contractor. f. Weld the closure plate backing bar to the baseline flat and structural periphery of the window. (See Figure 8-46.) Grind all welds flush. g. Care should be taken to form the closure plates to the correct hull shape to prevent excessive clad welding/grinding. Use either strongbacks or fishtail jacks and leave in place. Keep work cool. h. When grinding is required on the fairing angle or adjacent areas that may transfer heat to the SDRW, skip grinding shall be used. This will allow the heated metal to cool. Air may be used to cool metal if desired. A maximum 150°F temperature stick shall be utilized. i. Closure plates wider than 12 inches may require support from the rear to prevent buckling during welding. See Figure 8-47. j. Ensure the dome is pressurized to 15 psig. k. Template, install, and tack weld all closure plates to the fairing angles and the upper backing bar and hull.

8-74 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-47. Closure Plate Support l. Epoxy ﬁlling is not allowed within 18 inches of rubber window to steel interface and within 4 inches of the steel closure plate to hull plating interface when the closure plate overlaps the hull plating. m. After fairing closure plates have been tack welded into place, the preliminary dome closure fairness inspection must be performed in accordance with external surface fairness test. n. Upon successful completion of the fairness inspection, production weld all plates to fairing angles and to hull. o. To minimize the effects of shrinkage and distortion, keep the work cool by using short-arc welding equipment, 12-inch skip welding procedures, and stinger bead technique. p. Grind all welds ﬂush.

CAUTION

AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE CLOSURE PLATES, IF THE DOME MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR ANY REASON, SUPPORT STRAPS SHALL BE INSTALLED IF IT IS ESTIMATED THE DOME WILL BE DEPRESSURIZED FOR MORE THAN 72 HOURS.

8-10. SDRW RUBBER FAIRING FINAL FINISH.

8-10.1 SURFACE FAIRING. After the installation of fairing angles and closure plates, the sonar dome exterior surface needs to be faired to the surface of the steel. This rubber work is accomplished with the same rubber repair procedures described in Chapter 6 of this manual. This section covers the special requirements to support the rubber fairing work.

8-75 S9165-AE-MMA-010

8-10.2 WORK AREA PREPARATION.

a. The rubber fairing work will require a shelter. The rubber fairing materials include rubber and adhesives that vulcanize at temperatures above 65°F. These materials are also sensitive to high humidity. A 42-foot x 52-foot shelter is required. (See Figure 8-48.) 1. Shelter construction materials vary dependent on climate. A sturdy plywood shelter is the preferred construction; however, canvas or Herculite covered walls work well in northern summer months and warm climate areas. 2. Sealing the shelter roof against the hull is critical. The roof must be watertight. Water would ruin the adhesive properties of the cements used. b. Within the shelter, staging will be required. The upper level of staging should be 4 feet down for the upper rubber to steel interface. (See Figure 8-49.)

8-76 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-48. Rubber Fairing Shelter

8-77 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-49. Staging and Lighting c. Visibility is critical to rubber fairing work. Lighting of 90 candles, per a photometer, is required. As a general rule, reading should be possible by the lighting. d. When seasonal temperatures fall below 60° F, the shelter will require heating. Provide sufficient heating to push the temperature above 70°F. During wet weather and periods of high humidity, dehumidification will be required to maintain the relative humidity at no more than 95%. e. Rubber surface grinding is accomplished with pneumatic grinders. An air manifold with a minimum of 45 CFM and 100 psi source supply is required. f. The NOFOUL rubber in the sonar dome and the fairing rubber contain Tributyl Tin Oxide (TBTO). The cements and solvents used in the process contain toluene. 1. All lighting and electrical equipment must be explosion proof. 2. There should be a portable eyewash within the shelter and a sink within reasonable distance. 3. The general area should be cordoned off and signs posted with notification of the proper personal protective equipment required and authorization to enter the area. (Refer to Chapter 6.) 4. Proper flammable storage containers and cabinets as well as proper disposal containers, should be provided.

8-10.3 RUBBER APPLICATION. a. All rubber application and buildup is to be applied in accordance with the methods described by Chapter 6 of this manual.

8-78 S9165-AE-MMA-010 b. All repairs, buildup rubber plies, and heavy surface buffing are to be recorded and reported to NAVSEA. Submit a writ- ten report with a surface map indicating the rubber work areas. Use the SDRW surface map in Figure 8-50. c. Yellow Degree Tile Installation. 1. Yellow rubber, NOFOUL degree tiles are references used by divers during underwater inspections. These rubber tiles are used in place of antifoulant paint grid markings. 2. Tiles installed along the upper rubber to steel marriage line have the degrees bearing and the letter ″U″ inlaid into them. The tiles along the lower marriage line have the bearing and the letter ″L.″ A third group of tiles runs along the minus 4-foot baseline and have dash (″-″) marks as identiﬁers.

8-79 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-50. Rubber Repair and Fairing Map

3. Materials required are listed in Table 8-12.

8-80 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table 8-12. Degree Tile Material Requirements Quantity Material Description 1 Set Degree Tiles (29 Tiles) 2 Gallons Tackifying Solvent 2 Gallons HYDROLOCK® HLN-30 Cement 2 (6 Oz.) Tube ELASTOLOCK® AS-1 4. Tile Location Layout. (a) Lay out and mark the positions to install degree tiles in accordance with the dimensions in Figure 8-51. Upper and lower tiles are located 10 inches vertically from the rubber to steel marriage lines. (b) Mark out 7-inch circles to install the tiles. With a disk grinder, prepare the area for a 0.080-inch thick rubber inlay. Clean, cement and install the tiles as if they were normal inlay repairs as described in Chapter 6.

Figure 8-51. Degree Tile Location

8-10.4 EXTERNAL DOME FAIRNESS INSPECTION. a. Purpose. The purpose of this inspection is to ensure that the surface and contour of the rubber window, rubber window/steel interface, and adjacent steel surfaces of the total bow dome are in accordance with the installation speciﬁca- tions. b. Test equipment required: 1. Flexible Batten, 36- x 1/4- x 1/4-inch. 2. Flexible Batten, 12- x 3/16- x 3/16-inch. 3. Flexible Batten 24- x 3/16- x 3/16-inch. 4. Feeler Gage, 3/16-inch. 5. Feeler Gage, 1/4-inch. 6. Feeler Gage, 1/8-inch. c. Test setup. None.

8-81 S9165-AE-MMA-010 d. Control settings. Ensure that dome is pressurized with air at 14 (+/-1) psig, as indicated by W-GA-10, throughout the duration of the fairing test. e. Test procedures. (Refer to Table 8-13).

Table 8-13. External Dome Fairness Inspection Procedure

NOTE THIS TEST IS CONDUCTED AFTER THE CLOSURE PLATES ARE PRODUCTION WELDED IN PLACE AND ALL GRINDING AND GROOMING ARE COMPLETED. NOTE FINAL FAIRNESS INSPECTION WILL BE DONE PRIOR TO PAINTING HULL AND CLOSURE PLATE. 1. Verify that the rubber window has had degree tiles installed at 0, 45, 90, 135, 165, 195, 225, 270, and 315 degrees in relative bearing from the bow along both upper and lower rubber to steel interface and dash mark tiles at the minus 4-foot baseline. 2. Hold a 24- x 3/16- x 3/16-inch flexible batten by its ends and place it against steel hull and dome (rubber window, rubber window/steel interface, and steel). 3. Verify that: a. From frame 14 to frame 26 (extending 1-foot above the baseline flat to the bottom of the sonar dome), a 3/16-inch feeler gage shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. b. From frame 26 to frame 40 (extending 1-foot above the baseline flat to the bottom of the sonar dome), a 1/4-inch feeler gage shall be excluded over the entire length of the batten. 4. Hold a 36- x 1/4- x 1/4-inch flexible batten by its ends and place it against steel hull and dome (rubber window, rubber window/steel interface, and steel). 5. Verify that: a. A 3/16-inch diameter feeler gage cannot be inserted between the batten and ship’s surface (rubber window, rubber window/steel interface, or steel hull) over 75% of the batten length. b. A 1/4-inch diameter feeler gage is excluded everywhere along the batten. NOTE A 12- x 3/16- X 3/16-INCH FLEXIBLE BATTEN MAY BE USED WHERE DOME SHAPE PRECLUDES THE USE OF A LONGER BATTEN. FEELER GAGE MUST BE EXCLUDED EVERYWHERE ALONG THE BATTEN. 6. Perform step 2 and step 3 or step 4 and step 5 for all orientations of the batten at the test location. 7. Perform step 2 and step 3 for the entire rubber window area and for all steel dome areas up to the ship’s plus 2-foot waterline. 8. Inspect the total exterior bow dome surface for abrupt changes, undercut welds, and presence of paint, glue, masking tape, or other foreign matter. 9. Verify that no epoxy fill has been used within 18 inches of the rubber window/steel interface or 4 inches from the plate/steel hull interface when the plate overlaps on steel hull. 10. Inspect rubber window areas for cuts, gouges, pits, or separations. 11. Report discrepancies to the installing activity for correction. 12. Repeat step 2 through step 5 and step 8 through step 11 for all areas where additional work is performed. 13. Should a hollow exist permitting the insertion of a 3/16-inch diameter feeler gage, it must be of sufficient length to accept a 3/32-inch diameter feeler gage anywhere along the batten for a distance of at least 25 times the feeler gage diameter, 12 times the diameter in either direction measured from the point of maximum gap width. The surface must pass this test regardless of the batten orientation. (See Figure 8-52.)

8-82 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-52. Batten Hollow Test f. SDRW Dome Inspection Grid and Inspection Reporting Forms (Figures 8-53 through 8-58). 1. As a prerequisite to the ﬁnal external dome fairness inspection, rubber bearing degree tiles must be installed in the rubber window. The tile shall be located at 0, 45, 90, 135, 165, 195, 225, 270, and 315 degree bearings, starting at the bow and placed along the top and bottom sections (both port and starboard), and dash mark tiles along the minus 4-foot baseline.

8-83 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-53. SDRW Dome Inspection Grid

2. As contained in Figures 8-54 through 8-57, forms C-1 through C-4 respectively, comprise the dome inspection report forms for the four dome quadrants (port/starboard and top/bottom). The results of the ﬁnal dome inspection will be reported by a NAVSEA-appointed test activity on these forms. Form C-5 is an example of a ﬁlled-out form (Figure 8-58). Completed forms are to be submitted to NAVSEA Code 63J.

8-84 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-54. Form C-1. SDRW Dome Inspection Form

8-85 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-55. Form C-2. SDRW Dome Inspection Form

8-86 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-56. Form C-3. SDRW Dome Inspection Form

8-87 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-57. Form C-4. SDRW Dome Inspection Form

8-88 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-58. Form C-5. Example of Filled-out SDRW Dome Inspection Form g. Acceptance and Rejection Criteria. 1. Tolerance, offsets, general notes, bead seat length, and other installation details for the window/bow area will be in accordance with installation drawing sonar dome rubber window SDRW-1 (latest revision) and Tables 8-2 and 8-3. 2. The surface of the forward portion of the hull below the 8-foot waterline and forward of frame 40 shall be smooth and fair. The surface shall be considered smooth if the surface roughness does not exceed 300 microinches. Fairness shall be assumed if depressions or protrusions on the surface have an aspect ratio of at least 50. The aspect ratio is defined as the ratio of the shortest surface dimension to the height or depth. 3. Sonar dome scantlings that have been replaced or modified shall be inspected for conformance to drawings. 4. Shell plating in the dome area and closure plate shall be inspected. 5. The surface in the dome area shall be checked for conformance to the fairness and smoothness requirements, with special emphasis on the rubber/steel interface area. Checks shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 8-10.4. 6. Batten measurement locations are shown in Figure 8-52. Figures 8-54 through 8-57 shall be used to record measurements. Each measurement location requires that the batten be rotated 360 degrees to locate the maximum out-of- fairness. 7. Alignment marks on the rubber window should match prepunched marks on the steel structure. If not aligned after the window final seating, the deviations shall be recorded. 8. Rubber window perimeter leaks must be sealed satisfactorily and in accordance with methods dictated herein. 9. Successful completion of all pressure testing and pressure cycling shall be accomplished. 10. Painting shall be completed as required by the latest paint schedule drawings. 11. Dome pressure shall be verified at 14 (+/-1) psig during fairing angle and closure plate installation. 12. The stem bar shall have a 3/16-inch nose radius and form an elliptical shape to a tangent 2-inches aft of the leading edge. From the tangent back 16-inches and up to the 26-foot waterline, the area shall be checked for fairness and

8-89 S9165-AE-MMA-010

smoothness. Using a 12- x 3/16-inch cross section batten, a 1/16-inch feeler gage shall be rejected over the entire length. The area must be smooth to the feel of the hand, and the surface roughness shall not exceed 300 microinches.

8-10.5 FOAMING FAIRING CLOSURE PLATE VOID. a. Upon successful completion of the ﬁnal dome closure fairness inspection, the void behind the fairing closure plates is to be ﬁlled with foam (MIL-S-24167).

CAUTION

COVER UPPER HALF OF WINDOW PERIPHERY WITH POLYETHYLENE FILM, HEAVY PAPER, OR OTHER PROTECTIVE MATERIAL TO PROTECT RUBBER DURING FOAMING. FOAMING CHEMICALS MAY DAMAGE RUB- BER. b. Tape below the interface seam between the SDRW and the fairing angle plate with cloth-backed (duct) tape on the upper half of the SDRW periphery. Drape polyethylene film down to at least half the height of the SDRW, and tape the film down to the previous tape layer. Should leaks occur, the foam will drain over the polyethylene film. Plug or stuff leak holes with cloth or wooden plugs (tapered wooden paint sticks work well) until leak has ceased. c. Drill and tap holes in the closure plates for foaming, hose line, fill fittings, and air venting point fittings. 1. Drill and tap a 3/4-inch NPT hole at 0 degrees on the top, just below the baseline flat, in the closure plate. 2. Drill and tap two 3/4-inch NPT holes in the lower fairing angle at 0 degrees. Locate one hole on each side of centerline. 3. Drill and tap two 3/4-inch NPT holes in the lower fairing angle at centerline of transducer. Locate one at 90 degrees (stbd) and one at 270 degrees (port). 4. Drill and tap six 1/4-inch NPT holes on the top, just below the baseline flat. Locate three on the port side at 30, 90, and 135 degrees and three on the starboard side at 330, 270, and 225 degrees. d. Preparation of polyester resin shall be in a well-ventilated area. The mix formulation shall be in accordance with one of the formulas in Table 8-14.

Table 8-14. Resin Mixture Table M.E.K. Peroxide Formula Class A Polyester Resin (Lbs.) Filler (Lbs.) (Grams) Silicone (Grams) 1 65 17 Microspheres 90 to 206 30 2 65 11 to 12 Microballons 90 to 206 30 e. Material storage requirements. 1. Polyester resin 5119J shall be stored in a cool indoor area. The shelf life of the polyester resin is six months. Poly- ester resin shall be requaliﬁed before use if the shelf-life of six months has been exceeded. 2. M.E.K. peroxide catalyst shall be stored under refrigeration in a remote cooler at a temperature below 50°F in the original shipping containers, or divided into uncontaminated 4-ounce polyethylene bottles. Each bottle shall contain a minimum of 90 grams to a maximum of 206 grams. The M.E.K. peroxide catalyst has a shelf-life of six months. The catalyst shall be requaliﬁed before use if stored longer than six months.

WARNING

M.E.K. PEROXIDE CATALYST IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE AND POTEN- TIALLY EXPLOSIVE. DO NOT STORE MORE THAN 100 LBS. IN ONE LOCA- TION. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME, SPARKS, AND WELDING. KEEP OUT OF DIRECT SUNLIGHT.

8-90 S9165-AE-MMA-010

3. The microspheres or microballons shall be stored in the original shipping containers in an enclosed dry area. The containers shall be properly sealed at all times to prevent caking and moisture absorption. f. Requalification test. 1. Tests on polyester resin and M.E.K. peroxide catalyst shall be conducted on each lot necessary for requalification. 2. Gel time should not exceed 4 hours with 0.7% by weight quantity of catalyst. 3. Requalification of the polyester resin shall be valid for three months. g. Weigh or measure the polyester resin in accordance with the resin mixture table and place into the 55-gallon drum for that use. h. Add the amount of M.E.K. peroxide catalyst and silicone as specified in the table. If a delay of 1 hour or more is anticipated between mixing and pouring, the catalyst should not be added until 3 minutes before pouring time. i. Catalyst concentration shall not exceed 0.7% (206 grams) for 65 pounds of polyester resin. j. When the ambient temperature in the structure to be filled is less than 80° F, the catalyst shall be increased 0.05% (15 grams) for each 65 pounds of resin for each 20° F increment, or fraction thereof, less than 80° F. k. An increase in M.E.K. peroxide catalyst decreases gel time. The gel time, as determined in receiving tests or requalification tests, shall be used as a guide for the amount of catalyst used in production. l. When requalification test shows gel time in excess of 4 hours, the M. E. K. peroxide catalyst shall be increased 0.05% (15 grams) for each 65 pounds of resin for each one-half (0.5) hour or fraction thereof in excess of 4 hours. m. When the gel time and/or the temperature combine to require more catalyst than permitted (206 grams per 65 pounds polyester resin), mixing and pouring shall cease until condition requirements can be met. n. Mix the components for 3 minutes using a power agitator prior to adding the correct amount of microballons. (Refer to Table 8-14.) Agitate the mixture for 2 minutes after the last microspheres or microballons have been added to ensure thorough mixing. o. Install a 3/4-inch NPT ball valve in each of the 3/4-inch fill holes drilled and tapped into the closure plates/fairing angles. p. Using two 8:1 ratio pneumatic pumps connected to the two valves at 0 degrees lower, pump syntactic foam into fairing closure plate void. 1. Allow the syntactic foam to vent from the valves at 90 degrees starboard and 270 degrees port lower, then close the valves. Continue to pump syntactic foam into the closure plate void and watch for syntactic foam to vent from the 1/4-inch openings at 135 degrees starboard and 225 degrees port. Install 1/4-inch NPT pipe plug fittings in the vent openings after the syntactic foam vents. 2. Should the syntactic foam not vent concurrently at the 135- and 225-degree vent holes, close the valves at 0 degrees lower and move the pump on the slower side to the 3/4-inch fitting at centerline of transducer. Continue pumping and cycling the pumps so that they remain concurrent at the remaining two pairs of 1/4-inch vent holes. Continue pumping until foam vents from the ball valve at 0 degrees upper and stop the pumps. 3. Position a suitable container (buckets) at the 3/4-inch ball valve at 0 degrees upper. Cycle the pumps, venting syntactic foam into the container until there is no sign of trapped air. Turn off the pumps and close all valves. q. A sample of the material shall be kept for cure observation. Remove the buckets. r. After cure, grind off any excess foaming resin. Plug and weld the foaming fill and vent holes in the closure plates and grind welds flush. s. Remove the protective cover and tape used during the foaming operation.

8-11. PROTECTION OF COMPLETED SDRW IN DRYDOCK.

8-11.1 PROTECTION FROM OVERSTRESSING.

8-91 S9165-AE-MMA-010 a. Water filling of a completed window should only be conducted for the preliminary water test (paragraph 8-8.13) and during undocking as required by the drydocking/undocking procedures (Chapter 2). b. Dome may be filled with water and held at 39.5 (+2 -0) psig in drydock indefinitely for testing without support cables or banjo support blocks in order to accomplish transducer and transducer cable testing. However, testing should be done as expeditiously as possible.

8-11.2 PROTECTION FROM SUNLIGHT AND HEAT. a. An SDRW in drydock more than 3 days should be covered or protected from direct sunlight. b. An SDRW in drydock more than 3 days, when temperature exceeds 80°F, should be covered with an aluminized mylar material or water spray, in addition to protection from direct sunlight, to prevent extensive loss of antifouling toxicant.

8-12. DEPRESSURIZATION AND SUPPORT OF COMPLETED WINDOW.

8-12.1 DEPRESSURIZING WINDOW. A completed window (Figure 8-59) should remain pressurized with air at all times when the ship is in drydock. Depressurization may cause excessive stresses on the fairing angle nut plates and damage the window; however, the window may be depressurized for 3 days or less to complete work in the dome.

8-12.2 SUPPORT FOR DEPRESSURIZED WINDOW. If the window must be depressurized for more than 3 days, it must be supported as follows: a. Fabricate six plywood or aluminum cradles, as shown in Figure 8-59, to match the inﬂated contour of the window at the locations noted. b. Weld padeyes to the banjo and hull.

8-92 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-59. Support Cradles for Depressurized Window 1.

8-93 S9165-AE-MMA-010

c. Install cradles to the pressurized window and draw the support webs tight with 2-ton chainfalls. d. When all six cradles are installed, depressurize window. e. Support slings may be used in place of cradles. (Refer to Norfolk Naval Shipyard drawing no. 53711-906-6035584).

CAUTION

8-13. DOCKING AND UNDOCKING.

8-13.1 DRYDOCK FACILITIES. The following dimensional criteria is the minimum recommended for successful removal and installation of a new sonar dome rubber window. (See Figure 8-60.)

a. The removal/installation of a rubber window requires a minimum distance of 12 feet from the baseline flat to the drydock floor to accommodate the rubber window shipping/installation fixture. b. If major reinstallation of bead seat castings is required, the baseline flat to drydock floor distance must be 14 feet to accommodate the bead seat installation fixture.

8-13.2 DRYDOCKING/UNDOCKING PROCEDURES. The following procedures must be followed when drydocking or undocking an SDRW-equipped ship to preclude rubber window damage.

a. A qualified sonar dome pressurization system operator must be present at the dome control station during all docking and undocking evaluations. b. To avoid collapsing the rubber window, maintain 14 (+/-1) psig air pressure at all times while flooding or dewatering the sonar dome or during ship drydocking operations. c. If the sonar dome is to be removed or replaced, and a rubber window shipping/installation fixture (B.F. Goodrich fixture 7S1020) is used, the minimum required keel block buildup is 12 feet. A minimum space of 48 feet long by 35 feet wide must be provided forward of the ship’s bow to allow for placement of the handling equipment.

8-94 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-60. Drydock Facilities

8-13.3 DRYDOCKING. a. When drydocking, the sonar dome shall be completely ﬁlled with water and shall normally be pressurized by the ﬁremain to 39.5 psig. The sonar dome shall remain full during the drydocking sequence until the ship has landed on the blocks. If trim by the stern is required for drydocking, the sonar dome may be partially or completely dewatered and pressurized with 14 (+/-1) psig air pressure. Perform water-to-air interchange in accordance with Chapter 2. b. To avoid overstressing the rubber window, the sonar dome shall be completely dewatered and pressurized with 14 (+/-1) psig air pressure no later than 3 hours after the rubber window has been exposed to air. Perform water-to-air interchange in accordance with Chapter 2.

8-95 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. The dome shall be pressurized at all times while the ship is in the drydock. If, while in drydock, the dome must be depressurized for longer than 72 hours, the dome shall be supported in accordance with Norfolk Naval Shipyard drawing no. 53711-906-6035584, Sling Support for Sonar Dome Rubber Window. (See Figure 8-59.) Plywood or aluminum cradles may also be fabricated as shown in Figure 8-59. Rubber windows or domes covered with NOFOUL rubber require protection from the sun.

8-13.4 UNDOCKING. a. The sonar dome shall be completely filled with fresh water and pressurized by the firemain to 39.5 psig. Sonar dome flooding shall be completed before the water level in the drydock reaches the bottom of the dome, but the rubber shall not be exposed to air more than 3 hours after the dome has been flooded. Perform air-to-water interchange in accordance with Chapter 2. b. If trim by the stern is required for undocking, the sonar dome may be air pressurized or partially flooded and pressurized with 15 to 22 psig air pressure. Air-to-water interchange shall be completed immediately after the ship is dockside.

8-96 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 1 of 13)

8-97 / (8-98 Blank) 8-98 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 2 of 13)

8-99 / (8-100 Blank) 8-100 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 3 of 13)

8-101 / (8-102 Blank) 8-102 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 4 of 13)

8-103 / (8-104 Blank) 8-104 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 5 of 13)

8-105 / (8-106 Blank) 8-106 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 6 of 13)

8-107 / (8-108 Blank) 8-108 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 7 of 13)

8-109 / (8-110 Blank) 8-110 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 8 of 13)

8-111 / (8-112 Blank) 8-112 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 9 of 13)

8-113 / (8-114 Blank) 8-114 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 10 of 13)

8-115 / (8-116 Blank) 8-116 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 11 of 13)

8-117 / (8-118 Blank) 8-118 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 12 of 13)

8-119 / (8-120 Blank) 8-120 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure 8-61. Installation Control Drawings (Sheet 13 of 13)

8-121 / (8-122 Blank) 8-122 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-1. Ship Locations of System Controls

8-123 / (8-124 Blank) 8-124 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-2. Dome Control Station Air Valve Board

8-125 / (8-126 Blank) 8-126 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-3. Dome Control Station Water Valve Board

8-127 / (8-128 Blank) 8-128 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-4. Dome Control Station Gage Panel

8-129 / (8-130 Blank) 8-130 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-5. Dome Control Panel E-PN-44

8-131 / (8-132 Blank) 8-132 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-6. Dome Status Panel E-PN-45

8-133 / (8-134 Blank) 8-134 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-7. Airlock Passageway/Airlock Components

8-135 / (8-136 Blank) 8-136 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-8. SDRW Water/Air Pressurization and Dome Access Subsystems

8-137 / (8-138 Blank) 8-138 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-9. SDRW Rubber Window and Attachment Hardware

8-139 / (8-140 Blank) 8-140 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-10. SDRW Sonar Bow Dome Structure

8-141 / (8-142 Blank) 8-142 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-11. SDRW Air Pressurization Subsystem

8-143 / (8-144 Blank) 8-144 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-12. SDRW Dome Water Fill/Pressurization

8-145 / (8-146 Blank) 8-146 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-13. SDRW Dome Water Sweep

8-147 / (8-148 Blank) 8-148 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-14. SDRW Audible Alarms Simpliﬁed Schematic

8-149 / (8-150 Blank) 8-150 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-15. SDRW Visual Alarms Simpliﬁed Schematic

8-151 / (8-152 Blank) 8-152 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-16. SDRW Electrical Control/Alarm Subsystem Cable Interconnection Diagram

8-153 / (8-154 Blank) 8-154 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-17. SDRW Sound-Powered Phone X25J Simpliﬁed Schematic

8-155 / (8-156 Blank) 8-156 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-18. SDRW E-Call Bell System Simpliﬁed Schematic

8-157 / (8-158 Blank) 8-158 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-19. SDRW Audible Alarms Functional Schematic

8-159 / (8-160 Blank) 8-160 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-20. SDRW Visual Alarms Functional Schematic

8-161 / (8-162 Blank) 8-162 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-21. SDRW Eductor Solenoid Valve Control Functional Schematic

8-163 / (8-164 Blank) 8-164 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-22. SDRW Sonar Dome Portable Communications Panel E-PN-179

8-165 / (8-166 Blank) 8-166 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-23. SDRW Connection Panel E-PN-50 (Terminal Box) Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

8-167 / (8-168 Blank) 8-168 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-23. SDRW ConnecTion Panel E-PN-50 (Terminal Box) Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

8-169 / (8-170 Blank) 8-170 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-24. SDRW Dome Control Panel, E-PN-44, Wiring Diagram

8-171 / (8-172 Blank) 8-172 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-25. SDRW Dome Status Panel, E-PN-45. Wiring Diagram

8-173 / (8-174 Blank) 8-174 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-26. Dome Water Pressure Below Limit Fault Logic Diagram

8-175 / (8-176 Blank) 8-176 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-27. Dome Air Pressure/Flow Below Limit Fault Logic Diagram

8-177 / (8-178 Blank) 8-178 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-28. Dome Water Pressure Excessive Fault Logic Diagram

8-179 / (8-180 Blank) 8-180 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-29. Pressure Reducers W-V-7 & W-V-16

8-181 / (8-182 Blank) 8-182 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-30. Relief Valve W-V-31

8-183 / (8-184 Blank) 8-184 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-31. Relief Valve A-V-122

8-185 / (8-186 Blank) 8-186 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-32. Pressure Reducer A-V-119

8-187 / (8-188 Blank) 8-188 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure FO-33. 3/8″ CRL5M Pressure Relief Control With Union Ends (A-V-134)

8-189 / (8-190 Blank) 8-190 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010

APPENDIX A

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATOR

A.1 INTRODUCTION.

This appendix provides a detailed functional description of the Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) gage W-GA-10. It also provides information necessary to operate and perform maintenance on the Volumetrics and Prime manufactured DEPI.

A.1.1 DESCRIPTION. The DEPI is a pressure indicator which indicates actual sonar dome pressure at a reference level of 4 feet, 11-1/4 inches below the overhead of the transducer compartment. At this level, the indicated pressure represents the average internal pressure of the sonar dome. a. Pressure Sensing Capillary Tubing: A double loop seal, which is immediately upstream of the pressure sensing (open) end of the capillary tubing, prevents drainage of water from the capillary tubing during sonar dome dewatering procedures b. There is a cutout valve (W-V-57) installed that allows isolation of the capillary tubing during repair or replacement of transducer P-X-26. During normal operations W-V-57 is in the open position at all time. Vent valve Transducer Test Point Connection (TPC) (W-V-46) provides maintenance personnel with the capability to purge air pockets from the capillary tubing during sonar dome water filling procedures. The TPC also provides a connection point for calibration equipment. During normal operations W-V-46 is in the open position at all times. c. Pressure Transducer P-X-26: See Figure A-1. The capillary tubing is routed to the airlock compartment where it terminates into pressure transducer P-X-26. Pressure transducer P-X-26 is a sealed unit which converts input pressure to an electrical amperage within a predetermined range. Changes in input pressure levels will vary amperage levels, which, in turn, change the indicated pressure display on the DEPI. The P-X-26 transducer is connected to the DEPI through a cable which is provided with an in-line quick disconnect fitting. The quick disconnect fitting permits replacement of transducer P-X-26. d. The DEPI monitor pressure transducer P-X-26 with excellent stability and accuracy. When the input pressure to P-X-26 exceeds predetermined limits for an interval greater than 8 seconds, the DEPI will automatically activate HIGH PRESSURE or LOW PRESSURE visual and audible alarms on the SDPS alarm panels as appropriate. During an alarm condition, the DEPI manufactured by Volumetrics will automatically record sonar dome pressure, at 1 second intervals, until the alarm condition has cleared. This data may be down loaded via the RS-232 connector at a later time for further analysis. The DEPI manufactured by Prime doesn’t have recording capability. The internal operating panel of the DEPI manufactured by Volumetrics provides maintenance personnel with the ability to perform calibration of the DEPI, system diagnostics and reset of all required operating parameters as necessary. Use of operating panel controls is presented in paragraph A.2.2 of this appendix. e Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator (DEPI) manufactured by Volumetrics: See Figures A-2 and A-3. Refer to Tables A-1 and A-2 for descriptions and use of all external and internal controls of the DEPI unit manufactured by Volumetrics.

A-1 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table A-1. External Control Components of Digital Electronic Pressure Indicator See Figure A-2. Change Function Pushbutton Switch Allows the user to page through main functions. AC Connector (J1) 3 pin connector for connection of 115 VAC 50/60 HZ. Transducer Connector (J2) 7 pin connector for connection of external transducer. Alarms Connector (J3) 6 pin connector for alarm outputs. Signal Output Connector (J4) 3 pin connector for 4-20 mA output proportional to pressure signal. RS-232 Connector 25 socket D type connector for RS-232 down loading ability. Fuse Holders 0.75 Amp fuse for system power (2), 0.5 Amp fuse for transducer power.

Table A-2. Internal Control Components of Digital Electronic See Figure A-4. Power Switch Pushbutton switch on the lower left corner that controls power to the unit. Reset Switch Pushbutton switch on the lower left corner for reset control of the unit. Keypad 16 key keypad for input and control of the unit. Display Consists of seven segment LEDs signal display. Mode LEDs 5 LEDs to display the mode of operation. Memory Function LEDs 8 LEDs to DISPLAY the memory function being used in the Memory Function mode. Normal Function LEDs 6 LEDs to display the normal function being used in the Normal Function mode. Record On LED The RECORD ON indicator lamp will be lit whenever recording is enabled. Pressure readings are recorded only when a speciﬁed amount of consecutive out-of-spec readings have been detected. Recording is not enabled when the pause mode is activated. The recording function is enabled by selecting CLEAR MEM.-START and pressing ENTER. Master/Repeater Switch In order for the DEPT to work properly, the ″MASTER/ REPEATER″ switch must be in the proper position. The ″MASTER″ position must be used when the gage is used by itself or as the master of a dual set combination, with the transducer connected directly to it. The ″REPEATER″ position is used when the input into the gage is another gage and not the transducer. Battery Low LED The BATTERY LOW light will be on whenever either of two backup battery’s voltage has fallen below 3.0 volts. If the BATTERY LOW light comes on, the low battery condition can be conﬁrmed by entering the DIAGNOSTICS mode and observing the battery voltage by reading chan- nels 1 and 2. Because there are two memory backup batteries, the DEPT is in no immediate danger of losing data during a power interruption.

A.1.2 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATOR SPECIFICATIONS.

A-2 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Power Requirements 115 VAC ± 5 %, 50/60 Hz Outputs 4.0 to 20.0 mA Proportional to transducer input DC 20 V nominal, non-regulated RS-232 DTE Baud Rate 1200 bps Word 7 bits Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Battery Backup 2 batteries at 9,000 hrs. each (maintain memory only) Range 0-60 psia Warm up time 15 minutes Accuracy Resolution ±0.01 psi Max/Min Pressure ±0.2 psi Alarm Setpoint ±0.2 psi Signal Output ±1.0% F.S. Operating Temperature 32 to 122° F Storage Temperature -40 to 180° F Enclosure 12″Hx12″Wx6″D Splashproof Default Parameters - Average Cycle normal pressure 8.0 seconds display: - High pressure alarm setpoint: 44.0 psig - Low pressure alarm setpoint: 25.0 psig - Alarm time delay: 8.0 seconds - Sample rate: 1.0 second

NOTE

Paragraph A.2 applies to the DEPI manufactured by Volumetrics only.

A.2 OPERATION.

Internal sonar dome pressure is sensed via capillary tubing which is mounted on the aft side of transducer compartment (6-0-0-Q). Sonar dome pressure is applied to pressure transducer P-X-26 which converts the applied pressure into an amperage value of 4.0 to 20.0 milliamps (mA). The P-X-26 output amperage is routed to the DEPI. The display unit monitor and convert the remote 4.0 to 20.0 mA signal from the transducer to a corresponding pressure display. If sonar dome pressure exceeds predetermined limits, the DEPI will automatically activate visual and audible alarm indicators, after an eight second delay, on the SDPS alarm panels.

A.2.1 STARTUP. Initial startup begins by opening the front cover of the DEPI and pressing the power switch once. Note that on cold boots only, when the system is ﬁrst turned on after replacement of memory batteries or memory I.C.’s, the system comes up reading “0 PRESSURE.” This signals that the user must access the MEMORY FUNCTIONS mode and update the time, date, alarm settings and calibration values. In the event of a warm boot, the unit will go directly to the same mode present before rebooting. Error codes (paragraph A.2.3) will be displayed if upon startup there is an error situation. When power is ﬁrst applied to the DEPI by turning on the power switch, the DEPI goes through an initialization procedure that checks all display lights and loads default values into battery backup memory for alarm setpoints, pause time, sensor calibration values, etc. The unit

A-3 S9165-AE-MMA-010 is then placed in a non-recording mode. If power to the unit was interrupted for any other reason, upon reappli- cation of power, the unit will begin to operate in the same mode present when the power was interrupted.

A.2.2 OPERATING MODES. The different operating modes are termed NORMAL FUNCTIONS, TEST ALARMS, DOWNLOAD DATA, DIAGNOSTICS and MEMORY FUNCTIONS. They are accessed by pressing the CHANGE MODE pushbutton on the operator panel. Each push of the pushbutton will advance indicator lights on the MODE panel. a. NORMAL FUNCTIONS MODE is the primary operating mode of the DEPI. In this MODE, the operator has access to REAL TIME PRESSURE, AVERAGE PRESSURE, MAX PRESSURE, MIN PRESSURE, START TIME and START DATE. These parameters can only be monitored in the NORMAL FUNCTION MODE. No changes to their values can be made. To change the displayed NORMAL FUNCTION, the operator presses the CHANGE FUNCTION pushbutton on the operator panel or the CHANGE FUNCTION pushbutton on the front cover.

(1) REAL TIME PRESSURE is the current sonar dome pressure in psig. The display is updated every 1 second.

(2) AVERAGE PRESSURE is a sliding average of the last 8 real time sonar dome pressure readings.

(3) MAXIMUM PRESSURE/TIME/DATE is the maximum pressure observed since a CLEAR MEM.-START. Displayed value is in psig. After a delay, the TIME that the maximum pressure occurred will be displayed automatically. After another delay, the DATE that the maximum pressure occurred will be displayed. After another delay, the display will go back to showing the MAXIMUM PRESSURE. This loop will continue to display the MAXIMUM PRESSURE/TIME/DATE until either the CHANGE FUNCTION or CHANGE MODE pushbutton is pressed.

(4) MINIMUM PRESSURE/TIME/DATE is the minimum pressure observed since a CLEAR MEM.-START. Displayed value is in psig. After a delay, the TIME that the maximum pressure occurred will be displayed automatically. After another delay, the DATE that the minimum pressure occurred will be displayed. After another delay, the display will go back to showing the MINIMUM PRESSURE. This loop will continue to display the MINIMUM PRESSURE/TIME/DATE until either the CHANGE FUNCTION or CHANGE MODE pushbutton is pressed.

(5) START TIME is the time that the CLEAR MEM.-START button was pushed. All recorded pressure readings have time and date of occurrence values associated with them.

(6) START DATE is the date that the CLEAR MEM.-START button was pushed. b. TEST ALARMS MODE. In this mode, the High Pressure and Low Pressure alarms can be tested individually. The “HI” represents the fact that the High Pressure alarm has been selected for testing. The “0” means that the alarm is not being sounded. To sound the alarm, press the ENTER pushbutton on the operator control panel. You will see the display change to “HI 1,” the “1 ” indicating that the alarm is sounding. To turn the alarm off press the ENTER button again. The display will then go back to “HI 0.” To test the Low Pressure alarm, press the CHANGE FUNCTION button. The display will then change to “LO 0.” To test the lower alarm, press the enter button. The display will then change to “LO 1,”and the lower alarm will sound. Pressing the enter button

A-4 S9165-AE-MMA-010 again will turn the alarm off. To exit this mode, press CHANGE MODE. If the DEPI is in the RECORD ON MODE, then when entering the TEST ALARM MODE, the status of the alarms will not be changed and the display will indicate the current alarm status. Alarm status can then be changed as needed. Upon exiting the TEST ALARM MODE, the alarms will be returned to the status appropriate to the current pressure reading. c. DOWNLOAD DATA MODE. This mode allows the accumulated sonar dome pressure data to be transferred via RS-232 device, such as a serial printer via the use of a modem cable. The communication parameters for both devices must be set to 1200 baud, no parity, 7 bit, 1 stop bit. The data output will be in the following format:

start time: 134515 start date: 910715 event date/time = 930328 150918 24.3 24.4 24.6 What the time of the alarm represents is the time in hours, minutes and seconds that the pressure value immediately following the time of alarm was recorded. The date of this occurrence will be the date signified by the “date: YYMMDD” string. The “start date: YYMMDD” string is generated only at the very beginning of the data recording. Readings are implicitly known to have been recorded 1 second after the previously recorded reading. In the above example, the pressure reading 24.3 psig was recorded at 150918. The later reading with the value 24.6 psig was recorded 2 seconds after the initial reading, i.e. at 150920. To transmit data over the RS-232 port, first select the DOWNLOAD DATA mode then press the enter key. When data has been transmitted the system will automatically switch back to normal mode. d. DIAGNOSTICS MODE. Diagnostics will allow the user to observe the different voltages within the DEPI. These are provided to assist during maintenance and troubleshooting procedures. To select a specific channel, press the CHANGE FUNCTION key. To exit, press the CHANGE MODE key. CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NORMAL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC 1 Battery 1 3.0 to 4.0 V change battery 1 2 Battery 2 3.0 to 4.0 V change battery 2 3 Transducer Excitation Volt- 15 to 25 V replace fuse F2 or line to transducer age 4 Transducer Current 4 to 25 mA replace transducer 5 Analog to Digital Converter 0 to 4096 replace A/D converter Count e. MEMORY FUNCTIONS MODE. Memory Functions can only be accessed by an operator who has opened the front panel and selected MEM. FUNCTIONS mode with the CHANGE MODE pushbutton. The only MEM. FUNCTION that has no value is the CLEAR MEM. - START function. The memory functions are: CURRENT TIME, CURRENT DATE, HIGH ALARM SETPOINT, LOW ALARM SETPOINT, ALARM DELAY, PAUSE, CALIBRATION MODE, and CLEAR MEM. - START. Once the MEM. FUNCTIONS mode has been selected, the various memory functions can be accessed by pressing the CHANGE FUNCTION pushbutton located on the operator control panel. To enter a new value into memory, press the STORE MEM. VALUE. Delete any mistakes using the DEL (delete) key. To exit MEMORY FUNCTIONS, press CHANGE MODE.

A-5 S9165-AE-MMA-010

(1) CURRENT TIME display the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds in 24-hour military format (HHMMSS).

(2) CURRENT DATE displays the current date in years, months, and days in the following format (YYM- MDD).

(3) HIGH ALARM SETPOINTS displays the pressure in PSI which must be met or exceeded in order to trigger the HIGH PRESSURE alarm.

(4) LOW ALARM SETPOINT displays the pressure in PSI which is the setpoint at which equal or lower values will trigger the LOW PRESSURE alarm.

(5) ALARM DELAY is the time in seconds (0 to 120 seconds) that must pass before the alarms are sounded and recording commences. The recording time is measured immediately after the alarm delay has elapsed and the pressure readings are still out of range (either less than the low alarm setpoint or more than the high alarm setpoint). During this, consecutive readings must also be out of speciﬁcations, otherwise the alarms are not triggered and recording does not start.

(6) PAUSE allows the operator to inhibit recordings but leave the alarms active. A “1” will be displayed if pause is on (system not recording), a “0” will be displayed if pause is not on. To toggle between the two options, press the ENTER button. The RECORD ON lamp will extinguish during pause.

(7) CALIBRATION MODE the operator to change the slope and y-intercept of the pressure calibration curve. When this function is selected with the CHANGE FUNCTION button, nothing is initially displayed. Press the “ENTER” button to display the current slope. Format is S XXXX with the S meaning SLOPE and the X for the slope value. If the operator wishes to change the slope value, type in a new value and press the STORE MEM. VALUE pushbutton. The y-intercept will then be displayed on the readout. Format is I XXXX with the I meaning intercept and X for the intercept value. If the operator does not wish to change the slope, but would like to view or change the y-intercept value, pressing the STORE MEM. VALUE pushbutton (without typing in a new value for the slope) will cause the y-intercept to be displayed without changing the value of the slope. The operator can follow the same procedure for changing the y-intercept, the display goes blank again until either the MODE button is pressed, or another function is selected. Expected values are near Slope = 2618 and Intercept = 3717.

(8) CLEAR MEMORY - START. This function activates recording, resets the start time and date to the current time, resets the maximum and minimum pressure readings, times and dates, and clears the recording memory. Activating this function in PAUSE mode will cancel the pause and enable recording.

A.2.3 ERROR CODES. The Electronic Pressure Gage has three possible ERROR CODES which are designated as E1, E2 and 325. These error codes are displayed when the corresponding error situation occurs. E1 Recording cannot proceed due to lack of available memory. E2 20.0 V non-regulated transducer voltage is not within acceptable range. Error code E2 is displayed if the 20 V transducer voltage is less than 15.0 V or greater than 25.0 V. 325 Keyboard malfunction, such as a stuck key.

A-6 S9165-AE-MMA-010

NOTE

Paragraph A.3 applies to the DEPI manufactured by Volumetrics only.

A.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE.

A.3.1 FUSE REPLACEMENT. When it appears that the unit will not power up, the fuse should be checked and/or replaced. a. Locate the fuseholder on the bottom panel of the unit. (See Figure A-2). b. Unscrew the fuseholder cap by pushing the cap in and rotating it in a counterclockwise direction for a quarter turn. The fuse will be withdrawn with the cap. c. Remove the fuse from the cap and inspect it. If it is blown, replace it with a new fuse of same size and rat- ing.

A.3.2 MEMORY BATTERY REPLACEMENT. a. Turn power to the unit off. b. Open the front cover of the unit. c. Remove the bezel that labels the switches and LED’s on the Display Board. d. Remove the spacers from the Display Board mounting screws. e. Remove Display Board far enough to gain access to the Motherboard. f. Remove Battery Backup Board by removing the bracket screw and unplugging the card. g. Replace batteries by de-soldering defective units and soldering new 3.6 volt lithium batteries to the card. h. Reinstall Battery Backup Board. i. Place the Display Board back onto its mounting screws. j. Place the spacers back onto the mounting screws. k. Remount the bezel and close the cover to the unit. l. Follow start up procedures IAW paragraph A.2.1.

A.3.3 CLOCK BATTERY REPLACEMENT. a. Follow steps a. through e. of A.3.2. b. Remove Clock Board by removing the bracket screw and unplugging the card. c. Remove battery from holder by carefully lifting the retaining clip. d. Install a new 3 volt lithium battery. e. Reinstall and secure Clock Card. f. Follow steps j. through l. of A.3.2.

A-7 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table A-3. DEPI Parts List PARTS LIST FOR MODEL 7809 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATOR VMC P/N MANUFACTURER MAN. P/N-NSN DESCRIPTION 07006030 ALCO A101 MHZa TOGGLE SWITCH W/SMALL HANDLE 07013006 CUTLER HAMMER C1006 PUSHBUTTON MOMENTARY SWITCH. 07015121 CUTLER HAMMER J33W6R PUSHBUTTON SWITCH ON/OFF 10000050 BUSSMAN MDL-.50 5920-01-035- FUSE 0.5A 0343 10000205 LITTLE FUSE 342.838L 5920-00-221- FUSE HOLDER 5673 10010075 BUSSMAN MDL.75 FUSE 0.75A 11060006 FILTER CONCEPTS INC 714- A2T2F DWG SUP- EMI FILTER 545-7003 PLIED 12000061 CONDOR HTAA-16W-A 6130-01- POWER SUPPLY 200-1039 52000065 CORCOM 5VR1 5915-01-292-2078 POWER FILTER 18900158 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PARALLEL PCB 24 BIT I/O 18890186 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB DISPLAY BOARD 18890188 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB RELAY BOARD 18900157 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB BATTERY BACKUP ROM/ RAM 18901002 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB A/D 12 BIT CONVERTER 18000063 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB MOTHERBOARD 1 /2 SIZE 18940402 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB ASSY SONAR DOME FIL- TER/REPEATER BD 70006000 HOWARD SPN3-15-1321 FAN 18920137 VOLUMETRICS proprietary PCB POWER LINE FILTER 18000072 VITEX RS232 SERIAL CARD- 1 PORT RS232 PCB 18000071 JCC CI-1011Q57 CLOCK CARD PCB 10020002 BUSSMAN MDL-2 5920-01-095- FUSE 0.75 AMP 3319 13000017 VARTA 408-943-0200 CR2430 3V 3 VOLT LITHIUM BATTERY, CLOCK BOARD 13000018 TADIRAN TL-2150P 6135-01-321- 3.6 VOLT BATTERY RAM 5512 MEMORY BRD 20000209 3-M 3417-6000 5935-00-329- 40 IDC CONNECTOR 6570 20000462 TRW 714-521-5210 FC37ST 37 PIN FEMALE SOLDER CON- NECTOR 20000196 3-M 3452-6016 5935-01-152- 16 PIN IDC CONNECTOR 6928 74000035 ACCURATE ELASTOMER 5330-00-774-6894 O-RING 74000036 DORN EQUIPMENT 5330-00-202-2590 PACKING ASSEMBLY 74000037 TRION INC 5975-00-877-6957 STUFFING TUBE 75930008 VOLUMETRICS 75930008 WINDOW ASSEMBLY VIATRAN 716-773-1700 318X10 RANGE 0-100 TRANSDUCER PSIA VIATRAN 716-773-1700 1-0-1560-A2 TRANSDUCER CABLE

A-8 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Table A-3. DEPI Parts List - Continued

PARTS LIST FOR MODEL 7809 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATOR VMC P/N MANUFACTURER MAN. P/N-NSN DESCRIPTION 10010175 POTTER & BRUMFIELD W28-XQ1 A-0.75 CIRCUIT BREAKER MAGNETEK 5975-01-254-0423 ENCLOSURE, ISOLATION TRANSFORMER 09000056 MAGNETEK N-67A 5950-00-897- ISOLATION TRANSFORMER 6439

NOTE

Volumetrics, Inc. is no longer in business.

Transducer and Transducer Cable Manufacturer: Viatran Corporations 300 Industrial Drive Grand Island, New York 14072 Phone: (716) 773-1700 FAX: (716) 773-2488 1.

A-9 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1. Figure A-1. Pressure Transducer P-X-26

A-10 S9165-AE-MMA-010

1. Figure A-2. External View of DEPI Enclosure

A-11 A-12 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure A-3. Internal DEPI Components S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure A-4. Internal Operating Panel

NOTE Paragraph A.4 applies to the DEPI manufactured by Prime Technology Inc.

A.4 INTRODUCTION.

The 9213SD is an electronic pressure gage. It is designed to display pressure in PSIG with a range of 00.00 to 99.99 PSIG. A 4 to 20 dcmA input signal received from a pressure transducer that is installed in the airlock compartment of the Sonar Dome, is translated to a PSIG value and displayed on the front panel of the gage.

A-13 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure A-5. Front Panel The 9213SD is programmed through switches located in the front panel (Figure A-5). A simple user interface allows for the set up of the unit where High Alarm, Low Alarm, Alarm Delay, and curve data are set up for the particular application at hand. This set up information is retained in a non-volatile memory that is installed in the Main Board. The Internal View of the Unit (Figure A-6) consists of three main assemblies,

1. Power Supply Assembly 2. Main Board Assembly 3. Display Board Assembly

Figure A-6. Internal View of the Unit.

A-14 S9165-AE-MMA-010

A.4.1 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY. The power supply assembly (Figure A-7) converts an externally supplied 115 VAC to an unregulated 24 VDC. The input is ﬁltered to protect the system against undesired signals. This assembly also holds the alarm relays (2).

Figure A-7. Power Supply Board

A.4.2 MAIN BOARD ASSEMBLY. The main board assembly (Figure A-8) contains the microprocessor, non- volatile memory, input signal interface, alarm control circuitry, isolated analog retransmission circuit and the digital retransmission circuit.

Figure A-8. Main Board.

A.4.3 DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY. The Display Board Assembly (Figure A-9) contains the digits and the drivers to control the digits.

A-15 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure A-9. Display Board A.4.4 USER INTERFACE. a. Front Panel (Figure A-10) When the front cover is swung open the user has access to the programming interface. This programming interface consists of switches and led digits. Labels placed directly under each switch properly identify the function associated with them. In addition there is a text box that explain the meaning of the ﬁfth led digit (the one that is not visible when the front cover is closed).

Figure A-10. Display Board b. Power Switch This switch controls the AC power to the unit. This is a double pole double throw switch. When the switch is in the on position the ON light and the display will be lit.

A-16 S9165-AE-MMA-010 c. Enter Program Mode This is a toggle switch. When the unit is powered hold this switch in the operate position (down) until the MEMORY CHANNEL digit changes to 2. This indicates the 9213SD is in programming mode. d. Change Value of Digit This is a toggle switch. Only operates when the unit is in programming mode (MEMORY CHANNEL digit is 2). By operating the switch the user is able to increment the digit that is flashing in the display. Every time the switch is operated the flashing digit increments by one count. When number 9 is reached a further operation of the switch will cause the digit to wrap around and start at 0 again. e. Shift Digit This is a toggle switch. Only operates when the unit is in programming mode (MEMORY CHANNEL digit is 2). By operating this switch the user is able to move (shift) to the right the digit that is flashing this allows the user to select the digit that will increment by operating the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT switch. If the switch is operated when the fourth digit is flashing, the shifting wraps around and first digit will flash allowing the user to go back to any of the digits. f. Enter Into Memory This is a toggle switch. Only operates when the unit is in programming mode (MEMORY CHANNEL digit is 2). By operating this switch the user is able to move (shift) to the right the digit that is flashing this allows the user to select the digit that will increment by operating the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT switch. If the switch is operated when the fourth digit is flashing, the shifting wraps around and first digit will flash allowing the user to go back to any of the digits. g. Fuses Three fuse holders are located in this panel, two of them are in series with the input power and the third of them (identified as SPARE) has a spare fuse and lamp that can be used in any of the other two positions in case one of the fuses or lamp goes bad. The fuse holders used are of the kind that indicates the burned fuse by lighting the neon that is inside the case of the fuse. This way the user can quickly identify the burned fuse and restore the unit to normal operation.

A.4.5 CONNECTORS. (Figure A-11)

Figure A-11. Front Panel

A-17 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Figure A-12. Connectors A.4.6 LED DISPLAY. The unit has a numeric display that consists of ﬁve; seven segments red led digits each one-inch in height. Four of these digits are visible through the front window of the unit and they display the pressure in PSIG, the ﬁfth digit is not visible through the window and is only used when the unit is in program mode.

A.4.7 ANALOG RETRANSMISSION The unit has an analog retransmission output through connector J4. This output consists ofa4-20dcmA analog signal that is proportional to the input and isolated from the unit power supply. This signal can be used to drive other remote indicators giving the customer the advantage of also having a remote monitoring point.

A.4.8 DIGITAL RETRANSMISSION . The unit has a digital retransmission output through connector J5. The digital transmission is available in two serial communication standards RS232 and RS-422. This is a non-isolated output. The message frame is structured as follows Field Size Value (Hex) Range (Decimal)

Message Header 1 byte 0X04 Number of bytes in frame 1 byte 0X0A High Alarm set point 2 byte binary value 0-9999 Low Alarm set point 2 byte binary value 0-9999 4 Digit Display reading 2 byte binary value 0-9999 Message checksum 1 byte 2s Complement of the sum of the previous 8 bytes. Message trailer/End of Frame 1 byte 0XFF

A-18 S9165-AE-MMA-010

Checksum example:

Data ﬂow ...... ø0x04,0x0A,0x1F,0x40,0x07,0xD0,0x13,0x88,0x21,0xFF Checksum______| Checksum calculation: Checksum is allowed to rollover 0x04 + 0x0A + 0x1F + 0x40 + 0x07 + 0xD0 + 0x13 + 0x88 = 0xDF = 0x21

The user can use the following BASIC program to receive data from the Sonar Dome and display it on a PC.

Sample Basic program:

10 CLS : KEY OFF 20 KEY 1, ″″ 30 LOCATE 25, 30 40 PRINT ″<>″ 50 LOCATE 1, 1, 1 60 ON KEY(1) GOSUB 170 70 KEY(1) ON 80 OPEN ″COM1:19200,N,8,1,CS,DS″ FOR RANDOM AS #1 130 IF LOC(1) < 10 GOTO 130 140 x$ = INPUT$(LOC(1), #1) IF HEX$(ASC(MID$(x$, 1, 1))) <> ″4″ THEN GOTO 130 . . . ‘ do checksum test here . . loal& = ASC(MID$(x$, 3, 1)) * 256 + ASC(MID$(x$, 4, 1)) hial& = ASC(MID$(x$, 5, 1)) * 256 + ASC(MID$(x$, 6, 1)) aval& = ASC(MID$(x$, 7, 1)) * 256 + ASC(MID$(x$, 8, 1)) PRINT ″Testing″ LOCATE 5, 1 150 PRINT ″lo alrm:″; loal& PRINT ″hi alrm:″; hial& PRINT ″data:″; aval& 160 GOTO 130 170 CLOSE 180 CLS 190 END

~~A.4.9 SET UP PROCEDURE. As an example of the way the unit is setup and programmed for a particular application, a hypothetical curve will be entered. The curve has the following characteristics:~~

~~A-19 S9165-AE-MMA-010~~

Figure A-13. % of Full Scale To set up this curve only two points need to be specified. Assume these points are (80,45.53) and (10,10.53). Once these points are entered the unit program is able to define the curve (line) without the user having to calculate slope and y intercept. The following procedure explains how this information is entered. a. -Hold down the ENTER PROGRAM MODE switch until the MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 2. This is the curve entry mode. b. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 2. The switch labeled CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT increments the digit that is flashing. To select the next digit use the switch labeled SHIFT DIGIT. By using this two switches make the display read 80.00, then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. c. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 3. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT and the SHIFT DIGIT switches, make the display read 45.53, then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. This is the PSIG that the input represents. d. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 4. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT and the SHIFT DIGIT switches, make the display read 10.00 then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. This is the % of full scale that the input in step 6 represents. e. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 5. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT and the SHIFT DIGIT switches, make the display read 10.53 then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. This is the PSIG that the input represents. f. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 6. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT and the SHIFT DIGIT switches, make the display read 15 PSIG, then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY button. This is the LOW ALARM point. g. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 7. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT and the SHIFT DIGIT switches, make the display read 39.5 PSIG then toggle the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. This is the HI ALARM point. h. -The MEMORY CHANNEL digit displays 8. Using the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT switch, make the dis-

~~A-20 S9165-AE-MMA-010~~

play read 0.5. Press the ENTER INTO MEMORY switch. This is the alarm delay in seconds. The unit enters the normal operation mode indicated by the digit 1 on the MEMORY CHANNEL DIGIT. The display is the pressure in PSIG. As the CHANGE VALUE OF DIGIT is toggled the display will show 0.5, 4, 6, 8, 10 that are the different alarm delays available in seconds.

A.4.10 TROUBLESHOOTING. The 9213SD unit should be field serviced at the assembly level only. Any component replacement should be conducted in a controlled environment to assess the component failure and correctness of its replacement. This troubleshooting guide identifies problems at the assembly level. a. The Unit does not power up. 1. If the lights on the FUSES are on, turn off the power, change the fuse and reapply power. If the fuse fails again this is an indication of a short internal to the unit. 2. If the lights on the FUSES are off, verify that power is available. To do this, verify the power lamp condition. If the power lamp is lit this is an indication of power supply working if is not lit this is an indication of a failure in the power supply or a burned power lamp. Verify the condition of the power lamp if found to be good then there is a problem with the internal power supply. To replace the power supply board the power connector shall be removed and then proceed with disassembly of the unit to gain access to the power supply board. b. Segments on the display are not lit. 1. This requires replacement of the Display Board. The factory does not recommend replacement of any electronic component on the display board assembly. c. Alarm Contacts do not operate on alarm condition. 1. Make sure the cable to connector J3 is properly inserted. 2. This could be a problem with the alarm relays or the main board assembly. These boards are not field repairable; it is recommended to change the power supply board and the main board. In order to this make sure the power connector is disconnected from the unit prior to disassembly. d. Unit does not enter Program mode. 1. Make sure that the ENTER PROGRAM MODE switch is held at least two seconds for the unit to recog- nize the command. 2. If the unit does not enter PROGRAM MODE after holding the switch in the proper position for at least two seconds, then there is a problem that is not field repairable. Send the unit back to the factory for repair.

~~A.4.11 CALIBRATION. Technical Manual ST700-AV-PRO-020 provides the calibration procedure for W-GA- 10.~~

~~A.4.12 MANUFACTURER INFORMATION. Prime Technology Inc. 344 Twin Lakes Road North Branford, CT 06471 Phone number: (203) 481-5721 www.primetechnology.com~~

~~A-21 / (A-22 Blank) A-22 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@ S9165-AE-MMA-010~~

~~REAR SECTION~~

~~TECHNICAL MANUAL DEFICIENCY/EVALUATION REPORT (TMDER)~~

~~NOTE~~

Ships, training activities, supply points, depots, Naval Shipyards and Supervisors of Shipbuilding are requested to arrange for the maximum practical use and evaluation of NAVSEA technical manuals. All errors, omissions, discrepancies and suggestions for improvement to NAVSEA technical manuals shall be forwarded to: COMMANDER, CODE 310 TMDER, BLDG 1388 NAVSURFWARCENDIV NSDSA 4363 MISSILE WAY PORT HUENEME CA 93043-4307 on NAVSEA/SPAWAR Technical Manual Deﬁciency/Evaluation Report (TMDER), NAVSEA form 4160/1. To facilitate such reporting, print, complete and mail NAVSEA form 4160/1 below or submit TMDERS at web site: https://nsdsa2.phdnswc.navy.mil/tmder/tmder-generate.asp?lvl=1 All feedback comments shall be thoroughly investigated and originators will be advised of action resulting therefrom. Copies of NAVSEA form 4160/1 may be requisitioned from the Naval Systems Data Support Activity Code 310 at the above address.

~~TMDER / MAILER~~

~~Rear-1 / (Rear-2 Blank) Rear-2 @@FIpgtype@@BLANK@@!FIpgtype@@~~